KIP7100 Service Manual

Service Manual

Version B.0a
Chapter 1
Introduction

Page
1. 1 Features 1- 2

1. 2 Specifications 1- 3
1. 2. 1 General 1- 3
1. 2. 2 Printer part 1- 4
1. 2. 3 Scanner part 1- 6
1. 3 Specifications for Originals 1- 7

1. 3. 1 Original - Standard 1- 7
1. 3. 2 Special Documents 1- 7
1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals 1- 7
1. 4 Appearance 1- 8
1. 4. 1 Front 1- 8
1. 4. 2 Rear 1- 9
1. 5 Specifications for Scan Original 1-10
1. 6 Specifications for Printing Media 1-13

1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use 1-13
1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody 1-14
1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition 1-15
1-1 K124sm1e1
1. 1 Features
(1) The KIP 7100 is a single footprint Multi-Function Printer which can copy, scan and print.
Advanced drivers and comprehensive print utilities make the KIP 7100 an advanced, easy to
use system. (some functions may be optional)
(2) KIP HDP technology generates no waste toner.
(3) The combination of the KIP HDP Plus imaging system with mono-component minute toner
produces high definition lines, distinctive greyscale and consistent blacks.
(4) The maximum paper width is 36” (914mm) wide, and the minimum is 11” (279mm). The
maximum paper length is 6m (with 36” paper) or, and the minimum is 8.5” (210mm).
(5) Up to 600dpi print resolutions with an enhanced scanning system produces the highest quality
images controlled by an advanced KIP Image Process System.
(6) Easy access to USB port allows users to provide efficient productivity by using “File to Print” /
“Scan to USB” (option).
(7) 2-way print ejection (top / rear) suits the preference of the user’s print handling.
(8) Various media source; roll media feeding (2 rolls), cut sheet manual feeding, Paper Tray
multiple cut sheet feeder (option)
(9) Contactless IC card reader for more efficient accounting management (option)
(10) User-friendly touch screen control panel with tilt / swivel
1-2 K124sm1e1
1. 2 Specifications
1. 2. 1 General
Subject Specification
Model KIP 7100
Configuration Console
Power consumption 1,440W (US model)
(Maximum) 1,680W (EU / Asia model)
(scanner / controller included)
Power consumption 30W or less
(Low power mode)
Acoustic noise Idling Max. 60db
Printing Max. 65db
(impulse sound excluded) EN ISO 7779
Ozone Max. 0.05ppm (Measurement method under UL Standard)
Dimensions 1346mm (Width) x 704mm (Depth) x 1105mm (Height)
(UI, Tray excluded)
Weight About 244kg (538lb)
Environmental condition (Temperature)
for usage 10 to 32 degrees Centigrade / 50 to 89.6 F
(Humidity)
15 to 85% RH
Interface Network Interface (10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX / 1000 BASE-T)
Rating Input Power In the US : 120V plus/minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 12A
In Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 7A
NOTE
The above specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-3 K124sm1e1
1. 2. 2. Printer part
Printing method LED Array Electro photography
Photoreceptor Organic Photoconductive Drum
Print speed 80mm per second
(Metric) 3.3ppm/A0 5.6ppm/A1 Landscape
(Inch) 3.4ppm/E 5.8ppm/D Landscape
Print head LED Array
Resolution of print head 600dpi x 600dpi
Print width Maximum 914mm or 36”
Minimum 297mm or 11” (Roll paper)
210mm or 8.5” (Cut sheet paper)
Print length Maximum
(Standard) 6,000mm / 19.7ft for 36” / A0 wide (plain paper / bond)
or “5 x Standard length” (plain paper / bond)
“2 x Standard length” (tracing paper / vellum)
“1 x Standard length” (film)
(Option) 200,000mm
Minimum 210mm / 8.5”

NOTE
If the print is longer than 6,000mm, its image quality or the
reliability of paper feeding is not guaranteed.
Print size ISO (mm)

(Paper Tray, option)
Width
Length 594 420 297 210
420 X X
297 X X
ANSI (inch)
Width
Length
24 22 18 17 12 11 9 8.5
18 X X
17 X X
12 X X
11 X X
Warm up time Shorter than 4 minutes 30 seconds

(At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, and plain paper is used)
First print time 22 seconds (D Landscape, Front Stacking)
(At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, and plain paper is used)
Fusing method Heat and Pressure Rollers
Development method Dry type non-magnetic mono-component toner
1-4 K124sm1e1
Media source 2 Roll Decks
Manual Feeder (single cut sheet)
Paper Tray (multiple cut sheet, option)
Media (Recommended Media)
US model:
Bond 64g/m2 to 80g/m2, US Bond (PB-20)
Vellum US Vellum (XV-20)
Film 4MIL (PF-4DDME)
Europe/Asia model:
Plain Paper 64g/m2 to 80g/m2, Oce Red Label (75g/m2)
Tracing Paper Oce Transparent Paper (80g/m2)
Film Oce 3.5MIL
Storage of consumables (Toner cartridge)
Store the cartridge within the temperature range from 0 to
35 degrees Centigrade and within the humidity range from 35
to 85% RH.
NOTE
1-5 K124sm1e1
1. 2. 3 Scanner part
Scanning method Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
(5 pieces of A4 sized CIS)
Light source LED (R/G/B)
Setting of original Face up
Starting point of scan Center
Scan width Max: 914.4mm
Min : 210mm
Scan length Max: 6,000mm (Including the margin area)
Min : 210mm (Including the margin area)
Margin area 3mm from leading, trailing and both side edges
Optical resolution 600dpi
Digital resolution 200 / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Original transportation Sheet through type
Transportable original Max: 1.60mm
thickness Min : 0.05mm
NOTE (for Old Scanner)

If the original is thicker than 0.6mm, its image quality is not
guaranteed.
NOTE (for New Scanner)

Image quality for an original with 0.25mm or thicker is
guaranteed only in a standard size even the scanner
physically accepts it.
Scanning speed 65 mm per second (mono, 600dpi)
NOTE
1-6 K124sm1e1
1. 3 Specifications for Originals
1. 3. 1 Original Standards
(1) The width of original must range from 8.5” to 36” (210mm to 914.4mm).
(2) The length of original must range 8.5” (210mm) to 25,000mm
(3) The thickness of original must range from 0.05mm to 0.65mm. (Old Scanner)
(4) The thickness of original must range from 0.05mm to 0.25mm. (New Scanner)
(5) The shape of original must be square, and it must be standard sized.
(6) The type of original must belong to any of the followings.
Plain paper
Coated paper (High or middle class plain paper is coated with the paint.)
Tracing paper
Pansy Trace Paper (Both sides of the film is sandwiched between Tracing paper.)
Film
Newspaper
Cardboard paper
1. 3. 2 Special Documents
The following kinds of originals are “special”. It is possible to scan them, but the image quality
and feed reliability are not guaranteed.
(1) The type of original is acceptable, but the thickness and type may not be:
Booklets
Original with a Hanger
Cut and Pasted originals
(2) These original may not damage the scanner, but these types are NOT recommended:
following ones.
Cloth
Aluminium Kent Paper
1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals

It is impossible to use the following types of originals because they are likely to damage the
scanner.
(1) Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage)

(2) Slippery originals which is difficult to transport
(3) Irregularly shaped originals (Not square in shape)
(4) Extremely curled originals (Diameter of curl is less than 50mm)
(5) Extremely creased originals
(6) Torn originals
1-7 K124sm1e1
1. 4 Appearance
1. 4. 1 Front
10
5 4 3
6
2
2 11
12
7
8
1
No. Name Function

1 Main Switch You can turn on/off the KIP 7100.
2 Original Guides Feed the original under the Scanner Unit along the Original
Guides.
3 User Interface This is a Touch Screen, and many kinds of user operation are
available.
PLEASE DO NOT push the LCD area too strong.
4 Emergent Stop Button Press this button when you would like to stop copying or
scanning emergently.
5 Scanner Unit Read the original with this unit when you make scan or copy.
6 Toner Hatch Open the Toner Hatch when you replace the Toner Cartridge.
(Original Table) Also put the original here and then feed it into the Scanner Unit
when you make scan or copy.
7 Engine Unit Open Lever Pull up these levers when you open the Engine Unit.
8 Bypass Feeder Feed a cut sheet paper from the Bypass Feeder.
9 Roll Deck Roll media can be loaded here.
10 Print Tray These trays catch ejected prints.
11 Stylus Use this to press buttons on the touch screen.
PLEASE DO NOT use any other pointed object to tap on the UI.
12 USB Port Your USB flash memory storage can be installed here.
5VDC max.
1-8 K124sm1e1
1. 4. 2 Rear
7
1
No. Name Function

1 Exit Cover Open the Exit Cover when you remove the paper misfed
inside the Fuser Unit.
2 LAN Port Connect the LAN Cable to connect the KIP 7100 to the
network. (Do not connect a telephone line)
3 Dehumidify Heater Switch Turn on the Dehumidify Heater with this switch when you
(Optional in the US) would like to dry the paper in the humid season.
4 Breaker It is possible to shut off supplying the AC power.
5 Inlet Socket Connect the Power Cord here.
6 COM Port (Optional) For an optional device
(D-Sub Connector 9 pins: 12VDC max.)
7 USB Port For an optional device
Service Use. 5VDC max.
1-9 K124sm1e1
1. 5 Specifications for Scan Original
A scan original must satisfy the following specifications.
Thickness 0.05mm to 0.6mm *1

(Old Scanner)
Thickness 0.05mm to 0.25mm *2
(New Scanner)
Width 210mm to 914.4mm
Length 210mm to 6,000mm *3
*1 : If an original is thicker than 0.6mm, its image quality is not guaranteed even it is transported.
*2. Image quality for an original with 0.25mm or thicker is guaranteed only in a standard size even the scanner physically accepts it.
*3. Image quality for an original over 6,000mm in length is not guaranteed.
Do not scan the following kinds of original, because you may damage the original or scanner itself!
Sticked with paste
Paste
Torn
Folded (Leading edge)
So much curled
(Diameter is smaller than
50mm.)
1-10 K124sm1e1
Not square
Wet image
Wet
Made of metal or fabric

Metal Fabric
Patched
Clipped or stapled
Clipped Stapled
1-11 K124sm1e1
The following kinds of originals can be read with using a carrier sheet.
Image quality or the reliability of paper feeding for them is not guaranteed.
Rough surface
(Carbon paper for example) Rough surface
Punched
1-12 K124sm1e1
1. 6 Specifications for Printing Media
1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use

Do not use the following kinds of printing paper because you may damage the print engine!
Excessively curled
(a diameter of 50 mm or
less)
Folded
Creased
Torn
Punched
1-13 K124sm1e1
Paper that has already been
used for printing
Extremely sticky
Extremely thin and soft
Extremely slippery
OHP Film
CAUTION
Do not use the paper with staple, or do not use such conductive paper as aluminium foil and
carbon paper.
Such paper may become cause for the fire.
NOTE
(1) Print image may become light if printed on a paper of rough surface.
(2) Print image may become defective if the print paper is much curled.
(3) It will become a cause for paper mis-feed, defective print image or crease of paper if you
use a paper that does not satisfy the specification.
(4) Do not use a paper of which surface is very special, such as thermal paper, art paper,
aluminium foil, carbon paper and conductive paper.
(5) Do not use papers with unpacked (exposed in high / low temperature & humidity) in a
long period. Such papers may result in mis-feed, defective image or paper creasing.
(6) Tracing paper exposed to air over a long period tends to defective printing.
Removing one round on the surface of the tracing roll paper from the beginning is
recommended.
(7) Initial cut for the leading edge before making a long print is recommended.
1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody

Keep the paper in the custody taking care of the following matters.
1. Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight.

2. Keep the paper away from high humidity. (It must be less than 70%)
3. Put the paper on a flat place
4. If you will keep the paper in the custody, which you have already unpacked, put it into the
polyethylene bag to avoid the humidity.
1-14 K124sm1e1
1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition
Humidity(%) Possible problem Necessary treatment

Low “Void of image”, “crease of paper” and 1. Install the humidifier in the room, and
other problems occurs when you print humidify the room air.
with plain paper and tracing paper. 2. Remove the paper from the machine
right after the completion of print, and
keep it in a polyethylene bag.
“Void of image” occurs when you print If you will not make print soon, remove
with tracing paper. the tracing paper from the machine and
40% Remove the paper from the machine after
everyday use, and keep it in a
polyethylene bag.
70% “Void of image” occurs when you print If you will not make print soon, remove
with plain paper and tracing paper. the tracing paper from the machine and
“Void of image”, “crease of paper” and 1. Turn on the Dehumidify Heater.
other problems occurs when you print (if installed)
with plain paper and tracing paper. 2. Remove the paper from the machine
right after the completion of print, and
High
NOTE
(1) KIP 7100 is equipped with the Dehumidify Heater (option for US model.)
Using it in high humidity environment (65% or higher) is recommended.
(2) “Void of image” and “crease of paper” will occur in case of extremely high or low
humidity.
Normal Print Crease of paper
If the media is humidified ;
Normal Print Loss of image
If the media is humidified ;
1-15 K124sm1e1
Chapter 2
Installation
The machine had passed our strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory, and
then it was packaged and shipped. Installation is an important work to make the machine
work at customer’s site as same as it has passed our strict inspection before shipment.
A service engineer has to understand machine’s function very well. Install the machine in a
good environmental place in a correct way, and then check that it works perfectly.
Page
2. 1 Installation Requirements 2- 1
2. 2 Unpacking 2- 2
2. 2. 1 Unpacking (for Old Scanner) 2- 2
2. 2. 2 Unpacking (for New Scanner) 2- 3
2. 2. 3 Confirmation of Accessories 2- 4
2. 3 Leveling KIP 7100 2- 6
2. 4 Setup of the Machine 2- 8
2. 5 Installing Monitor 2-14
2. 6 Installing Accessories 2-17
2. 7 KIP Installation Wizard 2-19
2. 8 Stitching Adjustment (for New Scanner) 2-23

2. 8. 1 Launching K129 Diag 2-23
2. 8. 2 Stitching Adjustment 2-27
2. 8. 3 Creating Backup Data 2-43
K124sm2e1
2. 1 Installation Requirements
The following conditions are required for the installation of the equipment.
1. Power source should be rated as:

U.S.A: 120V +/-10%, 50/60Hz, 15A or higher
Europe and Asia: 220-240V+6% or -10%, 50/60Hz, 10A or higher
2. The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit.
3. The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.
1. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.

2. The outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Site Environmental Conditions

Temperature Range
10 C to 32 C
50 F to 89.6 F
Humidity Range
15% to 85% RH. (NON CONDENSING)
Keep the printer away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers, refrigerators or kerosene (oil) stove.
1. The installation site must not have any open flames, dust or ammonia gases.
2. The equipment must not be exposed to the air vents from heating/cooling systems.
3. The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight. Please draw curtains to block any sunlight.
When you open the printer (Upper Half), do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to strong (intense) light as this will
damage the Drum.
Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is within all safe levels.
(see certifications)
Ventilate the room, if so required.
Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.

(Refer to the following figure.) The floor must be level and the strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the equipment.
300mm/12” or larger
with no option
(Rear)
L* KIP 7100 R*
(Front)
800mm/32” or larger for Roll Deck
900mm/35.4” or larger
for Paper Tray (option)
*L+R=350mm/14” or larger
(R must be larger than L)
(L=50mm/2” or larger recommended)
2-1 K124sm2e2
2. 2 Unpacking
2. 2. 1 Unpacking (for Old Scanner)
1. Unwrap the machine. Put aside the following cardboard boxes.
- Top : UI Unit Box (1), Accessory Box (2), empty Drum Box (3), Scanner Cover (4)
- Roll Deck (Inside) : Exit Tray Box (5)
2
1
UI Unit Box Accessory Box

- Monitor Assembly - Original Guide
- Holder Assy - Cap Assy
- Pen - Power Cord
- Bind Head Screw (M4x6) - Toner Cartridge
- User’s Manual (CD-ROM)
- User’s Manual (Germam)*
- Setup Procedure
* Europe Model only

4
Exit Tray Box

- Exit Tray
- Exit Tray 2
2. Open the Scanner Unit. Remove the protection mat (6). Put aside Shading Sheet (7) for the scanner adjustment.
DO NOT DISCARD THE SHEET. HANDLE WITH GREAT CARE.
KEEP THE SHEET IN SAFE COSTODY FOR AVOIDING DAMAGE.
Remove the protection sheet (8) on the top rear of the machine. Close the Scanner Unit.
6 7
2-2 K124sm2e2
2. 2. 2 Unpacking (for New Scanner)
1. Unwrap the machine. Put aside the following cardboard boxes.
- Top : UI Unit Box (1), Accessory Box (2), empty Drum Box (3)
-Scanner Cover (Inside) : Shading Sheet (4)
- Roll Deck (Inside) : Exit Tray Box (5)
1 2
UI Unit Box Accessory Box

- Monitor Assembly - Original Guide
- Holder Assy - Cap Assy
- Pen - Power Cord
- Bind Head Screw (M4x6) - Toner Cartridge
- User’s Manual (CD-ROM)
- User’s Manual (German)*
- Setup Procedure
* Europe Model only
Exit Tray Box

- Exit Tray
- Exit Tray 2
4
2. Lift up both sides (6) of the Scanner Unit, and then remove the protection mat (7).
Gently press Scanner Unit down and firmly close it.
2-3 K124sm2e2
2. 2. 3 Confirmation of Accessories
Confirm the following parts are attached to the product.
Accessory Box
Item name Picture Number Item name Picture Number
of article of article
Original 1 each Cap Assy 4

Guide
1&2
Toner 4 Power 1
Cartridge (USA Cord
(300g) Model)
2
(Europe /
Asia
Model)
User’s 1 Setup 1
Manual Procedure
(CD Rom)
User’s 1
Manual
(German)
Europe Model only
2-4 K124sm2e2
UI Unit Box
Monitor 1 Holder 1
Assembly Assy
Pen 1 Bind Head 4

Screw
(M4x6)
Exit Tray Box

Exit Tray 2 Exit Tray 2 1
Others
Shading 1 Drum Box 1

Sheet ( empty )
for Old Scanner
Shading 1
Sheet
for New Scanner
2-5 K124sm2e2
2. 3 Leveling KIP 7100
1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine.
2. Remove the screws (2) at both sides.
2
2
3. Remove 4 screws (3) at the bottom of both sides.
3 3
4. Remove 6 screws (4) at the back on both sides.
4 4
6. Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6).
5 6
2-6 K124sm2e2
7. Close the Engine Unit.
8. Rotate 4 Leveling Bolts (7) on the bottom of the KIP 7100 with a wrench to bring up the KIP 7100 from the floor.
Keep 85mm of distance between the bottom plate and the floor. (It is about 80mm before the adjustment.)
85mm
NOTE
Do not rotate the Levelling Bolts too much.
If the distance between the bottom plate and the floor becomes wider than 95mm, the Adjuster Bolt may be removed.
9. Put a level (8) on the specified positions shown to check the level of the KIP 7100.
If not leveled, adjust by rotating the Adjustment Bolts.
Right Left
8 8 8
Front
2-7 K124sm2e2
2. 4 Setup of the Machine
1. Pull up on the Levers (1) to open the Engine.
2. Carefully remove the protection mat (2) under the Drum.
3. Open the Cover 4 (3).
4. Remove the screws (4) and flat washers (5) to release the Bands (6) at both sides.
6
6
2-8 K124sm2e3
5. Rotate up the Pins (7) and move them to the inside to pull them out from the holes.
Remove the Cover 4 (3).
6. Open the Bypass Feeder (8).
7. Remove 4 pieces of screw (9).
9
9
2-9 K124sm2e3
8. Close the Bypass Feeder (8). Open the Developer Press Unit (10).
10
9. Disconnect the connector (11).
11
10. Remove 2 pieces of red screw (12) at both sides of the Developer Unit, which protect the Developer Unit from vibration during
transportation. (They are no longer required.)
12
12
11. Holding both side plates firmly, slide the Developer Unit (13) out of the machine.
13
2-10 K124sm2e3
12. Remove 1 label (14) on the toner supply hole of Toner Hopper.
14
13. Remove 8 labels (14)(15) to remove wrapping sheet (16).
15
15
14
15
15 16
14
14. The process unit and toner cover should be open. The Photoconductive Drum is covered with a black sheet (21). Gently
remove it pulling from the front.
17
17
2-11 K124sm2e3
15. Install the Developer Unit (13) to the machine. Connect the connector (11).
11
13
NOTE
Both the Gear Helical 20T (18) on machine side and the Gear Helical 28T (19) on Developer Unit side must be in gear firmly
with each other, but they may not be in gear with each other by just installing the Developer Unit to the machine.
18
19
After installing the Developer Unit to the machine, rotate Gear Helical 34T (20: instead of Gear Helical 20T) by hand from under
the Engine Unit.
Both gears will be in gear by this way.
20
16. Close and fix the Developer Press Unit (10), and put back the Cover 4 (3).
10 3
2-12 K124sm2e3
18. Both the LED Head and the Image Corona are locked with the screws (21) being separated from the Drum, not to be damaged
during the transportation. Loosen the screws (21) to unlock the Fixing Brackets (22) at both sides. Pressing down the Fixing
Brackets (22) firmly, tighten the screws (21).
Left side Right side
22 22
21 21
NOTE
Please satisfy the following requirements before performing Step 18.
(1) The black sheet has been removed from the Drum. (See the former procedure 14.)
(2) The Engine Unit is closed firmly. (See the former procedure 17.)
Otherwise a proper distance can not be kept between LED Head and Drum.
2-13 K124sm2e3
2. 5 Installing Monitor
1. Insert the screws (M4x6) (1) into the screw hole on the right side frame of the machine.
1 1
2. Hook Monitor Assy (2) on the screws (1).
1 1
2-14 K124sm2e4
3. Fix Monitor Assy with 2 screws (M4x6) (3), and then tighten 2 screws (1).
3 3
1 1
2-15 K124sm2e4
4. Connect USB Cable (4, for Monitor), VGA Cable (5) and Power Supply cable (6) to the concerning connectors of the machine frame.
Then connect one more USB Cable (7, for external USB device).
4 For Monitor
For Data 7
NOTE
Be sure to insert the USB plug of the USB Cables (4) (7) to the correct receptacles.
First connect the monitor USB Cable (4) to the back of the 2 connectors on the machine. (left as viewed from front)
Then connect the external USB Cable (7) to the rest (front) connector. (right from front).
5. Remove the bottom left screw (8) on the back of Monitor Assy. Attach Holder Assy (9) and fix them together with the screw (8). (Put
Pen (10) in either hole of Holder Assy)
10
Reference
Monitor Assy can be turned up/down and right/left. Adjust the movement by the concerning screw.
for vertical
movement
2-16 K124sm2e4
2. 6 Installing Accessories
1. Exit Tray (1), Original Guide (2) and Exit Tray 2 (3).
1
NOTE
Install Exit Tray 2 (3) in the correct direction.
Wrong Correct
2-17 K124sm2e5
2. Open Cover 4 (4).
3. Shake Toner Cartridge (5) several times.
4. Pressing Lock Lever (6), locate the pin (7) on top of Toner Cartridge to the groove (8).
Make sure that Lock Lever (6) correctly locks Toner Cartridge.
6 8
5. Turn Toner Cartridge body (9) in one revolution to the arrow direction to open the toner supply hole so that the tab (10) goes into
the notch (11).
12
9 10
11
NOTE
It is not necessary for the cartridge bottom to
be locked by the lever (12).
That will be done at the machine’s power on.
6. Close Cover 4 (4).
2-18 K124sm2e5
2. 7 KIP Installation Wizard
On the initial power on, the UI screen shows “KIP Installation” wizard. Follow the wizard to complete the machine setup.
NOTE
KIP Installation Wizard appears on the initial power on till the completion of the wizard.
1. Check that Toner Cartridge is set correctly.
2. Connect Power Cable and LAN Cable with the printer.

Press “ ” side to turn on the printer.
LAN Cable
Power Cable
Press “ | ” side.
WARNING
(1) Do not handle the Power Plug with wet hands, or you may receive an electrical shock.
(2) Make sure to ground the machine for safety.
(3) Do not plug the printer into a multi-wiring connector in which other devices are plugged.
It may overheat the outlet and may result in a fire.
(4) The outlet must satisfy the following conditions.
In U.S.A. : 120V plus/minus 10%, 50/60Hz and 15A
In Europe and Asia : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz and 10A
2-19 K124sm2e5
3. “KIP Installation wizard” appears. It will prompt you to enter several settings.
Follow the wizard for the rest of the setup, and press the [FINISHED] at the end.
The printer will restart automatically. Please wait.
4. The UI screen shows the procedure of replacing roll media. Follow the instruction to load a roll media.
2-20 K124sm2e5
5. The wizard is completed.
The User Interface (UI) starts operating, and displays the following Copy Mode Screen in one minute.
The Ready Indicator on Copy Mode Screen will flash during warming up.
Ready Indicator
The UI screen may vary depending on your system configuration.

(Shown with available options)
2-21 K124sm2e5
Following step is for new scanner
The later pages show the Stitching Adjustment for the reading sensors on the scanner
unit to enhance the scanning quality. (recommended)
2-22
2. 8 Stitching Adjustment (for New Scanner)
2. 8. 1 Launching K129 Diag
1. Press [? HELP] on the Home screen.
2. Press [Service]. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
3. Service Configuration screen will appear. On “Setup Menu 1”, press [OK].
2-23
4. Press [Reset].
5. Minimize the “IPS Unattend” window.
6. Open “Diagnostics” folder (gear icon) in the lower right of the screen.
2-24
7. Run “K129 Diag”.
Reference
Other ways to run the "K129 Diag" are described on the next page.
2-25
Reference
1. Contact your KIP partner for K129Diag.exe and save it to any available storage on your removable storage.
Connect removable storage to UI monitor’s connector.
Removable storage
2. Select “Removable Disk”, and then run “K129 Diag.exe”.
2-26
2. 8. 2 Stitching Adjustment
NOTE
BUD No.15 (stitch setting 1) should be temporarily set to OFF “0” during Stitching Adjustment.
1. Run K129 Diag. Click [BackupData] to recall “Backup Data” sub window.
2. Click [Receive]
2-27
3. The current parameters are retrieved and displayed in the list.
4. Double click on the row No.15 “Stitch Setting 1”.
2-28
5. In “FormInput” screen, Click [Virtual Keyboard] to display the screen keypad.
6. Type “0” with keypad, and then click [OK] on the bottom.
7. Click [OK] on the bottom.
2-29
8. The setting change you have made is reflected to the list. It will turn blue.
Click [Send] on the bottom. The setting change turns black. Now it is sent to the Main Board.
2-30
10. To close “BackupData” sub window, click the X button at the upper right corner.
11. Clean Glass DCMNT with a soft cloth.
12. Set the Shading Sheet to the scanner noting the arrow direction.
NOTE
No skew insertion. Doing so may cause an incorrect calibration.
13. Click [Motion] to recall “Motion” sub window.
2-31
14. Select “Stitching Adjustment” in the upper drop-down menu.
15. Click [Start] beside the upper drop-down menu.
NOTE
If an error message occurs;
1. Correctly set the Shading Sheet to the scanner.

2. Check for dirt on the Glass DCMNT and the Shading Sheet.
2-32
16. When the scanning is finished, two sub windows “Stitch Simulate” and “Stitch Adjust” appear.
Enlarge “StitchAdjust” window.
Enlarge “Stitch Adjust” window.
2-33
17. There are 4 target signs at every border between the CIS.
CIS 1 CIS 2 CIS 3 CIS 4 CIS 5
In “Stitch Adjustment” window, Select [Jump] menu, and then click [CIS1 to CIS2]. The display area will jump to the corresponding
area on the scanned image.
If “Jump” does not move to the target exactly, manually scroll the image to catch the target in the window.
2-34
18. Confirm the Stitching Adjustment results.
no misalignment horizontal misalignment vertical misalignment
19. Select [Jump] menu, and then click the other CIS borders to confirm the results.
If all of the 4 targets have no misalignment, go to step 26.
If any of the targets has misalignment, go to step 20 and after for manual correction.
2-35
20. First, correct horizontal misalignment as follows.
In “StitchSimulate” window, click the buttons (see below in blue frame) to increase / decrease the setting value for
“horizontal” (see below in red frame). This moves the image block horizontally.
horizontal misalignment
Do the same way for all the 4 targets at the CIS borders if needed.
Setting values will turn red by setting changes. Setting value 1 step = 1 pixel to right
NOTE
(1) For horizontal correction, CIS 1 is the reference. You are asked to set the distance of shift for CIS 2/3/4/5 against CIS 1.
First finalize the shift for CIS 2, and next CIS 3, CIS 4, CIS 5.
1st: 2nd: 3rd: 4th:

Reference:
CIS 1
(2) The increase/decrease buttons correspond to the CIS border as follows.
CIS1 to CIS2 CIS2 to CIS3 CIS3 to CIS4 CIS4 to CIS5
2-36
21. Second, correct vertical misalignment as follows.
In “StitchSimulate” window, click the buttons (see below in blue frame) to change the setting value for “vertical” (see below in
red frame), in order to move the image block vertically.
vertical misalignment
Do the same way for all the 4 targets at the borders.

Setting values will turn red by setting changes. Setting value 1 step = 1 pixel to trailing edge
NOTE
(1) For vertical correction, CIS 3 is the reference. You are asked to set the distance of shift for CIS 1/2/4/5 against CIS 3.
2nd: 1st: 3rd: 4th:

Reference:
CIS 3
2-37
22. The manual correction is reflected to “StitchAdjust” window directly.
Reconfirm the manual correction result on the 4 targets.
If there is still misalignment, go back to step 20 and 21 to remove it.
NOTE
Be sure to reconfirm the manual correction result.
no misalignment
23. In “StitchSimulate” window, setting values in red are not finalized yet.
Click [Send].
24. Click [OK].
25. Once the change is sent to the Main Board, setting values turn black.
2-38
NOTE
27. In “StitchAdjust” window, select [Control] menu, and then click [Confirm-Scan] to make another scan.
28. The rescan result can be checked in “StitchAdjust” window.
29. Click the X button at the upper right corner to close “StitchAdjust” and “StitchSimulate” sub windows.
2-39
31. Click [Receive]
2-40
34. In “FormInput” screen, Click [Virtual Keyboard] to display the screen keypad.
35. Type “4” with keypad, and then click [OK] on the bottom.
2-41
Click [Send] on the bottom. The setting change turns black. Now it is sent to the Main Board.
2-42
8. 3 Creating Backup Data
NOTE
To easily recover the scanner in case of lost / crash of the BUDs, follow the instruction below to create a backup.
If you have quitted Backup Data window in the previous section, click [Backup Data] in the home screen, click [Receive]
2-43
1. Select “File” menu, and click “Save As.”
2. Specify the location to create a backup (csv), and then click [Save].
2-44
3. Click the X button to quit “BackupData” sub window and K129 Diag.
4. Run “Restart GUI” and the user’s GUI reappears.
5. completed.
2-45
Chapter 3
Print / Scan Process
Page
3. 1 Print Process 3- 2
3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner 3- 2
3. 1. 2 Each step of the print process 3- 3
3. 1. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) 3- 5
3. 1. 2. 2 Charge of Drum 3- 6
3. 1. 2. 3 Exposure 3- 7
3. 1. 2. 4 Development 3- 8
3. 1. 2. 5 Transfer 3-10
3. 1. 2. 6 Separation 3-11
3. 1. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) 3-12
3. 1. 2. 8 Fusing 3-13
3. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit 3-14
3. 1. 4 Toner Collection Process 3-17
3. 1. 5 Density Compensation Process 3-20
3. 2 Scan Process 3-21

3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy (for Old Scanner) 3-21
3. 2. 2 Data flow in scan and copy (for New Scanner) 3-22
3. 2. 3 Positioning process of Image Block 3-23
3-1 K124sm3e1
3. 1 Print Process
3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner
The toner used for KIP 7100 has a characteristic to be charged “negative”, which tends to be
attracted to a more “positive” object.
Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows.
1. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A.

2. Toner exists on the object A.
Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively “positive” and
the object A is “negative”. (In another word, object B is more “positive” than the object A.)
As the toner is “negative”, it is attracted to the object B that is more “positive”.
If you move the object B close to the object A, therefore, the toner moves onto the object B.
Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner moves from A to B.
Object B with high potential B B

B
(Relatively positive)
On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher
than the object A.
Even if you move the object A close to the object B, the toner continues to stay on the object B
because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other.
Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner stays on B.
Object B with high potential B B

(Relatively positive) B
Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place
with a higher potential.
If we control the electric potentials, it is possible to move the toner from one place to another as we
intend, or it is also possible to remove the toner from an unwanted place.
KIP 7100 controls the electric potentials properly working each part as Drum, Corona Units, Lamps,
Developer Unit and Cleaning Roller.
The movement of toner is controlled correctly and several processes as Development, Toner
Transfer, Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed.
3-2 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2 Each step of print process
One cycle of print consists of the following 8 processes.
1. Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)

2. Charge of Drum
3. Exposure
4. Development
5. Transfer
6. Separation
7. Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
8. Fusing
LED Head Image Corona
Eraser Lamp
Regulation Roller Grid Plate
Cleaning Roller Fuser Roller
Density Sensor
Toner Supply Roller Transfer Corona Separation Corona &
Developer Roller Separation Lamp Pressure Roller
3-3 K124sm3e1
Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of the electric potentials.
The following graphic shows the electric potential at each process and the movement of toner.
+700V Voltage of
Transfer Corona
+600V
+500V
+400V
Voltage of
+300V
5 7
Cleaning Roller
+200V
+100V
0V
-100V SP1
-200V
3 4
-300V Voltage of
-400V
1 1 Developer Roller
-500V 6
-600V 2
-700V SP2
Surface Potential of Drum

SP1 : For black image / SP2 : For white image
Name of part Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle Voltage during Toner Collection Process
Image Corona Wire -1.3mA +/-0.05mA -
Grid Plate -620V +/-30V -
Developer Roller -180V +/-5V +350V +/-5V
Regulation Roller -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
(Center)
Regulation Roller 0V (Connected to the ground) 0V (Connected to the ground)
(Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias
Transfer Corona Plain Paper: +1.2mA +/-0.05mA -
Other Media: +1.0mA +/-0.05mA
Separation Corona AC (5.0KV) + DC (-250V +/-5V) -
Cleaning Roller +450V +/-5V -550V +/-5V
Reference
When the printer is going to stop after printing, or when the used Roll Deck is changed with
other one, the KIP 7100 will take the “Toner Collection Process” to remove the remained toner
and place back into the Developer Unit.
Refer to [3.1.4 Toner Collection Process] for the detail.
3-4 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)
As the first step of print cycle, it is necessary to remove the negative electric charges from the
Drum, which have remained there after the former print cycle.
The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light.
So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp.
The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V (residual potential) by this process.
Eraser Lamp
0V
0V
0V
Drum
Negative electric
charges
3-5 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2 .2 Charge of Drum
The Image Corona discharges negative electric charges which are given to the Drum.
The surface of Drum becomes about -620V evenly as a result, which corresponds to the white
area of the printed image pattern.
The Grid Plate is also connected to the High Voltage Power Supply individually.
Current and Voltage supplied to the Image Corona Wire is as follows.
Corona Wire -1.3mA +/-0.05mA
Corona Wire Image Corona
620V
Grid Plate
620V
0V
0V
Drum
3-6 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 3 Exposure
According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws the light (740nm) onto some part of
Drum which corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern.
As the Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light,
this part of Drum surface loses the charges and its potential becomes about -20V. (This potential is
not constant but is variable by the environment.)
The other part of Drum surface, which was not exposed to the light from the LED Head, keeps
-620V of potential which the Image Corona has given.
An invisible electric image pattern that consists of -620V area and the -20V area is formed on the
surface of Drum as a result. (This is called “Electrostatic Latent Image”.)
620V
20V 620V
LED Head 20V
0V
0V
Drum
(Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure)
-20V -620V
Reference
Even if the toner remains on the Drum, it will not block the light from the LED Head as the
diameter of toner (9 micrometers) is much smaller than that (42 micrometers) of 1 pixel of
LED. The electric charges on the Drum are removed as needed.
3-7 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 4 Development
The Developer Roller, which is evenly covered with the toner, is contacted to the Drum because
the Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum. (The width of contact point is about 5mm.)
The Developer Roller is supplied with -180V (+/-5V) during the print cycle.
And both -620V area and -20V area exist on the Drum because the Electrostatic Latent Image has
been formed in the former Exposure process.
Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-180V), the -20V area on the Drum is relatively
“positive”. So the toner moves from the Developer Roller to the -20V area of Drum.
On the other hand, the -620V area is relatively “negative” seen from the Developer Roller.
So the toner does not move to the -620V area but stays on the Developer Roller.
A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result.
Developer Roller Drum Developer Roller Drum
20V
620V
180V 20V
Before Development After Development : Toner moves

only to -20V area.
-20V -620V
(Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image) (Visible toner image)
3-8 K124sm3e1
Even if some toner has not been removed by the Cleaning Roller but remained on the -620V area
of Drum (It corresponds to the white area of the print) in the later [3.1.2.7 Drum Cleaning], this
toner is removed at the time of Development because it moves to the Developer Roller of which
potential (-180V) is higher than that of Drum (-620V).
So there will be no case that unnecessary black spot is printed on the white area of the print.
The remained toner that moved to the Developer Roller is carried into the Developer Unit and then
reused.
1. Toner remained on the Drum

2. Toner moves from the Drum to the Developer Roller.
3. Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller
4. Toner is shifted to the inside of the Developer Unit by the revolution of Toner Supply Roller.
5. Toner is reused.
5 2
3
4
Before Development After Development

(Toner is remaining on the white area.) (Toner is removed from the white area.)
-20V -620V
Reference
The Developer Unit has not only the Developer Roller but also 2 more rollers inside which
are also supplied with the individual voltages.
The Developer Unit controls the movement of toner in the unit taking advantage of the
difference of potentials among these rollers, and covers the Developer Roller with the toner
in the end.
Refer to [3.1.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit] to learn how the
Developer Unit controls the movement.
3-9 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 5 Transfer
The printing paper is charged positively as the Transfer Corona discharges positive electric
charges from under the paper.
The toner existing on the -20V area on the Drum will move to the printing paper because the
potential of the paper comes to be higher than the Drum by the Transfer Process.
The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows.
Transfer Corona Wire:

Plain Paper: +1.2mA +/-0.05mA
Other Media: +1.0mA +/-0.05mA
(When the Insulated Drum is used.)
Printing paper
20V
20V 20V
Transfer Corona Positive electric charges
3-10 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 6 Separation
The printing paper is attracted to the Drum after the Transfer because the potential of paper is
positive and that of Drum is negative.
It is necessary for avoiding the jam to separate the paper from the Drum by removing the static
force between them.
The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC
voltage.
AC voltage : 5.0KV
DC voltage : -250V
As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage, the negative charges are
generated more than positive ones, which mainly results in removing the positive charges of the
printing paper.
On the other hand, the Separation Lamp throws light from under the Corona Wires to remove the
negative charges of the Drum.
The static force between the printing paper and the Drum is reduced as a result, and the paper is
separated from the Drum by its weight.
Negative charges of the Drum are removed

by the light from the Separation Lamp.
Drum
620V 20V
Separation Corona Positive charges of the paper are

removed by the AC discharge.
Separation Lamp
3-11 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
Some amount of toner that has not been transferred onto the printing paper is remaining on the
Drum.
This remained toner will be removed by the Cleaning Roller.
The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V (+/-5V), and there are some negative electric charges
on the Drum at this time.
As the Cleaning Roller is relatively “positive” and the Drum is “negative”, the toner moves from the
Drum to the Cleaning Roller.
Cleaning Roller
450V
Drum
Remained toner
Negative electric charges
NOTE
If too much toner exists in a small area (like a trace of solid black image) the Cleaning Roller
may not be able to remove all of them.
But this toner is removed from the Drum in the Development Process.
Refer to [3.1.2.4 Development].
3-12 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 2. 8 Fusing
After Transfer / Separation Processes, the printing paper is transported to the Fuser Unit by the
Inner Transport Unit.
The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller.
The Fuser Roller is very hot, and the Pressure Roller is strongly pressed to the Fuser Roller by the
spring.
The toner is firmly fused onto the printing paper by the heat and the pressure when the paper
passes through between these rollers.
Fuser Roller
Inner Transport Unit Pressure Roller
3-13 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the
Developer Unit
There are 3 kinds of rollers called “Developer Roller”, “Regulation Roller” and “Toner Supply
Roller” in the Developer Unit.
Each roller is supplied with its own voltage.
In the following list, the voltage of the Developer Roller (-180V) is measured against the ground.
The other voltages mean the difference against the voltage of Developer Roller Bias.
Name of roller Supplied voltage

Developer Roller -180V +/-5V against the ground
Regulation Roller (Center) -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
Regulation Roller (Both sides) 0V (Connected to the ground)
Toner Supply Roller The same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias
(Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller are short circuited
being connected with the plate.)
Regulation Roller : Both sides Insulator Regulation Roller : Center

(0V : Connected to GND) (-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)
Toner Supply Roller

(Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias)
NOTE
The Regulation Roller is divided into central area and both side areas by the insulator, and
individual voltage is supplied to each area.
3-14 K124sm3e1
Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner is
controlled in the Developer Unit as follows.
1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller.
2. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto the
Developer Roller.
Then the Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller.
3. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by the spring, and these
2 rollers move to the opposite direction each other at the contact point.
Even if the Developer Roller carries more toner than required, the Regulation Roller limits
the amount of toner that can pass through between 2 rollers. So very small amount of toner
can pass through between rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside.
As the voltage of Developer Roller is 80V higher than that of Regulation Roller (Center), the
toner which has passed through between rollers is firmly attracted to the Developer Roller.
Very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Developer Roller as a result.
4. Much toner sticks onto the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside.
This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacted to the Regulation Roller.
Scraper Regulation Roller : Center

(-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
1 2
Toner Supply Roller Developer Roller

(Same voltage with the Developer Roller) (-180V against GND)
3-15 K124sm3e1
5. The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 0V as these parts are connected to the
ground.
It is higher than that of Developer Roller (-180V).
When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto the
Regulation Roller.
The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result, so it is
possible to avoid the toner drops into the machine from the side.
Regulation Roller : Both Sides

(0V : Connected to GND)
Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)
Regulation Roller : Center

(-80V against Developer Roller voltage)
Toner area
Regulation Roller : Both sides Non-toner area

(0V : Connected to GND)
Developer Roller
(-180V against GND)
3-16 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 4 Toner Collection Process
As explained in [3.1.2.7 Drum Cleaning], the Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V to remove the
remained toner from the Drum during the print cycle.
This toner gathered by the Cleaning Roller is returned to the Developer Unit in the following 3
cases.
(1) When the printer has finished printing out all the accumulated print jobs and then going to
stop.
(2) When the used roll paper is ended and changed with another one.
(3) When the used roll paper is changed from one to another because the print size specified in
the job is different.
This process to return the toner is called “Toner Collection Process”.

When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the printer will take the
Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions.
1. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from
the Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V.
2. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -550V in the Toner Collection
Process.
As the potential of Drum becomes higher than that of Cleaning Roller, toner on the Cleaning
Roller moves onto the Drum.
0V
0V
550V
0V Remained toner
Drum
Cleaning Roller
3-17 K124sm3e1
3. The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller is also changed to +350V (+/-5V) in the Toner
Collection Process.
As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drum
moves onto the Developer Roller.
Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the Toner
Supply Roller.
Remained Toner
0V
0V
Drum
350V 0V
Developer Roller
3-18 K124sm3e1
Reference
Voltages supplied to Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller are changed also as follows.
Name of roller Supplied voltage

Developer Roller +350V +/-5V against the ground
Regulation Roller -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
(Center)
Regulation Roller 0V (Ground)
(Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias
Regulation Roller : Both sides Regulation Roller : Center

(0V : Connected to GND) (-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller

(+350V against GND) (Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias)
3-19 K124sm3e1
3. 1. 5 Density Compensation Process
On rare occasion, loss of image density may occur under a special usage. KIP 7100 has the ability
to reduce such loss of image density and this enables to maintain a satisfactory image quality
regardless of the machine usage.
Density Compensation Process will adjust Developer / Regulation Bias according to their condition
to reduce loss of image density in such situation.
In Density Compensation Process, toner density on the surface of Photoconductive Drum is

measured by Density Sensor at regular time intervals. According to the result, Developer /
Regulation Bias will be automatically adjusted to compensate image density.
Density Measure starts at regular intervals of 18 hours of Main Motor operating time, after the
completion of the current print queue.
1. Several solid toner patches are created on the surface of Photoconductive Drum as follows.
Solid toner patch
Photoconductive Drum
Density Sensor
2. Density of all the patches is measured by Density Sensor (Density Measure). The average of
the patches (Density Value) is calculated.
3. If the Density Value does not meet Target Density, Developer / Regulation Bias will be
automatically adjusted based on the current Adjustment Level.
• If the current Density Value is judged “not enough” (lighter than required), the next level will
be applied.
• If the current Density Value is judged “adequate”, the current level remains.
• There is possibility for the Density Value to be judged “too much enough” (darker than
required), then the previous level will be applied.
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
(default)
Developer Bias -180V -230V -230V -230V
(Negative)
Regulation Bias -80V -80V -120V -160V
against Developer Bias
4. The adjustment allows image density to stabilize for a satisfactory image quality regardless of
the machine usage.
NOTE
An applied Adjustment Level should be reset after replacing Developer / Regulation Roller.
For further information, see [8.11 Special Operation Mode].
3-20 K124sm3e1
3. 2 Scan Process
3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy (for Old Scanner)
There are CIS Units, CIS Controller PCB (SVC CIS BD) and Data Controller PCB (SVC Main BD
K) in the scanner unit, which take image reading and processes the data.
1. The CIS Units read the image pattern of original, and then send the analog data to the CIS
Controller PCB.
2. The CIS Controller Boards converts the analog data into digital data, and then send to the Data
Controller PCB.
3. The Data Controller PCB takes the correct image process according to the UI setting.
Then it outputs the image data to the IPS through the USB 2.0.
4. The IPS output the image data to the printer part of KIP 7100 through the Interface 8 in case of
“copy”, or it outputs to the Network PC through the LAN cable in case of “scan to file”.
CIS CIS CIS CIS CIS
Analog data
CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB
(A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion)
Digital data
Data Controller PCB

(Several image process)
USB 2.0
IPS (Controller)
Interface 8 LAN
Printer part Network PC /

color printer
Printing out Save as File

of the Copy Print with color printer
3-21 K124sm3e1
3. 2. 2 Data flow in scan and copy (for New Scanner)
The scanner unit has 5 CIS devices and the Main Board (PW12920).
1. CIS reads the image pattern of original and then send the analog data to the Main Board.
2. The Main Board converts the analog data into digital data.
3. Main Board takes a proper image process according to the settings configured with K129 Diag..
It outputs the image data to the IPS or PC through the USB 2.0.
4. IPS outputs the image data to the KIP printer through the Interface 8 on copy, or it outputs to the
Network PC through the LAN cable on Scan to File.
Analog data
(converts to Digital Data)
USB 2.0
IPS Controller
Interface 8 LAN
Printer part Network PC /

color printer
Printing out of Save as File

the Copy Print with color printer
3-22 K124sm3e1
3. 2. 3 Positioning process of Image Block
The scanner part of KIP 7100 reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image Sensor).
As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks.
So it is necessary to remove this gap by vertical positioning process (Y offset).
Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. It means some
image pixels are commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks. It is very hard to
recognize the image because many images are duplicated. To prevent this kind of problem, it is
necessary to remove the duplication of image pixels by horizontal positioning process (X overlap).
The Data Controller PCB performs these positioning processes.
NOTE
The KIP 7100 performs these positioning processes (X overlap & Y offset) according to the
setting specified through KIP Scanner Utility.
Please refer to [8.13.4.3 Position] or [8.14.6.2 Stitching] for this setting.
[Explanation]
5 pieces of CIS are arranged in 2 rows as the following illustration, with some amount of their
reading area overlapping each other.
So the reading data initially inputted to the Data Controller PCB is as follows.
(1) There occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks.
(2) Some image pixels are commonly included (duplicating) in the neighboring two Image
Blocks.
Reading areas
Reading areas
CIS CIS
(Old Scanner) (New Scanner)
The image data before the positioning process
3-23 K124sm3e1
The Data Controller PCB removes the vertical gap among the Image Block according to the
positioning setting (Y offset) specified through KIP Scanner Utility.
The image data before the positioning process
The image data after the positioning process (Y offset)
3-24 K124sm3e1
Also the Data Controller PCB removes the duplication of image pixels among the Image Blocks
according to the positioning setting (X overlap) specified through KIP Scanner Utility.
The image data after the positioning process (Y offset)
The image data after the positioning process (X overlap)
3-25 K124sm3e1
Chapter 4
Electrical
Page
4. 1 General Information 4- 2
4. 2 Electrical Components Location 4- 3

4. 2. 1 Right side 4- 3
4. 2. 2 Left side 4- 7
4. 2. 3 Back side 4- 8
4. 2. 4 LED Head Frame 4-12
4. 2. 5 Main Frame 4-14
4. 2. 6 Developer Unit 4-17
4. 2. 7 Fuser Unit 4-18
4. 2. 8 Roll Deck 4-20
4. 2. 9 Cutter Unit 4-23
4. 2.10 Inner Transport Unit 4-24
4. 2.11 Scanner Unit (Old Scanner) 4-25
4. 2.12 Scanner Unit (New Scanner) 4-29
4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply 4-32

4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output 4-32
4. 3. 2 Analog Voltage to Image Corona 4-33
4. 3. 3 Analog Voltage to Transfer Corona 4-35
4. 3. 4 AC Component to Separation Corona 4-37
4. 3. 5 DC Component to Separation Corona 4-39
4. 3. 6 Negative Developer Bias to Developer Roller 4-41
4. 3. 7 Positive Developer Bias to Developer Roller 4-43
4. 3. 8 Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller 4-45
4. 3. 9 Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) 4-47
4. 3. 10 Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) 4-49
K124sm4e1
4. 1 General Information
This machine is mainly controlled by a microcomputer, which is located on DC Controller.
This microcomputer reads input signals from sensors, and outputs the operation signals to
motors, SSRs, solenoid, clutches and blowers on programmed timing.
Sensor Micro Computer Driver DC Load

(CPU & ROM)
DC Controller has an LED, meaning that 5VDC is applied on this DC Controller safely.
Generally the color of wiring is separated depends on the voltage.

0VDC Blue
5VDC Yellow
12VDC Brown
24VDC Orange
Signal in to DC Controller (sensors) Purple
Signal out from DC Controller Gray
CAUTION
There is a battery (CR2032) on the Motherboard of the controller.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.
4-2 K124sm4e2
4. 2 Electrical Components Location
4. 2. 1 Right Side
2
3
1
4
5 6 : 230V model only
Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 SW1 (POWER-OFF) Switch AJ8R2004BBCF Turning on and off the machine
2 MS1 Switch FA1L-AA22 Shuts off the AC power to the
DCP1 when Toner Hatch or the
right side of Engine Unit is opened
3 SSR1 Solid State Relay AQJ416V (US) ON / OFF control of the Fuser
AQJ426V (EU)
4 SSR2 Solid State Relay AQJ416V (US) ON / OFF control of the Fuser
AQJ426V (EU)
5 HV1 HV_IM HV Power Supply EUK1MGA60HA Outputting the high voltage to each
HV2 HV_TR of the following components.
HV3 HV_AC (1) Image Corona (HV1)
HVP4 (2) Transfer Corona (HV2)
OUTPUT2 BIAS_TRG (3) Separation Corona (HV3)
OUTPUT3 BIAS_SW (4) Developer Roller (OUTPUT2)
OUTPUT5 (5) Regulation Roller (OUTPUT3)
(6) Cleaning Roller (OUTPUT5)
6 PW5724B Phase Control PCB PW5724B Flicker Reduction

Used on 230V model only
4-3 K124sm4e2
NOTE
Developer Bias (OUTPUT 2, 3) is outputted (or stopped) by the signal “BIAS_TRG”.
The polarity of Bias is decided by the signal “BIAS_SW”
4-4 K124sm4e2
10
15
12
13
11 14
(120V model) (230V model)
4-5 K124sm4e2
7 DCP1 - DC Power Supply LEB225F- Outputting each 24VDC, 5VDC
0524-U and 0VDC
8 F1 - Fuse Walter Protecting the 24VDC from the
F2 TSC3.15AH over-current
F3 or If you replace the fuses, make
LITTLE sure to use one listed left.
0215 3.15MXP
9 SW2 - Switch (Option) SDDJE1 Turning on and off the
Dehumidify Heater
10 RY1 - Relay G7L-2A-TUB Supplying the power to the Lamp
(DC24V) (H1, H2).
(It stops supplying the power to
the Lamp when Switch (MS3) or
Thermostat (TS1, TS2) is open.)
11 LF1 - Noise Filter Removing the noise from the AC
line
Used on 120V model
12 CB1 - Breaker X28-XQ1A-15 Protecting the AC line from the
over-current
Used on 120V model
13 LF1 - Noise Filter RG-208F2 Removing the noise from the AC
line
Used on 230V model
14 INLET - Inlet Inputting the AC Power
Used on 230V model
15 CB1 - Breaker X28-XQ1A-10 Protecting the AC line from the
over-current
Used on 230V model
4-6 K124sm4e2
4. 2. 2 Left Side
2 3
4
1

1 PW12420 - PW12420 PCB Assy PW12420 Overall sequence control
2 PW6654B - Driver PCB B PW6654B Driver for the motors, clutches
and so on
3 MS4 - Switch V-162-1C25 Detecting whether or not the
10E Toner Hatch or the left side of
Engine Unit is opened
(The machine does not shut off
the AC power even if the MS4
detects either of them is
opened.)
4 CL1 REGIST_CL Clutch MIC5NE-45 Meeting the image head and
leading edge of paper each other
4-7 K124sm4e2
4. 2. 3 Back Side
4 3
1 2 5 6

1 BL7 - Blower D12F-24BL Assisting to transport the paper
05 on the Inner Transport Unit
2 BL8 - Fan ASFN90372 Cooling down the IPS Controller
90
3 DCP2 - DC Power Supply LDA15F-12 Supplying the DC power to both
the UI and the PW10523
4 PW11723 (B) - PW11723 PCB PW11723 (B) - Lightning surge protector
ASSY - Shutting down the controller
5 M1 MAMTR DC Motor DRG-6236-226 Driving the Drum, Developer Unit
and paper feeding section
6 M2 HEAT_M DC Motor DRG-6236- Driving the Fuser Unit
226B
4-8 K124sm4e2
(Fuser Unit omitted)
7 8

7 BL5 Fan ASFN60372 Supporting media feeding
approach
8 BL6 Fan ASFN60372 Supporting media feeding
approach
4-9 K124sm4e2
9

9 MS8 Switch (Optional in USA) FA2L-BA22 It stops supplying the AC power
to the Dehumidify Heater when
the Roll Deck is opened.
4-10 K124sm4e2
11
12
10
10

10 BL3 & BL4 HEAT_BL_L Blower D12F-24BL 05 Exhausting the inside air.
HEAT_BL_R (They are equipped with the
Ozone Filter.)
11 MS2 Switch FA1L-AA22 Shuts off the AC power to the
DCP1 when the right side of
Heater Hatch is opened.
12 MS3 Switch V-162-1C25 10E Detecting whether or not the left
side of Heater Hatch is opened.
(The machine does not shut off
the AC power even if the MS3
detects the Heater Hatch is
opened.)
4-11 K124sm4e2
4. 2. 4 LED Head Frame

1 PW6631 ER1 Eraser PCB A PW6631 Removing the negative electric
charges from the Drum at the
beginning of the Print Process
4-12 K124sm4e2
2
(Image Corona Unit removed)

2 LED HEAD LED Head LH6604 Creating latent Images on Drum
3 PW6693 HV-ZD Assy PW6693 Keeping the Grid Voltage
constant
(Control of the surface potential)
4-13 K124sm4e2
4. 2. 5 Main Frame
(Drum removed)

1 PW6631 ER2 Eraser PCB A PW6631 Assisting the paper separation by
removing the electric charges
from the Drum at the time of
Separation Process
2 DENS-S PH11 Toner Density Sensor GP2Y40010K0 Detecting the toner density on
F the drum surface.
Outputting analog voltage to
PW12420
4-14 K124sm4e2
4
5 6

3 M4 PRESS_M DC Motor DU2422-1 Pressing the Developer Unit to
the Drum
(Or keeping the Developer Unit
away from the Drum)
4 PH4 PRESS_S Sensor GP1A73A000J Detecting the Developer Unit is
pressed or kept away
5 PH1 REGIST_S Sensor PS117ED1 Detecting the paper at the
Registration Area
Detecting the paper length of cut
sheets
6 PH5 MAN_IN Sensor PS117ED1 Detecting the set of cut sheet
paper
4-15 K124sm4e2
7

7 MS5 DOOR- Switch CS1A-B2CA Detecting the Roll Deck Open
OPEN Error
4-16 K124sm4e2
4. 2. 6 Developer Unit
1 2

1 TLS1 TONER_S Sensor TSP15DA10C- Detecting whether or not the
01 toner exists in the Developer Unit
2 M3 TONER_M DC Motor DU2431-2 Driving the Toner Hopper to
supply the toner to the Developer
Unit
4-17 K124sm4e3
4. 2. 7 Fuser Unit
3 1
2

1 TS1 Thermostat CH-152-35- Preventing over-heat
TS2 170
2 TH1 TH1 Thermistor FS-K0113 Detecting the temperature on the
central area of Fuser Roller
3 TH2 TH2 Thermistor 3 FS-K0115 Detecting the temperature on the
driven side of Fuser Roller
4-18 K124sm4e3
6
5 4

4 H1 Lamp Heating up the central part of
120V : Z166800001 Fuser Roller
230V : Z166800003
5 H2 Lamp Heating up the right and the left
120V : Z166800002 part of Fuser Roller
230V : Z166800004
6 PH3 HEAT_EXIT Sensor GP1A73A000J Detecting the paper mis-feed at
the exit area
4-19 K124sm4e3
8
9
7

7 SL1 STACK_SL Solenoid Deciding print path to either top /
rear
8 PH15 STACK_S Sensor Detecting stacked prints
9 PH16 STACKJ_S Sensor Detecting the paper mis-feed
after Fuser Unit
4-20 K124sm4e3
4. 2. 8 Roll Deck
7
6 1
2
5 4
3

1 CL3 FEED_CL Clutch MIC5NE-45 Feeding the roll paper from both
Roll 1 and Roll 2
2 CL4 R1FD_CL Clutch MIC8NE-23 Feeding the Roll 1 forward
3 CL5 R1BK_CL Clutch MIC8NE-09 Rewinding the Roll 1
4 CL6 R2FD_CL Clutch MIC8NE-23 Feeding the Roll 2 forward
5 CL7 R2BK_CL Clutch MIC8NE-09 Rewinding the Roll 2
6 PH8 R1ENC_S Sensor GP1A73A000J Detecting “paper end” of Roll 1
7 PH10 R2ENC_S Sensor GP1A73A000J Detecting “paper end” of Roll 2
4-21 K124sm4e3
(Dehumidify Heater: option for US model)
8 8

8 H3 Resister 120V 1K 15W Dehumidifying the roll paper
H4 230V 3.5K
H5 15W
H6
9 TS3 Thermostat 2455RM-158- Controlling the temperature of
TS4 37 Resister
TS5 (The Resisters turn on when the
TS6 Thermostat detects some
decided temperature, and they
turn off when it detects another
decided temperature.)
4-22 K124sm4e3
10
11
13
12

10 PH6 R_EDGE Sensor PS117ED1 Detecting the trailing edge of the
roll paper
11 PH7 R1SET_S Sensor PS117ED1 Detecting the set of Roll 1
12 PH12 FEED_ENC Sensor GP1A73A000J Detecting the length of the
proceeding paper to be cut
13 PH9 R2SET_S Sensor PS117ED1 Detecting the set of Roll 2
4-23 K124sm4e3
4. 2. 9 Cutter Unit
2
1

1 M5 Cutter Motor - Moving the Cutter Blade
2 MS6 Cutter Home Position - Detecting the Home Position of
MS7 Sensor Cutter Blade.
4-24 K124sm4e3
4. 2. 10 Inner Transport Unit

1 PH2 STRIP_S Sensor GP1A73A000J Detecting the paper mis-feed at
the Separation Area
4-25 K124sm4e3
4. 2. 11 Scanner Unit (Old Scanner)
2
2
1
3
5
4
3 4
1
2

1 SVC Main BD K SVC Main BD K makes image
(Data Controller) processes to the digital data sent
from SVC CIS BD.
And then it sends the processed
image data to the controller.
2 SVC CIS BD Converting the analog data read
(CIS Controller) by the CIS to the digital data
3 Sensor TLP1201A Detecting whether or not the
Scanner Upper Unit is opened.
4 Sensor TLP1201A Detecting whether or not the
Scanner Upper Unit is opened.
5 Switch CS1A-B2CA Emergent stop button
4-26 K124sm4e3
6 7 8 9 10 11
12

6 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects the insertion of original.
7 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects original widths A4
(Landscape), A3, 11” and 12”.
8 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects original widths A2, 17”
and 18”.
9 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects original widths A1, 22”
and 24”.
10 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects original widths A0, and
30”.
11 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects original widths 34” and
36”.
12 Sensor PS117ED1 It detects the original mis-feed.
It is also used to detect the
leading edge when the original is
returned.
4-27 K124sm4e3
13
13
15
13 14

13 CIS Unit CIPS218CF601 CIS Units read the image of
original, and then send the
analog data to the SVC CIS BD.
14 Motor Assembly Transporting the original.
15 SVC PWR BD Converts the +24V to each +12V,
(Power Supply) +5V and +3.3V.
Also it is the Driver Circuit of the
Motor.
4-28 K124sm4e3
4. 2. 12 Scanner Unit (New Scanner)
1 2

1 D CON PW12920-02 Makes image processes to the
(Data Controller PCB) digital data sent from CIS, and
then sends the processed image
data to KIP Printer.
Converts the analog data read by
the CIS to the digital data
2 S_MS1 Switch CS1A-B2CA Emergent stop button
3 S_PH8 Sensor LG248BL1 Detects whether Upper Unit is
opened.
4-29 K124sm4e3
4 4
4 4 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
11

4 CIS Sensor FL06G-W07 Reads the image of original, and then
send the analog data to D CON
(Data Controller PCB).
5 S_PH1 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects the original to be inserted.
Detects original width A4 (Portrait)
6 S_PH2 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects original widths A4 (Landscape),
A3, 11” and 12”.
7 S_PH3 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects original widths A2, 17” and 18”.
8 S_PH4 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects original widths A1, 22” and 24”.
9 S_PH5 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects original widths A0, 30”, 34”.
10 S_PH6 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects original widths 36”.
11 S_PH7 Sensor PS122GD4-A Detects the original mis-feed.
4-30 K124sm4e3
13
12

12 M6 Motor 103H7123-5746 Transports the original.
13 S_PH9 Sensor LG248BL1 Detects rotations of FEED ROLLER
4-31 K124sm4e3
4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog
Output from HV Power Supply
4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog

output
It is necessary to check the analog output from High Voltage Power Supply after replacing the
following parts.
PW12420 PCB (DC Controller)

HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA)
Please check the analog output for each of the following part, and please adjust if it is out of the
specified range.
Each “Reference page” in the list shows how to check and adjust each item.
Check Item Reference page

Analog Voltage to the Image Corona 4-29
Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona 4-31
AC Component to the Separation Corona 4-33
DC Component to the Separation Corona 4-35
Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller 4-37
Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller 4-39
Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller 4-41
Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) 4-43
Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) 4-45
Reference
Please try to replace the PW12420 PCB or HV Power Supply PCB if you have the following
kinds of problem.
PW12420 PCB
(1) When the UI indicates abnormal indication although the UI has no problem.
(2) When the electric component such as motor or lamp does not work properly although
such component has no problem.
HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA)

When the output to Image Corona / Transfer Corona / Separation Corona / Developer Roller
/ Toner Supply Roller / Regulation Roller / Cleaning Roller is abnormal.
4-28 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 2 Analog Voltage to Image Corona
The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Image Corona
is 1.30 +/-0.05V.
Check and adjust the output current in the following way.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “CP11” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “CPCOM”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.
CP11
multimeter
(DC)
CPCOM
2. Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 9 Test Print Mode] .

As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print, check the voltage
with the multi-meter.
Standard value of the output voltage to the Image Corona is 1.30 +/-0.05V.
4-29 K124sm4e4
3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy 1.30 +/-0.05V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR101 with a screwdriver.
VR101
multimeter
(DC)
4-30 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 3 Analog Voltage to Transfer Corona
The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Transfer
Corona is specified to each type of paper as follows.
Plain paper 1.20 +/-0.05V

Tracing paper 1.00 +/-0.05V
Film 1.00 +/-0.05V
Check and adjust the output current in the following way.
NOTE
The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment.
Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “CP22” pin.
CP21 CP22
multimeter
(DC)
4-31 K124sm4e4
2. Select the Test Print Mode, and make a test print using each type of paper (plain
paper, tracing paper & Film) making reference to [8. 9 Test Print Mode].
As the high voltage is supplied to the Transfer Corona during the Test Print, check the voltage
Standard values of the output voltages to the Transfer Corona are:

Plain paper 1.20 +/-0.05V
Tracing paper 1.00 +/-0.05V
Film 1.00 +/-0.05V
3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy the above specifications.
Select the Adjustment Mode, select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, and
change the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies the above specifications.
Refer to [8.6.3.15 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)] for the detail.
Sub Mode No. Contents

029 Transfer Voltage (Plain paper)
030 Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper)
031 Transfer Voltage (Film)
032 Transfer Voltage (Plain paper : Special)
033 Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper : Special)
034 Transfer Voltage (Film : Special)
4-32 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 4 AC Component to Separation Corona
The standard value of the AC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the
Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V.
Check and adjust the AC Component in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “CPCOM” pin.
multimeter
(DC)
CP31
CPCOM
2. Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 9 Test Print Mode].

Standard value of the AC Component to the Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V.
4-33 K124sm4e4
3. Adjust the AC Component if it does not satisfy 5.00 +/-0.05V.
multimeter
(DC)
VR302
4-34 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 5 DC Component to Separation Corona
The standard value of the DC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the
Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V.
Check and adjust the DC Component in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the ground.
CP33
multimeter
(DC)
ground

Standard value of the DC Component to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V.
4-35 K124sm4e4
3. Adjust the DC Component if it does not satisfy -250 +/-5V.
VR303
multimeter
(DC)
ground
4-36 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 6 Negative Developer Bias to Developer Roller
The Negative Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Print
Cycle.
The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias is as follows for each type of paper.
Plain paper -180 +/-5V against the ground

Tracing paper -180 +/-5V against the ground
Film -180 +/-5V against the ground
Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.
NOTE
The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment.
Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT2” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
multimeter
(DC)
ground
OUTPUT 2
4-37 K124sm4e4
As the Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller during the Test Print, check
the voltage with the multi-meter.
The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias for each type of media is:
Plain paper -180 +/-5V against the ground

Tracing paper -180 +/-5V against the ground
Film -180 +/-5V against the ground
If the above values are not satisfied, go to the next step.
3. If the value (voltage) is -230 +/- 5V, Developer Bias may be automatically adjusted by Density
Compensation Process.
Enter Special Operation Mode and then “0006 Bias3 Count”.
The voltage “-230V +/- 5V” is correct when the above 7-digit value shows “0000001” /
“0000002” / “0000003”.
7 digits (current Auto Supposed
Adjustment Level) Developer Bias
000000 -180 +/-5V
0000001 / 0000002 / 0000003 -230 +/-5V
Refer to [8.11.3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process] for checking the
current Auto Adjustment Level.
If not satisfied, go to the next step for manual Developer Bias adjustment.
4. Select the Adjustment Mode, select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, and
change the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies -180 +/-5V against the ground.
Refer to [8.6.3.13 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)] for the detail.
Sub Mode No. Contents

022 Developer Bias (Plain paper)
023 Developer Bias (Tracing paper)
024 Developer Bias (Film)
025 Developer Bias (Plain paper : Special)
026 Developer Bias (Tracing paper : Special)
027 Developer Bias (Film : Special)
4-38 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 7 Positive Developer Bias to Developer Roller
The Positive Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the
Cleaning Cycle.
The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is 0.350 +/-0.005V against the CP42.
Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “CP41” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to “CP42”.
multimeter
(DC)
CP42
CP41
4-39 K124sm4e4
The Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller for some seconds after the
printed paper has been ejected.
Check the voltage with the multi-meter during that period.
The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is 0.350 +/-0.005V against the CP42.
If this is not satisfied, go to the next step for the adjustment.
3. Adjust the Positive Developer Bias rotating the VR401, so that it should satisfy
0.350 +/-0.005V against the CP42.
multimeter VR401
(DC)
4-40 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 8 Bias gap between Developer Roller and
Regulation Roller
The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is 80 +/-5V.
Check and adjust it in the following way.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT3” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “OUTPUT2” pin.
multimeter
(DC)
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 2

As the Bias is supplied to both the Developer Roller and the Regulation Roller, check the
Bias gap between them with the multi-meter.
The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is
80 +/-5V.
If the above value is not satisfied, go to the next step 3 for the adjustment.
4-41 K124sm4e4
3. If the value (voltage) is “120 +/-5V” or “160 +/- 5V”, Regulation Bias may be automatically
adjusted by Density Compensation Process.
Enter Special Operation Mode and then “0006 Bias3 Count”.
The voltage “120V +/- 5V” is correct when the above 7-digit value shows “0000002”.
The voltage “160V +/- 5V” is correct when the above 7-digit value shows “0000003”.
7 digits (current Auto Supposed

Adjustment Level) Bias Gap
000000 / 0000001 80 +/-5V
0000002 120 +/-5V
0000003 160 +/-5V
Refer to [8.11.3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process] for checking the
current Auto Adjustment Level.
If not satisfied, go to the next step for manual Regulation Bias adjustment.
4. Select the Adjustment Mode, select Sub Mode No. 622, and change the value
so that the output voltage satisfies 80 +/-5V.
Refer to [8.6.3.102 Regulation Bias (No.622)] for the detail.
4-42 K124sm4e4
4. 3. 9 Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle)
The Positive Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the
Print Process.
The standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT 5” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
OUTPUT 5
multimeter
(DC)
ground

As the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is supplied during the Test Print, check the voltage value
Standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V.
4-43 K124sm4e4
3. Adjust the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy +450 +/-5V.
multimeter
(DC)
ground
VR001
4-44 K124sm4e4
4. 3.10 Negative Cleaning Roller Bias
(Toner Collection Process)
The Negative Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the
Toner Collection Process, which is done after the completion of Print Process.
The standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT 5” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
OUTPUT 5
multimeter
(DC)
ground

The Toner Collection Process works for some seconds after the printed paper has been
ejected.
Check the voltage value with the multi-meter during that period.
Standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.
4-45 K124sm4e4
3. Adjust the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy -550 +/-5V.
multimeter
(DC)
VR002
ground
4-46 K124sm4e4
Chapter 5
Mechanical
Page
5. 1 Outer Covers 5- 1
5. 1. 1 Removal of Side Covers 5- 1
5. 1. 2 Removal of Cover 15 5- 2
5. 1. 3 Removal of Cover 14 5- 3
5. 2 Developer Unit 5- 5
5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit 5- 5
5. 2. 2 Replacement of Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts 5- 8
5. 2. 3 Replacement of Roller Supply 5-35
5. 2. 4 Replacement of Screw Assy 5-38
5. 2. 5 Replacement of DC Motor 5-46
5. 2. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1) 5-47
5. 2. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears
(Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit) 5-48
5. 2. 8 Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller 5-54
5. 3 Fuser Unit 5-70

5. 3. 1 Removal of Fuser Unit 5-70
5. 3. 2 Reinstallation of Fuser Unit 5-76
5. 3. 3 Replacement of Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts 5-77
5. 3. 4 Replacement of Roller Pressure 5-90
5. 3. 5 Fuser Pressure Adjustment (NIP width check) 5-100
5. 3. 6 Replacement of Thermistor (TH1, TH2) 5-101
5. 3. 7 Replacement of Thermostat (TS1, TS2) 5-103
5. 3. 8 Replacement of Exit Sensor (PH3) 5-104
5. 4 Roll Deck 5-107

5. 4. 1 Replacement of Cutter Assembly 5-107
5. 4. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3, CL4, CL5) of Roll 1 5-110
5. 4. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6, CL7) of Roll 2 5-112
5. 4. 4 Replacement of Timing Belt 633 5-114
5. 4. 7 Replacement of Sensors (PH6, PH7, PH9, PH12) 5-121
5. 4. 8 Replacement of Sensors (PH8) 5-124
5. 4. 9 Replacement of Sensors (PH10) 5-126
5. 4.10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 1) 5-128
5. 4.11 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 2) 5-131
5. 5 Photoconductive Drum 5-227

5. 5. 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum 5-227
5. 5. 2 How to fix the Aluminum Blocks 5-235
5. 5. 2. 1 Fixing Block with Drum Block Fix Tool 5-237
5. 5. 2. 2 Fixing Block by hand (w/o Drum Block Fix Tool) 5-243
5. 5. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum 5-247
5. 5. 4 Replacement of Belt 4 5-248
K124sm5e1
5. 6 LED Head 5-249
5. 6. 1 Replacement of the LED Head Unit 5-249
5. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment 5-257
5. 6. 2. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image 5-257
5. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminum Blocks 5-258
5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers 5-274
5. 7 Image Corona 5-280

5. 7. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit 5-280
5. 7. 2 Replacement of the Corona Wire 5-287
5. 8 Transfer / Separation Corona 5-292

5. 8. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona 5-292
5. 8. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires 5-293
5. 9 Engine Frame 5-296

5. 9. 1 Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and Developer Press Sensor (PH4) 5-296
5. 9. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) & Registration Sensor (PH1) 5-300
5. 9. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5, BL6) 5-302
5. 9. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3, BL4) 5-303
5.10 Inner Transport Unit 5-305

5.10. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit 5-305
5.10. 2 Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt 5-306
5.11 Main Frame 5-309

5.11. 1 Replacement of DC Motors (M1, M2), Belt8, Belt9, Belt 7 5-309
5.11. 2 Replacement of Clutch (CL1) 5-317
5.11. 3 Replacement of Blower (BL7) 5-321
5.11. 4 Replacement of Fan (BL8) 5-322
5.12 Scanner Unit (Old Scanner) 5-323

5.12. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit 5-323
5.12. 2 Replacement of Belt 5-329
5.12. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy 5-331
5.12. 4 Replacement of Feed Roller 5-334
5.12. 5 Replacement of Pinch Roller Assy 5-342
5.12. 6 Replacement of CIS 5-349
5.12. 7 Replacement of Scan Glass Assy 5-353
5. 13 Scanner Unit (New Scanner) 5-353

5. 13. 1 Removal of Scanner Unit 5-353
5. 13. 2 Replacement of Belt 5-359
5. 13. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy 5-363
5. 13. 4 Replacing Sheet Roller (Platen) 5-367
5. 13. 5 Replacing Main Board (PW12920) 5-375
5. 13. 6 Replacing CIS 5-378
5. 13. 7 Replacing Size Sensor & Jam Sensor 5-386
5. 13. 8 Replacing Home Position Sensor 5-393
5. 13. 9 Replacing Open Switch 5-401
5. 13.10 Replacing Emergent Stop Switch 5-403
K124sm5e1
5. 1 Outer Covers
5. 1. 1 Removal of Side Covers

1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit.
2
2
3. Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides.
3
3
5-1 K124sm5e2
(2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left)
4
4
5. Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
6
5
5. 1. 2 Removal of Cover 15
1. Remove 4 pieces of screw (1), loosen 4 pieces of screw (2), and then remove the Cover 15 (3).
5-2 K124sm5e2
5. 1. 3 Removal of Cover 14
1. Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1).

1
2. Loosen 4 pieces of screw (2) on the back, and remove 4 pieces of screw (3) on the front.
2 3
3. Remove Cover 14 (4).
5-3 K124sm5e2
4. Remove 3 screws (5).
5. Remove Shield Cover N (6).
5-4 K124sm5e2
5. 2 Developer Unit
5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit
2. Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free.
2
2
3
3
3. There are Pins (4) at both sides.

Pull them up and then slide them inward to remove the Cover 4 (1).
4 4
5-5 K124sm5e3
NOTE
It is impossible to remove the Developer Unit if the Engine Unit is closed, because the driving
gears are firmly locked when closed.
5-6 K124sm5e3
6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x8 screw (7).
7 7
7. Close the Bypass Feeder (6), and then open the Developer Press Unit (8).
8
6
8. Disconnect the connector (9). Holding both Side Plates (10), remove the Developer Unit (11)
from the machine.
9 10
11
NOTE
If you replace the whole Developer Unit, it is necessary to adjust the space between
developer driving gears.
Refer to [5.2.7 Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing
the Developer Unit)].
5-7 K124sm5e3
5. 2. 2 Replacement of Recommended Periodic
Replacement Parts
NOTE
(1) A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended.
This section shows how to replace all of them in one sequent operation.
Refer to this section as well for replacement individual part listed below.
Item Number Remarks

of article
Scraper 1 All of these parts are contained in
Sheet 2 “Developer Maintenance Kit A”
Sheet 2 2 (Z160980020).
Roller Developer 1
Sheet 3 2
Sheet 4 2
Blade Roller 1
Seal R2 Assy 1
Seal L2 Assy 1
Seal 1 2
Seal 23 2
Seal 3 2
Seal 4 2
(2) Remove all the toner from Developer Unit before replacing the above parts.
(3) After replacing Developer / Blade Rollers, an applied Bias Adjustment should be reset
manually with using Service Mode - Clear Mode.
1. Remove the Developer Unit from the machine

making reference to [5.2.1 Removal of the
Developer Unit].
5-8 K124sm5e3
3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (2) to remove the Hopper Assembly (3).
2
2
4. Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (4) to remove Cover (5).
5. Remove Separator (6).
5-9 K124sm5e3
6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove Scraper Assembly (8).
7
7
7. Loosen 10 screws (9) to remove Scraper from Scraper Assembly.
old Scraper
9
NOTE
Just loosen the screws as little as possible to remove Scraper.
Doing so will reduce the new Scraper’s wave.
5-10 K124sm5e3
8. Put Scraper (10) in Scraper Assembly (8) and push Scraper’s edge to the inside.
Scraper (10) should be placed that the numbers printed on one side face can be read in correct
orientation.
10
NOTE
Visually check that Scraper’s bottom edge
touches the round boss through the bracket’s
opening.
10
touches boss
9. Adjust Scraper so that its side edges stick out in 1 to 2mm from the side rim of the bracket.
Then temporarily tighten the screws on both ends.
1 to 2mm
10
Line up here
Fix screws on both ends
5-11 K124sm5e3
10. Tighten the screws from the center to the sides with holding around each screw on the bracket.
Secure center to side Secure center to side
NOTE
Be sure to check for wave on Scraper’s edge. If there is, go back to step 7 to install Scraper
again.
11. Slightly loosen the screws on both ends. With pushing the edge inside, tighten the screws.
Secure again Secure again
12. Hold both ends of Scraper Assembly and turn it upside down so that the Scraper’s edge direct
the floor. If Scraper falls or has a slip, apply Seal 5 (Z054601260) to the bracket’s inside to
reduce the gap.
13. Again check for wave on Scraper’s edge. If it is OK, rub toner powders on the edge.
Toner
NOTE
(1) Toner powders on the edge reduce friction between the edge and the Drum’s surface.
If there is no toner on the edge, Scraper may flip up or damage.
(2) The edge must be straight. Otherwise the toner will not be scraped off properly.
5-12 K124sm5e3
14. Remove all the toner from Developer Unit.
NOTE
Do not reuse the removed toner.
15. On the driving side, remove Retaining Ring-C (11: C6) to remove Gear Helical 30T (12),
Parallel Pin (13: 2.5x10) and Collar 3 (14) from Blade Roller shaft.
12
14 13 12
11
NOTE
Blade Roller (15) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (16) by Bracket 4 (17) (on
the driving side) and Bracket 5 (18) (on the electrode plate side).
When reassembling, Blade Roller (15) should be pressed onto Roller Developer (16).
Pressurizing will be required prior to reinstallation of Gear Helical 30T (12).
16 15 16 15
not pressurized pressurized
18 17
Pressurize without Gear Helical 30T (12)
5-13 K124sm5e3
16. Remove 5 screws (19: M4x8) (20: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (21), Plate 9 (22), Collar (23).
20
23
22
20
19 21
23 22
21
17. Remove Washer (24: 8.1x14x0.5t) and Gear 29T-34T Assy (25)
24
25
24
18. Remove Gear Helical 30T (26) and Parallel Pin (27: 3x20) from Toner Supply Roller shaft.
If you cannot remove Parallel Pin (27) at this time, remove it after the later step 15.
27
26 26
5-14 K124sm5e3
19. Remove Retaining Ring-E (28: E7) to remove Washer (29: 8.1x12x0.2t) and Gear Helical 28T
Assy (30).
30
28 29 28
20. Remove Retaining Ring-E (31: E10) to remove Washer (32: 12.2x20x0.5t) and Counter Roller
(33) from Developer Roller shaft.
31
33
32
31
21. Remove 2 screws (34: M4x8) to remove Bracket 4 (17) and Spring (35).
At this time, Blade Roller on the driving side will be released from Roller Developer by
unsecured Bracket 4 (17).
34
17
35
22. On the electrode plate side, remove 3 screws (36) to remove Holder 2 Assy (37).
36
37
5-15 K124sm5e3
23. Remove 3 screws (38: M4x6) and 2 Retaining Ring-E (39: E10) to remove Collar (40) and
Bracket 10 Assy (41).
39
41
40
39
38
41
40
43
42
42
25. Remove Washer (44: 12.1x20x0.2t), Gear Helical 25T (45), Parallel Pin (46: 3x16), Counter
Roller (47) from Roller Developer shaft.
44
47
46
45
44
5-16 K124sm5e3
At this time, Blade Roller on the electrode plate side will be released from Roller Developer by
unsecured Bracket 5 (18).
48
18
49
27. Loosen 2 screws (50) to remove Bracket 19 (51).
50
51
28. On the driving side, remove 1 pan head screw (52: M4x8 W/ SW FW) to remove 1 flat washer
(53: M4) and Bracket 6 Assy (54).
52
54
53
29. On the electrode plate side, remove 1 pan head screw (55: M4x8 W/ SW FW) and Retaining
Ring-E (56: E8) to remove Washer (57: 10.1x16x0.5t), Flat Washer (58: M4), Bracket 7 Assy
(59).
55
59
58
56 57
5-17 K124sm5e4
30. Remove Blade Roller (15) from Developer Unit.
Do not install the new Blade Roller at this time.
15
15
15
31. On the driving side, remove 3 screws (60: M4x6) and Retaining Ring-E (61: E10) to remove
Washers (62: 12.2 x 20 x 0.5t), Bracket 8 Assy (63).
60
61
63
62
61
60
32. On the electrode plate side, remove Retaining Ring-E (64: E10) to remove Washer (65:
12.2x20x0.5t), Bearing (66).
64
66
64
65
5-18 K124sm5e4
33. Remove Roller Developer (16).
Do not install the new Roller Developer at this 16
time.
16 16
34. On each side, remove Seal 1 (67).

Remove 1 screw (68) to remove Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy (69) and Support Bracket(70).
67
70
67
69
68 68
5-19 K124sm5e4
35. On each side, remove Seal 23 (71: upper), Seal 4 (72: lower), Seal 3 (73: under).
Replace Seal 23, Seal 4 and Seal 3 with new ones.
71
73 72
NOTE
Align the bottom end of Seal 3 (73) to the rib inside the side plate.
Align the far ends of Seal 23 (71) and Seal 4 (72) to the top and bottom ends of Seal 3 (73)
respectively.
71
73 72
5-20 K124sm5e4
36. Install the new Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy (74), Support Bracket (70), Seal 1 (75).
75
70
74
68
75
68
NOTE
(1) Fit the positioning boss to the longer hole on Support Bracket (70).
(2) Do not tighten the screws (68) so much as the seals (74) will be transformed.
5-21 K124sm5e4
37. Apply the new Sheet 3 (76), Steet 4 (77)
to both sides of the new Developer Roller. 77
Keep water or grease away from between
the sheets.
76
38. Install the new Developer Roller to Developer Unit and fix it with the bearings.
NOTE
(1) Note the installation direction. The shorter shaft should be placed to the driving side.
electrode plate side driving side
(2) Seal 1 (75) on each side should be seated in position along the bosses.
out of position
75
Correct Wrong
(continued on the next page)
5-22 K124sm5e4
NOTE
(3) Push Roller Developer against Seal 1 on the electrode plate side (A) to hold and keep its
original position when reassembling.
(4) While installing toward (A) then (B), be careful not to damage Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 on
Roller Developer shaft.
(5) Do not bump Roller Developer on the frame rim (C).
5-23 K124sm5e4
39. Reinstall Scraper Assembly.
NOTE
(1) For Scraper Assembly and Blade Roller, please reinstall Scraper Assembly first and then
locate Blade Roller in position later. This will avoid making Scraper’s edge waving.
(2) After reinstalling Scraper Assembly, check that neither Scraper (10) nor Seal 1 (75) flips
up on both sides.
10
75
(3) Tighten the screws (7) with pushing Scraper Assembly (8) to the arrow direction to be
close to Blade Roller.
7
7
40. Apply the new Sheet (78), Sheet 2 (79) to both 79

sides of the new Blade Roller.
Keep water or grease away from between the
sheets.
78
5-24 K124sm5e4
41. Install the new Blade Roller to Developer Unit and fix it with the brackets.
NOTE
(1) Note the installation direction. The longer shaft should be placed to the driving side.
75 out of position
Correct Wrong
(3) Push Blade Roller (15) against Seal 1 (A) on the driving side to hold and keep its original
position, then push on the electrode plate side (B).
(Scraper Assembly removed)
15
(4) During installing toward (A) then (B), be careful not to damage Sheet (78) and Sheet 2
(79) on Blade Roller shaft.
5-25 K124sm5e4
NOTE
(5) After installing, check that Seal 1 (75), Sheet (78), Sheet 2 (79) are not damaged or
deformed.
10
(6) After locating, check that Scraper (10) is not
wavy.
75
15
(7) Blade Roller (15) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (16) by Bracket 4 (on
the driving side) and Bracket 5 (on the electrode plate side).
Now Blade Roller (15) has been located in position, it should be pressed onto Roller
Developer (16) at the later step.
16 15 16 15
42. Replace all the components except Gear Helical

30T (12), Separator (4) and Hopper Assy (3) in
position.
5-26 K124sm5e4
43. Make sure that the 6 screws (48) (55) (34) (52) are installed loose. If not, loosen them.
48 34
55 52
44. On the electrode plate side, fully press down the top of Bracket 5 (18). With pressing, tighten 2
screws (48) to secure Bracket 5 (18).
48
18
48
45. On the driving side, fully press down the top of Bracket 4 (17). With pressing, tighten 2 screws
(34) to secure Bracket 4 (17).
17
34
34
5-27 K124sm5e4
46. Press down the top of Bracket 7 Assy (59) and Bracket 6 Assy (54) at a time. This will allow
Blade Roller to be seated in the correct position.
54
59
NOTE
(1) Press down both Bracket 7 Assy and Bracket 6 Assy at the same time. Pressing only one
side may lose the correct pressure balance between the electrode plate side and the gear
side.
(2) Do not turn the screws (55) (52) for Bracket 7 Assy / Bracket 6 Assy at this point.
Follow the later instruction to correctly tighten the screws (55) (52).
52
55
47. Turn the screw (52) in just enough revolution so that its spring washer is held in the gap.
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (52) (55) firmly at this point of time. Otherwise proper and even
pressurization of Blade Roller between left/right may fail, and this will make the toner layer
on Roller Developer get thicker than required.
spring washer on (52)

52
released held
5-28 K124sm5e4
55 spring washer on (55)
released held
49. Turn the screw (52) in just enough revolution so that its spring washer is thrust in the gap.
Do not turn it completely.
52
held thrust
held thrust
5-29 K124sm5e4
51. Slowly tighten the screw (52) to secure Bracket 6
Assy (54). 52
54
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (52) (55) quickly at this point of time. Otherwise proper and even

Assy (57) in the same way with the previous step. 55
57
53. On the driving side, reinstall Collar 3 (14), Parallel Pin, Gear Helical 30T (12) and Retaining
Ring-E to Blade Roller shaft.
12
14
54. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (80) well, and

evenly add the toner to Developer Unit. 80
5-30 K124sm5e4
55. Along the guide on the side plates, gently place Separator (6) on the added toner.
Do not push it in.
6
to be placed
along the guide
NOTE
(1) Just put Separator (6) on the toner. It will be placed unseated. Do not push it completely
at this time. Doing so may damage the plastic screw mylars (81) on the 2 shafts
Unseated
81
6
81
(2) Be careful of the direction of Separator (6).

Do not install it in the wrong direction. 6
5-31 K124sm5e4
56. Insert Developer Handle (82) to the shaft of Roller Developer, and gently turn Developer
Handle (82).
Separator will sink in the toner. Turn Developer Handle (82) until Separator sinks in position.
82 82
NOTE
(1) Slowly turn Developer Handle. Otherwise the toner may spill out.
(2) Make sure that Separator (6) completely sinks in position by a 1/2 or more rotation of
Developer Handle.
If not in position, the plastic screw mylars may be damaged at the next step.
Wrong: Correct:
Unseated Seated
6
6
57. Replace the Hopper Assembly (3) and connect the connector (1).
5-32 K124sm5e4
58. Install Developer Handle (82) to Roller Developer shaft. Rotate Roller Developer several times
so that the roller surface is covered with the toner.
82
NOTE
If the pressures of Blade Roller on either or both sides are weaker than required, the toner
layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Roller
Developer in the above procedure 53.
Pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way in this case.
Refer to [5.2.8 Readjustment of the Pressure of Regulation Roller].
59. Reinstall Developer Unit to the machine.
60. Turn on the machine.
61. Press “? - Help” on Home screen.
5-33 K124sm5e4
62. Press [Service].
63. On-screen Keypad appears.

Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
64. Service Configuration screen will appear.
5-34 K124sm5e4
65. Use the arrow keys to open [5/6 IPS Setup]. Press [Launch] in “KIP Service Software”.
66. Press [Yes].
67. Press [Login] to log in Service Mode.
5-35 K124sm5e4
68. Press [Special Operation] in Service Mode Home.
Operation Target screen appears.
5-36 K124sm5e4
69. Select [0006 Bias3 Count] from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
0006 Bias3 Count Initializes Developer / Regulation Bias adjusted with

Density Compensation Process
70. Confirmation screen appears.

Press [Agree] to reset Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process.
Then the system starts recalculation of the possible best Developer/Regulation Bias.
(This will take time.)
5-37 K124sm5e4
71. Input screen appears.
Input “0000000” with On-screen Keypad.
NOTE
The required value for the KIP 7100 to reset Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation
Process is “0000000”.
“0000000” to “0000003” correspond to the adjustment level in Density Compensation

Process.
For example, if you interchange the Developer Unit with your spare unit, you can manually
set a certain adjustment level that would be suitable for your spare unit.
72. The value is displayed in “Count” area.

Once you input a seven digit value, [Rewrite] will be activated.
Press [Rewrite] to apply the new value to the printer.
The value in “Reading” area will be changed to the new value.
NOTE
After replacing Developer Roller / toner refreshment, you must reset bias adjustment by
Density Compensation Process.
Otherwise a darker image appears because the adjusted values are too high voltage for the
refreshed Developer Unit.
5-38 K124sm5e4
5. 2. 3 Replacement of Roller Supply
1. Remove Blade Roller and Roller Developer

from Developer Unit making reference to
[5. 2. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components]
on the page 5-8.
2. Remove Retaining Ring-E (1: E10) to remove Bearing (2).
3. On the electrode plate side, remove Retaining Ring-E (3: E10) to remove Bearing (4).
4. Turn the whole Developer Unit frame to the arrow direction to be laid down.
5-35 K124sm5e5
5. Remove 9 screws (5) to remove Frame 2 (6).
6. Remove 2 screws (7) to remove Bracket Assy (8).
5-36 K124sm5e5
7. Remove Toner Supply Roller (9).
NOTE
(1) Sheet 6 (10), Sheet 5 (11), Seal R Assy or 12: reuse
Seal L Assy (12) are attached on each side
shaft of Roller Supply.
Remove them from the old Roller Supply and

then install them to the new Roller Supply.
(Be careful not to dispose them.)
10
Keep water or grease away from between the
sheets.
11
(2) Note the installation direction. The shaft with three grooves should be placed to the
driving side.
groove
5-37 K124sm5e5
5. 2. 4 Replacement of Screw Assy
1. Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine

making reference to [5. 2. 1 Removal of the
Developer Unit] on the page 5-5.
3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (3) which fix the Hopper Assembly (4).
4. Remove the Hopper Assembly (4).
5-38 K124sm5e5
5. Remove Separator (5).
6. Remove all the toner from Developer Unit.
NOTE
Do not reuse the removed toner.
7. Remove 5 screws (6: M4x8) (7: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (8), Plate (9), Collar (10).
10
9
8
6 8
10 9
8. Remove Retaining Ring-E (11: E7) to remove Spacer (12), Gear 16T-34T (13).
13
11
12 11
5-39 K124sm5e5
9. Remove Retaining Ring-E (14: E5) (15: E7) to remove Washer (16), Gear 15T (17), Gear 16T
(18) and Parallel Pin (19).
15
20
19
16
18
17
16 15
10. Remove Retaining Ring-E (20) to remove Washer (21) and Bush (22).
20
22
21 20
23
24
12. Remove Retaining Ring-E (25) to remove Washer (26) and Bush (27).
25
27
26 25
5-40 K124sm5e5
13. Remove Screw A Assy (28: near Roller Supply), Screw B Assy (29: far from Roller Supply).
Remove Side Seal (30) and Washer (31) on both ends of Screw A Assy (28) and Screw B
Assy (29).
28 29 29 28
31 30 31
30
29 29
28
28
5-41 K124sm5e5
14. Remove each 2 screws (32: M3x5) to remove Screw A (33) / Screw B (34).
32 34
32 33
NOTE
When replacing Screw A (33) / Screw B (34), please note the followings.
(1) Note the twisting direction around the shaft.
(2) Each Screw A (33) / Screw B (34) has a 3 twist between the screws (32).
32
32
(3) Screw A (33) / Screw B (34) are fragile. Gently turn the screws (32) to fix Screw A (33) /
Screw B (34).
Screw B Assy (far from Roller Supply)

32 32
34
33
32 32
Screw A Assy (near Roller Supply)
5-42 K124sm5e5
15. Replace all the components except Separator (5) and Hopper Assy (4) in position.
16. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (35) well, and evenly add the toner to Developer Unit.
35
5-43 K124sm5e5
17. Along the guide on the side plates, gently place Separator (5) on the added toner.
Do not push it in.
to be placed
along the guide
NOTE
(1) Be careful of the direction of Separator (5).
Do not install it in the wrong direction.
5
(2) Just put Separator (5) on the toner. It will be placed unseated. Do not push it completely
at this time. Doing so may damage Screw A (33) and Screw B (34).
Unseated
33
5
34
5-44 K124sm5e5
18. Insert Developer Handle (36) to the shaft of Roller Developer, and gently turn Developer
Handle (36).
Separator will sink in the toner. Turn Developer Handle (36) until Separator sinks in position.
36 36
NOTE
(1) Slowly turn Developer Handle. Otherwise the toner may spill out.
(2) Make sure that Separator (5) completely sinks in position by a 1/2 or more rotation of
Developer Handle.
If not in position, the plastic screwing sheets may be damaged at the next step.
Wrong: Correct:
Unseated Seated
5-45 K124sm5e5
5. 2. 5 Replacement of DC Motor
1. Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover 2 (2).
2. Disconnect the connector (3), remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (4), and then remove the motor
assembly.
4
3
3. Pressing the stoppers (5) inside, remove the Joint R (6).
6
5
4. Remove 3 pieces of 3x20 screw (7) to remove the Bracket 19 (8).

Replace the DC Motor (9) with the new one.
8
7
5-46 K124sm5e6
5. 2. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1)

2. Disconnect the connector (2), and remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (3) to remove the Sensor (4).
Replace the Sensor (4) with the new one.
5-47 K124sm5e6
5. 2. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears
(Necessary to adjust after replacing the
Developer Unit)
NOTE
You do not have to adjust the space between gears basically as it has been adjusted in the
factory.
But please do it only when you replace the whole Developer Unit.
The Developer Unit is driven by the Gear Helical 20T on the machine and the Gear Helical 28T on
the Developer Unit.
There must be a little mechanical play between these gears. (In another word there must be a little
space between them.)
Gear Helical 20T
Gear Helical 28T
If there is no space between these gears, the gear may be broken.

In this case it is necessary to add Adjustment Plates to keep a space.
Not correct Correct
Add Adjustment Plates.
There is not enough Some space is kept between

space between gears. gears.
(Gears may be broken)
Refer to the next page how to add the Adjustment Plates.
5-48 K124sm5e6
2. Remove 2 screws (2) to remove each Bracket 32 (3) on the left and Bracket 33 (4) on the right.
You will find Adjustment Plate (5) and Adjustment Plate 2 (6).
3 4
2 2
5 6
3 4
5-49 K124sm5e6
3. On the left side, add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate (5) as required, cover them with
the Bracket 32 (3), and then fix with 2 screws (2).
NOTE
The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine.
Spacer Z053101200 (thickness is 0.05mm)

Spacer 5 Z053101350 (0.1mm)
Spacer 3 Z053101330 (0.2mm)
5-50 K124sm5e6
4. On the right side, add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate 2 (6) as required, cover them with
the Bracket 33 (4), and then fix with 2 screws (2).
NOTE
The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine.
Spacer 2 Z053101210 (thickness is 0.05mm)

Spacer 6 Z053101360 (0.1mm)
Spacer 4 Z053101340 (0.2mm)
5-51 K124sm5e6
5. Put back the Developer Unit (1) to the machine.
6. There is Gear Helical 28T (7) on Developer Unit side. There is Gear Helical 20T (8) on Engine
Unit, and also there is Gear Helical 34T (9) on Engine Unit.
Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8) are contacted each other when the Developer
Unit is on the machine. Gear Helical 34T (9) drives Gear Helical 20T (8).
(Top of Engine Unit)
8
7
(Bottom of Engine Unit)
5-52 K124sm5e6
Holding the Gear Helical 28T (7) firmly with one hand, move the Gear Helical 34T (9) with
another hand whether there is any mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and
Gear Helical 20T (8).
Hold the Gear Helical 28T with one hand.
Move Gear Helical 34T (instead of Gear Helical 20T) with another hand.
7. There must be a little mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8).
(In another word there must be a little space between them.)
If the gear could not be moved at all when you check them on the former procedure 6, it means
there is not enough space between gears. The gear may be broken in this case.
In this case, add more Adjustment Plates by the way instructed at the procedures 3 and 4.
Add Adjustment Plates
There is not enough The space between gears

space between gears. becomes wider.
(Gears are not movable) (Gears become movable)
5-53 K124sm5e6
5. 2. 8 Readjustment of the Pressure of Regulation
Roller
If the pressure of Blade Roller is weak, the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker
than required when you rotate the Developer Roller.
Pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way as shown below in this case.
(You will not be able to pressurize it successfully by the usual way of pressurization once a too
thick toner layer is created.)
To correct the pressure of Blade Roller against Developer Roller, remove the thicker toner layer on
the contact point between Blade Roller and Developer Roller.

3 3
5-54 K124sm5e7
4. Remove the Hopper Assembly (4).
5. Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (5) to remove Cover (6).
6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove Scraper Assembly (8).
7
7
5-55 K124sm5e7
7. On the driving side, remove Retaining Ring-C (9: C6) to remove Gear Helical 30T (10), Parallel
Pin (11: 2.5x10) and Collar 3 (12) from Blade Roller shaft.
10
12 11 10
NOTE
Blade Roller (13) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (14) by Bracket 4 (15) on
the driving side, by Bracket 5 (16) on the electrode plate side. When reassembling, re-
pressurization should be required prior to reinstallation of Gear Helical 30T (10).
14 13 14 13
16 15
5-56 K124sm5e7
8. Remove 5 screws (17: M4x8) (18: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (19), Plate 9 (20), Collar (21).
18
21
20
18
17 19
21 20
19
9. Remove Washer (22: 8.1x14x0.5t) and Gear 29T-34T Assy (23)
22
23
22
10. Remove Helical 30T (24) and Parallel Pin (25: 3x20) from Toner Supply Roller shaft.
If you cannot remove Parallel Pin (25) at this time, remove it after the later step 12.
25
24 25
5-57 K124sm5e7
11. Remove Retaining Ring-E (26: E7) to remove Washer (27: 8.1x12x0.2t) and Gear Helical 28T
Assy (28).
28
26 27 26
12. Remove Retaining Ring-E (29: E10) to remove Washer (30: 12.2x20x0.5t) and Counter Roller
(31) from Developer Roller shaft.
29
31
30
29
32
17
33
34
35
5-58 K124sm5e7
15. Remove 3 screws (36: M4x6) and 2 Retaining Ring-E (37: E10) to remove Collar (38) and
Bracket 10 Assy (39).
37
39
38
37
36
39
38
41
40
40
17. Remove Washer (42: 12.1x20x0.2t), Gear Helical 25T (43), Parallel Pin (44: 3x16), Counter
Roller (45) from Developer Roller shaft.
42
45
44
43
42
5-59 K124sm5e7
46
16
47
19. Loosen 2 screws (48) to remove Bracket 19 (49).

48
49
20. On the driving side, remove 1 pan head screw (50: M4x8 W/ SW FW) to remove 1 flat washer
(51: M4) and Bracket 6 Assy (52).
50
52
51
21. On the electrode plate side, remove 1 pan head screw (53: M4x8 W/ SW FW) and Retaining
Ring-E (54: E8) to remove Washer (55: 10.1x16x0.5t), Flat Washer (56: M4), Bracket 7 Assy
(59).
53
57
56
54 55
5-60 K124sm5e7
22. Remove Blade Roller (13) from Developer Unit.
Clean Blade Roller if it gets dirty.
13
13
NOTE
(1) Be careful not to damage Sheet (58) and 59
Sheet 2 (59) on Blade Roller shaft.
58
(3) Seal 1 (60) on each side should be seated in position along the boss (61).
60 61 out of position
0
Correct Wrong
5-61 K124sm5e7
23. On Developer Roller (14), vacuum the toner around the contact point against Blade Roller (13).
Vacuum toner stuck
around the contact area
13
14
NOTE
If some toner remains on the surface of Roller Developer, the toner will cushion the pressure
by Blade Roller. This will prevent a proper pressurization.
24. Reinstall Scraper Assembly (8).
NOTE
(1) For Scraper Assembly and Blade Roller, please reinstall Scraper Assembly first and then
locate Blade Roller in position later. This will avoid making Scraper’s edge waving.
(2) After reinstalling Scraper Assembly, check

that neither Scraper (62) nor Seal 1 (60) flips
up on both sides. 62
60
(3) Tighten the screws (7) with pushing Scraper Assembly (8) to the arrow direction to be
close to Blade Roller.
7
7
5-62 K124sm5e7
25. Reinstall Blade Roller (13).
NOTE
60
59 out of position
Correct Wrong
(3) Push Blade Roller (13) against Seal 1 (A) on the driving side to hold and keep its original
position, then push on the electrode plate side (B).
(Scraper Assembly removed)
13
(4) During installing toward (A) then (B), be careful not to damage Sheet (78) and Sheet 2
(79) on Blade Roller shaft.
5-63 K124sm5e7
NOTE
(5) After installing, check that Seal 1 (59), Sheet / Sheet 2 (on Blade Roller shaft) are not
damaged or deformed.
58
(6) After locating, check that Scraper (58) is not
wavy.
59
13
(7) Blade Roller (13) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (14) by Bracket 4 (on
the driving side) and Bracket 5 (on the electrode plate side).
Now Blade Roller (13) has been located in position, it should be pressed onto Roller
Developer (14) at the later step.
14 13 14 13
5-64 K124sm5e7
26. Replace all the components except Gear Helical 30T (10) and Hopper Assy (4) in position.
27. Make sure that the 6 screws (46) (53) (32) (50) are installed loose.
46 32
53 50
28. On the electrode plate side, fully press down the

top of Bracket 5 (16). With pressing, tighten 2
screws (46) to secure Bracket 5 (16).
46
16
46
29. On the driving side, fully press down the top of

Bracket 4 (15). With pressing, tighten 2 screws 15
32
(32) to secure Bracket 4 (15).
32
5-65 K124sm5e7
30. Press down the top of Bracket 7 Assy (57) and Bracket 6 Assy (52) at a time. This will allow
Blade Roller to be seated in the correct position.
52
57
NOTE
(1) Press down both Bracket 7 Assy and Bracket 6 Assy at the same time. Pressing only one
side may lose the correct pressure balance between the electrode plate side and the gear
side.
(2) Do not turn the screws (53) (50) for Bracket 7 Assy / Bracket 6 Assy at this point.
Follow the later instruction to correctly tighten the screws (53) (50).
50
53
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (50) (53) firmly at this point of time. Otherwise proper and even

50
released held
5-66 K124sm5e7
released held
50
held thrust
held thrust
5-67 K124sm5e7
Assy (52). 50
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (50) quickly at this
time. Otherwise proper and even pressurization
of Blade Roller between both the sides may be
failed, and this will make the toner layer on
Developer Roller get thicker than required. 52

Assy (57). 53
NOTE
Do not tighten the screw (53) quickly at this
time. Otherwise proper and even pressurization
of Blade Roller between both the sides may be
failed, and this will make the toner layer on
Developer Roller get thicker than required. 57
37. On the driving side, reinstall Collar 3 (12), Parallel Pin, Gear Helical 30T (10) and Retaining
Ring-E to Blade Roller shaft.
10
12
5-68 K124sm5e7
38. Install Developer Handle (63) to Developer Roller
shaft. Rotate Developer Roller several times so
that the roller surface is covered with the toner. 63
NOTE
If the pressures of Blade Roller on either or both sides are weaker than required, the toner
layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Roller
Developer.
Retry to pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way in this case.
5-69 K124sm5e7
5. 3 Fuser Unit
5. 3. 1 Removal of Fuser Unit
2 2
3 3
5-70 K124sm5e8
5. Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
5 6
6. Disconnect 4 connectors (7).
7
7
7. Open Exit Cover (8).
5-71 K124sm5e8
8. Remove 2 screws (9) to remove Exit Side Cover R / L (10).
10
10
9 9
10 10
9. Open 2 clamps (11) and disconnect 1 connector (12).
11
12
10. On the left side (your right hand), remove 1 piece of KL Clip (13).
13
5-72 K124sm5e8
11. Slide Exit Cover (8) to the arrow direction (right hand side) to remove it from the machine.
12. Release the springs (14) on both sides.
14
14
13. Remove 1 connector (15).
15
5-73 K124sm5e8
14. Remove 1 screw (16) to release the hinge bracket (17).
17
18
16
15. Firmly hold Fuser Cover (18). Slightly open it (A) and remove the hinge bracket (17).
Slide Fuser Cover (18) to the arrow direction (left hand side) (B) to remove it from the machine.
18
15. Remove 4 screws (19) to remove Bracket R / L (20).

19
19
20
20
19
19
5-74 K124sm5e8
16. Open the Engine Unit.
17. Loosen 1 screw (21) to release the drive side of Fuser Unit.
21
18. Pull and remove Fuser Unit (22) from the machine.
22 22
5-75 K124sm5e8
5. 3. 2 Reinstallation of Fuser Unit
Reference
This section shows Fuser Unit with Paper Exit Assy removed for clarification.
1. With Engine Unit open, fully mount Fuser Unit (1) to the machine
2. On the left side of the machine, rotate Pulley (2) counterclockwise to check the gear
engagement between Fuser Unit and the machine.
gears
2
2
NOTE
If the gears on Fuser Unit and Pulley (2) do not move together, the engagement may fail.
With pushing Fuser Unit (1) to the machine inside, rotate Pulley (2) again to obtain the
correct engagement.
gears
Push
2
2
1
5-76 K124sm5e8
3. Install the brackets (3) with the screws (4) (5).
Tighten the lower one (4) and then the upper one (5).
5: second
3
4: first
4. Tighten the screw (6) to fix Fuser Unit (1) to the machine.
5. Reconnect the connectors (7).
7 7
6. Reinstall Paper Exit Assy (if removed), Cover 2 and Cover 3.
7. Close Engine Unit.
5-77 K124sm5e8
5. 3. 3 Replacement of Recommended Periodic
Replacement Parts
NOTE
A periodic replacement for them is recommended.
This section shows how to replace all of them in one sequent operation.
Item Number Remarks
of article
Roller Fusing 1 All of these parts are contained in
Bush 2 “Fuser Maintenance Kit” (Z160980040)
Nail Stripping (Upper) 13
Nail Lower 6
2 2
3 3
5-78 K124sm5e8
5 6
7
7
7. Open Paper Exit Assy (8). Loosen 1 screw (9) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine.
5-79 K124sm5e8
8. Remove 1 screw (10: M4x6) to remove Plate (11) on the left side.
10
11
NOTE
(1) Please remove the Plate (11) with holding Paper Exit Assy (8).
Otherwise you may drop Paper Exit Assy.
(2) There is the Plate 2 on the right side of machine, which is a symmetric part of Plate (11).
You may remove it instead of Plate (11).
9. Remove Paper Exit Assy (8).
8
8
10. Remove the 4x6 screw (12) to remove each Nail Stripping Assembly (13).
13
13
12
NOTE
When reassembling, fix Nail Stripping Assembly with the screw while holding Nail Stripping
Assembly down. This will allow Nail Stripping Assembly to be installed correctly (just upright).
5-80 K124sm5e8
11. Disassemble the Nail Stripping Assembly as the following photo.
Replace the Nail Stripping (14) with the new one.
14
12. There are 2 pieces of the bracket (15) on the back of the machine.
Remove the screws (16) to remove both Bracket (15).
16
16
15
13. With Engine Unit open, remove Fuser Unit (17).
17
17
5-81 K124sm5e8
NOTE
To reinstall Fuser Unit, follow the instruction below.
(1) With Engine Unit open, fully mount Fuser Unit (17) to the machine.
(2) On the left side of the machine, rotate Pulley (18) counterclockwise to check the gear
correct engagement.
gears
17
18
18
17:
Paper Exit Assy
omitted
(3) Install Bracket (15) with the screws (16).

Tighten the lower screw and then the upper.
16
15
16
(4) Tighten the screw (9) to fix Fuser Unit (17) to the machine.
17
(5) Replace Paper Exit Assy (8), the connectors (7), Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
Close Engine Unit.
5-82 K124sm5e8
14. Disconnect the connectors (19). Remove 4 screws (20) to release IR Lamps (21).
Remove 2 screws (22) to release the connector brackets.
22 20 21
19
20 22 21
19
15. Remove Cover (23) on both sides of Roller Fusing.

Gently pull IR Lamps (24: red) (25: white) toward either way to remove them.
23
23
24
24
25
25
5-83 K124sm5e8
NOTE
(1) Do not touch the glass part of the Lamp with a bare hand.
(2) Do not interchange the IR Lamps (24) (25). One with red connectors (24) should be
installed to the media entrance side and the other with white connectors (25) to the media
exit side.
25 24 24 25
exit entrance entrance exit
(3) There is a bubble (projection) on the glass part of IR Lamp.

If the bubbles of both IR Lamps touch each other, IR Lamps will be broken because of
vibration or heat.
Make sure not to face the bubbles each other. Install the IR Lamps so that the bubbles
will be located far from each other.
cross section of bubble part
Correct Correct Wrong:

touching
(4) IR Lamps can be installed to Fuser Unit in either way.
16. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (26) to release Bracket 10 Assy (27).
26
27
5-84 K124sm5e8
17. On both sides, remove 4 KL Clips (28) to remove Arm 4 (29) and Arm 3 (30).
28 29
30
28
18. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (31) to remove Cover 2 (32). Disconnect the harness
(33).
33
32
31
19. Remove 2 screws (34) to remove Bracket 6 Assy (35).
34
35
35
5-82 K124sm5e9
20. On the gear side, remove 1 screw (36) to remove Bracket 20 (37).
37
36
21. Remove 2 screws (38) to remove Bracket 7 Assy (39).
39
38
22. Remove 2 screws (40) on the media exit side.
40
40
5-83 K124sm5e9
23. On the connector side, loosen 1 screw (41) to release Bracket 2 (42).
42 42
41
24. On the gear side, loosen 1 screw (43) to release Bracket 3 (44).
44 44
43
NOTE
Reinstall Bracket 2 (42) and Bracket 3 (44) in the correct position.
(1) Fully push to slide the bracket to the arrow direction so that the fold portion on the bracket
will fit into the notch on Fuser Upper Unit.
(2) The 2 positioning bosses locate the bracket. The bracket should not ride over them.
fold
notch
boss
5-84 K124sm5e9
25. On the media entrance side, remove 2 screws (45) to release Thermostat Bracket (46).
45 46
26. Turn Fuser Upper Unit (47) to the back. Lift Fuser Upper Unit (47) upward to remove it.
47
47
27. On the gear side of Fuser Upper Unit, remove Retaining Ring-E (48) to remove Gear 30T (49).
48
49
28. Remove Stopper (50) to remove Gear 60T (51).
51
50 51
50
5-85 K124sm5e9
29. Remove 2 screws (52) to remove Bearing Holder (53).
52
53
30. On the connector side of Fuser Upper Unit, remove 2 screws (54) to remove Bearing Holder
(55).
54
55
31. On both sides, remove Bush (56).

Replace Bush with new ones.
56 56
5-86 K124sm5e9
32. Remove Roller Fusing (57).
57 57
NOTE
Install Roller Fusing to Upper Fuser Assy in the
correct direction. One end with a cutting should
be placed to the gear side.
cutting
33. Remove 2 screws (58) to remove Collar (59) from Roller Fusing (60).
Replace Roller Fusing with a new one.
60 59
58
58
5-87 K124sm5e9
34. On the media exit side of Fuser Lower Unit, remove 2 screws (61) to remove Guide Plate 2
Assy (62).
61 61
62 62
35. Remove 1 screw (63) to remove each Nail Lower Assy (64).
63 64
5-88 K124sm5e9
36. Turn Nail Lower (65) to remove it from the bracket.
Replace Nail Lower with a new one.
65
65
5-89 K124sm5e9
5. 3. 4 Replacement of Roller Pressure
2 2
3 3
5-90 K124sm5eA
5 6
7
7
7. Open Cover Assembly (8). Loosen 1 screw (9) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine.
5-91 K124sm5eA
10
11
NOTE
(1) Please remove the Plate (11) while holding Cover Assembly (8).
Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly.
9. Remove the Cover Assembly (8).
8
8
5-92 K124sm5eA
10. There are 2 pieces of the brackets (12) on the back of the machine.
Remove the screws (13) (14) to remove both Bracket (12).
14
13
12
11. With Engine Unit open, remove Fuser Unit (15).
15
15
5-93 K124sm5eA
NOTE
To reinstall Fuser Unit, follow the instruction below.
(1) With Engine Unit open, fully mount Fuser Unit (15) to the machine.
(2) On the left side of the machine, rotate Pulley (16) counterclockwise to check the gear
correct engagement.
gears
15
16
16
15:
Cover Assembly
omitted
(3) Install Bracket (12) with the screws (13) (14).

Tighten the lower screw (14) and then the
upper (13). 13
12
14
(4) Tighten the screw (9) to fix Fuser Unit to the machine.
(5) Replace Cover Assembly (8), the connectors (7), Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).
Close Engine Unit.
5-94 K124sm5eA
12. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (17) to release Bracket 10 Assy (18).
17
18
13. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (19) to remove Cover 2 (20). Disconnect the harness
(21).
21
19 20
14. Remove 2 screws (22) on the media exit side.
22 22
5-95 K124sm5eA
15. On both sides, remove 4 grip rings (23) to remove Arm 4 (24) and Arm 3 (25).
24
23
23 25
16. On the connector side, loosen 1 screw (26) to release Bracket 2 (27).
27 27
26
17. On the gear side, loosen 1 screw (28) to release Bracket 3 (29).
29 29
28
5-96 K124sm5eA
NOTE
Reinstall Bracket 2 (27) and Bracket 3 (29) in the correct position.
(1) Fully push the bracket to the arrow direction so that the fold portion on the bracket will fit
into the notch on Fuser Upper Unit.
(2) The 2 positioning bosses locate the bracket.

fold
The bracket should not ride over them.
boss
18. Turn Fuser Upper Unit (30) to the back. Lift Fuser Upper Unit upward to remove it.
30
30
5-97 K124sm5eA
19. On the media exit side of Fuser Lower Unit, remove 2 screws (31) to remove Guide Plate 2
Assy (32).
31 31
32 32
20. Remove 2 screws (33) to remove Washer Special (34) and Guide Plate (35).
34
33
33
35
NOTE
When reassembling, make sure that the holes of Guide Plate fit the bosses on the bracket on
both side. Guide Plate should not ride over the bosses.
5-98 K124sm5eA
21. Remove Pressure Roller (36) from the unit.
36
22. Remove Retaining Ring-C (37) to remove Collar (38) (39: only on the gear side), Bearing (40)
from each shaft end of Roller Pressure (41).
Replace Roller Pressure with a new one.
(gear side) (connector side)
37
37
39
37 38 40 41 40 38 37
5-99 K124sm5eA
5. 3. 5 Fuser Pressure Adjustment (NIP width check)
1. Load a tracing paper roll in 36”/A0 width into any available Roll Deck.
2. Make a test print in pattern No.2 S(0) with the roll in 297mm length.
3. When the test print’s leading edge appears within 50mm at the exit cover, stop the print process
by opening any cover. At this point, the black area on the print will be nipped between Fuser
Roller and Pressure Roller.
4. Leave the print there in 10 seconds. After that, remove the test print from the machine.
5. The test print has a shiny band on its printing surface, which has been created by pressure
between Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller.
Check that the nip widths at the reference points meet the following specification.
- Within 2mm inside from the side edges: 8.5 to 9.0mm
2mm 2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
6. If the nip width at any point is not proper, adjust the fuser pressure with the pressure adjuster.
adjuster
(ex. machine right side)
Reference
The default fuser pressure can be checked as follows. (tilting +1 to +2)
(ex. machine right side) default
7. Make another test print and check the nip widths until they meet the specification.
5-100 K124sm5eA
5. 3. 6 Replacement of Thermistor (TH1, TH2)
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine

Fuser Unit] on the page 5-70.
1
1
2. Release the harness from the clamps (2).

Remove the connectors (3: TH1, white) (4: TH2, black) from Bracket 10 Assy (5).
5 3
4
2
3. Release the harness from the clapms (6).
5-101 K124sm5eB
4. Remove each 1 screw (7) to release Thermistor Assy (8: TH1, short harness) and Thermistor 3
Assy (9: TH3, long harness).
9
8
5. Remove 1 screw (10) to replace Thermistor (8: TH1) (9: TH2) with a new one.
10
8, 9
NOTE
Be careful of the direction of Thermistor when
reassembling.
The projection (11) nearer to the harness should
be inserted to the positioning hole (12).
11
12
5-102 K124sm5eB
5. 3. 7 Replacement of Thermostat (TS1, TS2)
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine
2. Remove 2 screws (2: M4x6) to remove Thermostat Assy (3).
3. Remove 2 screws (4: M3x4) to remove the Thermostat (5).

Replace the Thermostat (5) with the new one.
5
4 4
5-103 K124sm5eB
5. 3. 8 Replacement of Exit Sensor (PH3)
2. Remove 6 screws (2) to remove Cover 2 (3).
2
2
5-104 K124sm5eB
NOTE
(1) Please remove the Plate (5) while holding Cover Assembly (3).
Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly.
4. Remove the Cover Assembly (3).
3
3
5. Close Engine Unit.
5-105 K124sm5eB
6. Remove the harness (6) and remove the screw (7) to remove Exit Sensor Assy (8).
Remove Exit Sensor (9) form Exit Sensor Assy (8). Replace Exit Sensor with a new one.
5-106 K124sm5eB
5. 4 Roll Deck
5. 4. 1 Replacement of Cutter Assembly
1. Draw out the Roll Deck (1).
NOTE
Make sure to insert the hooking part to the slit as
the following photo when you put back the Cover
1 (3).
hook
5-107 K124sm5eC
5
4
NOTE
Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (5) is inside the bottom frame.
step
frame
4. Open the wire saddle (6) and disconnect the connector (7) to release the harness.
Remove 1 screw (8) and remove the clamp (9) to release the core.
5-108 K124sm5eC
5. Remove 2 screws on the front (10) to remove Cutter Assy (11).
Replace the whole Cutter Assy with a new one.
11
10
NOTE
(1) Reuse the clamp (9) and the core for a new Cutter Assembly.
(2) Put the Cutter Assembly with the Cutter Motor up.
If you put it with the Cutter Motor down, you will break the Cutter Motor Harness.
Harness may
be broken.
Good No good
(3) There is the Height Guide (12) on the right side.

Please fix the Cutter Assembly aligning the plate (13) and the central line of Height
Guide (12) each other.
13 12
5-109 K124sm5eC
5. 4. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3, CL4, CL5) of
Roll 1

3
2
NOTE
step
frame
5-110 K124sm5eC
3. Remove Retaining Ring-C (4) and disconnect the harness (5) to remove each Clutch (6: CL3)
or Clutch (7: CL4).
Replace Clutch with a new one.
6
4
5
4
5
7
6, 7
4. Remove 1 Bind Head Screw (8) and 1 Pan Head Screw (9), disconnect the harness (10) to
remove Clutch (11: CL5). Replace Clutch with a new one.
10
11
8 9
11
5-111 K124sm5eC
5. 4. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6, CL7) of Roll 2
7
6
5
4
5-112 K124sm5eC
11
10
8 9
11
5-113 K124sm5eC
5. 4. 4 Replacement of Timing Belt 633
NOTE
Make sure to insert the hooking part to the slit as
the following photo when you put back the Cover
1 (3).
hook
5-114 K124sm5eC
5
4
NOTE
step
frame
4. Open the wire saddle (6) and disconnect the connector (7) to release the harness.
Remove 1 screw (8) and remove the clamp (9) to release the core.
5-115 K124sm5eC
5. Remove 2 screws on the front (10) to remove Cutter Assy (11).
11
10
6. Open 6 wire saddles (12) and release 3 connectors (13) to release the harness (14).
12
13
14
14
7. Remove Retaining Ring-C (15) to remove Clutch (16: CL4).
15
16
8. Remove 4 screws (17) to remove Bracket 33 (18).

18
17
17
5-116 K124sm5eC
9. Remove 3 screws (19) to remove Bracket 32 (20).
19
20
10. Loosen 1 screw (21) to release Pulley 3 (22). Push Pulley 3 (22) to the arrow direction and fix
it. Replace Timing Belt 633 (23) with a new one.
21
23
22 22
23
NOTE
You do not have to adjust the belt tension.
24 21
Replace Bracket 32 (20) first and then tighten the
screw (21). The Spring Coil 12 (24) gives a
proper tension to the Timing Belt.
(Bracket 32 removed in the picture for easy

understanding.)
5-117 K124sm5eC

2
NOTE
step
frame 3
5-118 K124sm5eC
3. Loosen 1 screw (4) to release Pulley 3 (5). Move Pulley 3 (5) upward and fix it the screw (4) to
release Timing Belt 453.
4. Remove 1 Bind Head Screw (6) and 1 Pan Head Screw (7) to remove Bracket 12 (8).
Replace Timing Belt 453 (9) with a new one.
9
6 7
NOTE
You do not have to adjust the belt tension.
Replace Bracket 12 (8) and then tighten the

screw (4) The Spring Coil 11 (10) gives a proper
4
tension to the Timing Belt 480.
10
5-119 K124sm5eC

2
NOTE
Make sure that the step part on the bottom side
of Cover 22 (3) is inside the bottom frame. step
frame 3
3. Remove Retaining Ring-E (4) to remove Collar (5).

Replace Timing Belt (6) with a new one.
6
4 6
5
5-120 K124sm5eC
5. 4. 7 Replacement of Sensor (PH6, PH7, PH9, PH12)
NOTE
(1) When reassembling, fit a boss or nails on the sensor into holes on the sensor bracket.
boss
nails
(2) When reassembling, fit positioning bosses on the frame (or the sensor bracket) into the
corresponding holes.

Remove a roll media if mounted.
2. Remove 1 screw (2) to release the sensor bracket (3). Remove the connector (4) and 1 screw
(5) to replace Sensor (3: PH6) with a new one.
3 3
4 boss
5 6
2
5-121 K124sm5eD
3. Remove 8 screws (7) to remove Plate (8).
7
8
4. Remove 1 screw (9) to release the sensor bracket (10). Remove the connector (11) to remove
the bracket (10).
10
10
9 boss
11
5. Remove 1 screw (12: M3x6) and 2 KL Clips (13) to remove Shaft 4 (14) and Encoder 2 Assy
(15). Replace Sensor (16: PH12) with a new one.
15
15
13 13
12
nails
14
16
12
5-122 K124sm5eD
6. Remove 1 screw (17) to release the sensor bracket (18). Remove the connector (19) and 1
screw (20) to replace Sensor (21: PH7) with a new one.
18
18
21
boss boss
17 20 19
boss
7. Remove 1 screw (22) to release the sensor bracket (23). Remove the connector (24) and t1
screw (25) to replace Sensor (26: PH9) with a new one.
23 24
boss
23 22 24
boss
boss
26
5-123 K124sm5eD
5. 4. 8 Replacement of Sensor (PH8)

3
2
NOTE
step
frame
5-124 K124sm5eD
3. Remove 1 screw (4) to release the sensor bracket (5). Remove 1 connector (6) to replace
Sensor (7: PH8) with a new one.
5
6
4
7
NOTE
(1) When reassembling, fit a boss or nails on the
sensor into holes on the sensor bracket.
nails
(2) When reassembling, fit the positioning boss

on the frame into the notch on the bracket.
boss
5-125 K124sm5eD
5. 4. 9 Replacement of Sensor (PH10)
2. Remove 3 screws (2) to remove Cover (3).
3. Remove 1 screw (4) to release the sensor bracket (5). Remove 1 connector (6) to replace
Sensor (7: PH10) with a new one.
7
4
5-126 K124sm5eD
NOTE
(1) When reassembling, fit a boss or nails on the
sensor into holes on the sensor bracket.
nails
(2) When reassembling, fit the positioning boss

on the frame into the notch on the bracket.
boss
5-127 K124sm5eD
5. 4. 10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 1)
2. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle.

3
5-128 K124sm5eD
5
NOTE
step
frame 6
5. Disconnect 1 connector (7).
5-129 K124sm5eD
6. Remove 6 screws (8) to remove Roll 1 dehumidifier casing (9).
8
7. Remove 2 screws (10) and 1 connector (11) from each Resistor (12).
Replace Resistor (square type) with a new one.
12
10
12 10
11
10 11
5-130 K124sm5eD
5. 4. 11 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 2)
2. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle.
4. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the far end.
5-131 K124sm5eD
5. Remove 2 screws (4) to remove Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5).
4 5
6. Remove 1 screw (6) to move Cover 7 (7).
7
7
7. Disconnect 1 connector (8).
5-132 K124sm5eD
8. Move Cover 4 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it.
9. Remove 3 screws (10) to remove Roll 2 dehumidifier casing (11).
10
11
11
5-133 K124sm5eD
10. Disconnect 1 connector (12). Remove 2 screws (13).
Remove and replace Resistor (square type) (14) with a new one.
12
12
13
13
14
5-134 K124sm5eD
5. 5 Photoconductive Drum
5. 5. 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum
2
2
3
3
5-227 K124sm5eH
4
4
6
5
7. Remove the Guides 3 (7).

7
5-228 K124sm5eH
8
9
8
9. Disconnect the connector (10), and open the wire

saddles (11) to release the harness.
11
10
NOTE
Wind excessive length of the USB Cable with the
wire saddles (11) when reassembling.
Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire
saddles (11) together.
12
5-229 K124sm5eH
11. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14).
13
13
14 14
12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward.

15
13. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame.
Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame.
16
17
Lock position Unlock position
5-230 K124sm5eH
14. Open the LED Head Frame (18).
18
NOTE
The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically
to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down.
19
Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you

will close the LED Head Frame.
20
5-231 K124sm5eH
16. Remove 1 tooth washer screw (21: M4x8), and remove Plate 2 (22) and Pulley Gear (23).
21
22
23
NOTE
(1) Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed with Engine
Unit open.
It will be strained with Engine Unit closed.
24
(2) The tooth washer screw (21) has a tooth

washer of which burr face meets the burr face
composition surface.
5-232 K124sm5eH
17. Remove the Collar (25) from the left Drum Shaft.
25
NOTE
The new (spare) Drum Assembly does not include the Collar (25).
So please reuse it.
18. There are 2 pieces of screw (26) on the left which fix the Block (27).
Loosen these screws (26) and rotate the Block (27) as the arrow marks.
26
27
5-233 K124sm5eH
19. Similarly loosen 2 pieces of screw (28) on the right and rotate the Block 2 (29) as the
arrow marks.
28
29
20. Remove Photoconductive Drum (30), and replace it with the new one.
30
NOTE
The Aluminium Block (27) and (29) maintain the focus of the LED Head.
Therefore it is necessary to re-position them correctly after replacing the Photoconductive
Drum.
Please fix them making reference to [5.5.2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks] on page
5-235.
5-234 K124sm5eH
5. 5. 2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks
There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft.
As they maintain the focus of LED Head, it is necessary to re-position them correctly after
replacing the Photoconductive Drum.
Aluminium Blocks
Print out the Test Pattern No.3 to check if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at the correct position.
The density of halftone is uniform as the following left image if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at
the correct positions (focus is good).
But the density of halftone is different among image blocks as the following right image if blocks
are not fixed correctly (focus is not good).
Good No good
(Gray looks uniform) (Gray looks not uniform)
Density of halftone is different

among image blocks.
If the focus of LED Head is not good, fix the Aluminium Blocks properly making reference to the
next page.
5-235 K124sm5eH
There are Aluminium Blocks (A) (B) at both sides, and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (C) (D).
A B
D D
C C
Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly.
a) Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left (A) first and then right (B).
b) When you tighten 2 screws (C) (D) to fix each Aluminium Block, always tighten the lower one
(C) first and then the upper one (D).
The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. Tighten in the order as 1 to 4
necessarily.
2 4
Drum
1 3
Left side Aluminium Blocks Right side
NOTE
The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements.
Refer to the later pages for greater details.
Using Drum Block Fix Tool (P/N Z168580040) is recommended.
5-236 K124sm5eH
5. 5. 2. 1 Fixing Block with Drum Block Fix Tool
1. Rotate the left Block (1) fully to the arrow direction (A: to front) and also press it to the arrow
direction (B: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (1) and the side frame of the
machine.
With holding Block (1), tighten the screws (2) (3) just enough turn to fix Block (1) temporarily.
A
B A 1
no gap 3
1
(Seen from the top of machine) (Seen from the outside of machine)
NOTE
There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape opening.
The LED focus will become defective if there is any space.
Correct Incorrect
(Seen from the top of machine)

Space
5-237 K124sm5eH
2. Loosen the screws (2) (3) in a (approximately)
quarter turn to release Block (1). Check that no
1
excessive backlash to sideways appears.
3. Similarly to step 1, rotate the right Block (4) fully to the arrow direction (C: to front) and also
press it to the arrow direction (D: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (4) and
the side frame of the machine.
C C
4
D
no gap
5
4. Loosen the screws (5) (6) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (4). Check that no
5-238 K124sm5eH
5. On the left side, hook Drum Block Fix Tool (7) on between the pin (8) on the frame and the U-
shape opening (9) of Block (1).
Hook the rear hook (10) the rim of the U-shape opening (9) and the front hook (11) in the groove
of the pin (8).
7 9
11 10
NOTE
(1) Handle Drum Block Fix Tool with care. Be sure not to damage Drum or any other
components when removing/attaching it.
(2) Set the rear hook (10) against the corner rim of U-shape opening (9).
5-239 K124sm5eH
6. With pressing Block (1) down (E), slightly turn Block to the arrow direction (F) and release it to
locate Block correctly by restoring spring.
7. Tighten the lower screw (2) and then the upper screw (3) to secure Block (1).
1
5-240 K124sm5eH
8. Similarly to step 5, on the right side, hook Drum Block Fix Tool (7) on between the pin (12) on
the frame and the U-shape opening (13) of Block (4).
13
12
NOTE
13
(3) Set the front hook (11) against the step on the pin (12).
12
12
5-241 K124sm5eH
9. Similarly to step 6, with pressing Block (4) down (G), slightly turn Block to the arrow direction (H)
and release it to locate Block correctly by restoring spring.
10. Tighten the lower screw (5) and then the upper screw (6) to secure Block (4).
11. Remove Drum Block Fix Tool. Replace all the parts in position and turn on the machine.
12. Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.
If it is still not uniform, fix Blocks again.
Good No good
NOTE
Only reseating Drum may lose LED Head focus on rare occasion even Blocks have been
fixed properly. in such case please refer to [5.6.2.3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers] on
page 5-274.
5-242 K124sm5eH
5. 5. 2. 2 Fixing Block by hand (w/o Drum Block Fix Tool)
machine.
A
B A 1
no gap 3
1
NOTE
Correct Incorrect

Space

1
5-243 K124sm5eH
3. Put your finger inside the U-shape opening (4) of Block (1). Put the other finger on the pin (5) of
the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (C: inside). Note that the entire Block (1) is shifted towards
the pin (5) by the finger at the U-shape opening (4).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (2) and then the upper screw (3) to secure
Block (1).
1
4
4
5
5
5-244 K124sm5eH
4. Similarly to step 1, rotate the right Block (6) fully to the arrow direction (D: to front) and also
press it to the arrow direction (E: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (6) and
D D
6
E
no gap
7
5. Loosen the screws (7) (8) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (6). Check that no
5-245 K124sm5eH
6. Similarly to step 3, put your finger inside the U-shape opening (9) of Block (6) and put the other
finger on the pin (10) of the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (F: inside). Note that the entire Block (6) is shifted towards
the pin (10) by the finger at the U-shape opening (9).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (7) and then the upper screw (8) to secure
Block (6).
9 9
10
10
7. Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.
Good No good
5-246 K124sm5eH
5. 5. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum
1. Remove the Photoconductive Drum from the

machine making reference to [5. 5. 1 Replacement
of the Photoconductive Drum] on the page 5-227.
2. Wipe the surface of Photoconductive Drum with a dry cloth.
3. If the toner strongly sticks on the surface and it is impossible to remove it, wipe with the cloth
impregnated with the alcohol.
4. After using the alcohol, wipe all surface of Drum with a cloth impregnated with water so that
there should be no unevenness of cleaning.
5. Wipe all surface of Drum with a dry cloth, and dry the Drum leaving in a dark place for about
10 minutes.
6. Put back the Drum to the machine.
NOTE
(1) A defective image may be printed right after the cleaning (about 10 to 20 sheets of A0),
but it will be fixed naturally as the time passes.
(2) Wipe the surface always to one direction.

You will damage the Drum if you wipe in other ways.
Good
No good No good No good
5-247 K124sm5eH
5. 5. 4 Replacement of Belt 4
2
2
3. Remove Belt 4 (4).
NOTE
Belt 4 is automatically unfastened if only you open the Engine Unit.
5-248 K124sm5eH
5. 6 LED Head
5. 6. 1 Replacement of the LED Head Unit
2
2
3
3
5-249 K124sm5eI
4
4
6
5

7
5-250 K124sm5eI
8
9
8

11
10
NOTE
12
5-251 K124sm5eI
13
13
14 14

15
16
17
5-252 K124sm5eI
18
NOTE
19

5-253 K124sm5eI
15. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right.
20 21
NOTE
You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly, because it is
a part required only before the delivery of machine.
16. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make the Plate (23) enough movable.
23
22
22
NOTE
Be careful not to damage/deform/stretch Leaf Spring 2 (24).
Doing so may damage LED Head Unit.
24
5-254 K124sm5eI
17. Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (25) of Corona Block.
Then remove the Image Corona Unit (26).
26
23
26 25
26
27
5-255 K124sm5eI
19. Remove the screw (28) to remove the Bracket 2 (29).
28
29
20. Move the right end of LED Head (30) a little to the front side, and then slide the whole unit
to the right.
Replace LED Head Unit (30) with the new one.
30
30
NOTE
It is necessary to check and adjust the focus of LED Head after its replacement.
Refer to [5. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment] on the next page.
5-256 K124sm5eI
5. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment
Please adjust the focus of LED Head after the replacement of LED Head.
Also adjust it if you have lost the correct focus by some reason.
Adjust the focus by the following 3 steps.

(1) Check of the Test Pattern Image
(2) Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks
(3) Focus Adjustment with Spacers
5. 6. 2. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image

Print out the Test Pattern No.3 in the Service Mode, and check its halftone image.
If the density of halftone is uniform as the following left image, you do not have to make anything
because the focus is correctly adjusted.
But it is different among image blocks as the following right image, it is necessary to adjust the
focus.
Go to [5. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks] on the next page in this case.
Good No good
(Adjustment is required.)
Density of halftone is different

among image blocks.
5-257 K124sm5eI
5. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks
There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum, which adjust the distance between LED
Head and Drum. If the LED focus is not correct, at first it is necessary to place them at the correct
positions in the following way.
NOTE
Using Drum Block Fix Tool is recommended.
Drum Block Fix Tool
Z168580040
Blocks can be fix properly without Drum Block Fix
Tool, in such case please follow the later step 23
for further information.
2
2
5-258 K124sm5eI
3
3

4
4
6
5
5-259 K124sm5eI
7
8
9
8

11
10
NOTE
5-260 K124sm5eI
12
13
13
14 14

15
5-261 K124sm5eI
16
17
5-262 K124sm5eI
18
NOTE
19

20
5-263 K124sm5eI
16. Remove 1 tooth washer screw (21: M4x8), and remove Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23).
21
22
22
23
NOTE
(1) Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed with Engine
Unit open.
It will be strained with Engine Unit closed.
24
(2) The tooth washer screw (21) has a tooth

washer of which burr face meets the burr face
composition surface.
5-264 K124sm5eI
17. There are Aluminium Block (25: left) (26: right) and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (27).
25 26
27 27
27 27
Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly.
a) Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left (25) first and then right (26).
b) When you tighten 2 screws (C) (D) to fix each Aluminium Block, always tighten the lower one
(C) first and then the upper one (D).
The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. Tighten in the order as 1 to 4
necessarily.
2 4
Drum
1 3
Left side Aluminium Blocks Right side
NOTE
The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements.
Refer to the later pages for greater details.
5-265 K124sm5eI
machine.
With holding Block (25), tighten the screws (28) (29) just enough turn to fix Block (25)
temporarily.
A
B A 25
no gap 29
28
25
NOTE
Correct Incorrect

Space
5-266 K124sm5eI
25
29
28
20. Similarly to step 18, rotate the right Block (26) fully to the arrow direction (C: to front) and also
press it to the arrow direction (D: to outside). This will remove any gap between Block (26) and
With holding Block (26), tighten the screws (30) (31) just enough turn to fix Block (26)
temporarily.
C C
D
26
31
no gap
30
26
21. Loosen the screws (30) (31) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (4). Check that
no excessive backlash to sideways appears.
26
31
30
5-267 K124sm5eI
22. Fix Blocks with Drum Block Fix Tool (or by hand). Go to step 22-1 for using Drum Block Fix
Tool. Go to step 23 for without Drum Block Fix Tool.
22-1. On the left side, hook Drum Block Fix Tool (32) on between the pin (33) on the frame and the
U-shape opening (34) of Block (25).
Hook the rear hook (35) the rim of the U-shape opening (34) and the front hook (36) in the
groove of the pin (33).
32 34
33
36 35
32
34
33
NOTE
34
5-268 K124sm5eI
22-2. With pressing Block (25) down (E), slightly turn Block to the arrow direction (F) and release it
to locate Block correctly by restoring spring.
22-3. Tighten the lower screw (28) and then the upper screw (29) to secure Block (25).
25
29
28
5-269 K124sm5eI
22-4. Similarly to step 22-2, on the right side, hook Drum Block Fix Tool (32) on between the pin
(37) on the frame and the U-shape opening (38) of Block (26).
32
38
37
NOTE
38
(3) Set the front hook (36) against the step on the pin (37).
37
37
5-270 K124sm5eI
22-5. Similarly to step 22-2, with pressing Block (26) down (G), slightly turn Block to the arrow
direction (H) and release it to locate Block correctly by restoring spring.
22-6. Tighten the lower screw (30) and then the upper screw (31) to secure Block (26).
26
31
30
22-7. Remove Drum Block Fix Tool. Replace all the parts in position.
22-8. Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.
Good No good
If it is still not uniform although you have fixed the Aluminium Blocks correctly, it is necessary
to make focus adjustment with Spacers.
Go to [5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers].
5-271 K124sm5eI
23. Follow the instruction below to fix Blocks without Drum Block Fix Tool.
23-1. Put your finger inside the U-shape opening (32) of Block (25). Put the other finger on the pin
(33) of the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (C: inside). Note that the entire Block (25) is shifted
towards the pin (33) by the finger at the U-shape opening (32).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (28) and then the upper screw (29) to
secure Block (25).
25
32
32
33
33
25
29
28
5-272 K124sm5eI
23-2. Similarly to step 23-1, put your finger inside the U-shape opening (34) of Block (26) and put
the other finger on the pin (35) of the frame.
Push the fingers toward each other (D: inside). Note that the entire Block (26) is shifted
towards the pin (35) by the finger at the U-shape opening (34).
While pushing and holding, tighten the lower screw (30) and then the upper screw (31) to
secure Block (26).
34 34
26
35
35
26
31
30
23-3. Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.
Good No good
If it is still not uniform although you have fixed the Aluminium Blocks correctly, it is necessary
to make focus adjustment with Spacers.
Go to [5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers].
5-273 K124sm5eI
5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers
There may be the case that the focus of LED is not correct even if you have placed the Aluminium
Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft correctly.
This is because the height of the LED is mechanically different between left and right by some
reason.
In this case adjust the height by adding or removing the Spacers.

1
5-274 K124sm5eI
5
NOTE
7
7
8 8
5-275 K124sm5eI
9
10
11
5-276 K124sm5eI
12
NOTE
13

5-277 K124sm5eI
9. There are Spacers (14) on each Aluminium Block at both sides.
The height of the LED Head can be adjusted by adding more Spacer or removing some of
them.
Remove the screw (15), and remove all Spacers (14) at first.
And then adjust the height of LED Head adding or removing the Spacers (14).
14 15
14
14
NOTE
(1) The number of Spacers initially installed is individually different machine to machine.
(2) There are 3 kinds of spacers such as “0.1mm”, “0.08mm” and “0.05mm” in thickness.
Please find the best combination by making several times of trial.
(3) Basically thinner Spacers (0.08mm &

0.05mm ones) must be held between the 0.08mm & 0.05mm
0.1mm Spacer as the right picture.
0.1mm
5-278 K124sm5eI
NOTE
(4) It is quite not clear which of “addition” or “removal” of Spacer is effective to solve the
focus problem.
(Even if the defective image caused by the focus problem looks same, for example, it is
fixed by “addition” in some case but in another case it is fixed by “removal”.
Only the way to find the best focus is just “trial”.

Please try both “removal” and “addition” to find which way the image becomes better.
After finding the better way, try several combinations of Spacers to find the best height.
Removal of Spacer Addition of Spacer

(Worse result) (Better result)
“Addition of Spacer” is the better way.
Try several combinations of Spacers by adding the Spacers gradually.
5-279 K124sm5eI
5. 7 Image Corona
5. 7. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit
2
2
3
3
5-280 K124sm5eJ
4
4
6
5

7
5-281 K124sm5eJ
8
9
8

11
10
NOTE
12
5-282 K124sm5eJ
13
13
14 14

15
16
17
5-283 K124sm5eJ
18
NOTE
19

5-284 K124sm5eJ
15. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right.
20 21
NOTE
You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly, because it is
a part required only before the delivery of machine.
16. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make the Plate (23) enough movable.
23
22
22
NOTE
Be careful not to damage/deform/stretch Leaf Spring 2 (24).
Doing so may damage LED Head Unit.
24
5-285 K124sm5eJ
17. Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (25) of Corona Block.
Then remove the Image Corona Unit (26).
26
23
26 25
26
5-286 K124sm5eJ
5. 7. 2 Replacement of the Corona Wire
NOTE
A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended.
Item Number Remarks
of article
Corona Wire (1) Assy 1 All of these parts are contained in
Spring 2 1 “Corona Wire Kit” (Z160980200)
1. Remove the Image Corona Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 7. 1 Removal of
the Image Corona Unit] on the page 5-280.
1
1
2. Loosen the Set Screw (2) with hexagon wrench.

The Block 3 (3) moves to the arrow mark and the Grid Plate is unfastened.
5-287 K124sm5eJ
NOTE
Check the following when reassembling.
(1) The side edge of Block 3 (3) should stop at 0.5mm short of the side face (4) of the corona
block for a proper tension.
Rotate a hexagon wrench in either direction with pressing down Grid Plate (5).
0.5mm 0.5mm
press down
5 3
5 3 4
(2) Carry Image Corona Unit (1) by both corona blocks so that Grid Plate (5) faces the floor.
Make sure that Grid Plate (5) has no excess slack (in less than 1mm) on the middle of the
housing.
1
1
Correct: no slack in Grid Plate
Incorrect: slack in Grid Plate
5-288 K124sm5eJ
3. Remove the Grid Plate (5).
5
NOTE
If Grid Plate is dirty, wash it with the neutral detergent and then with water. Dry it well after
washing.
4. Loosen 3 pieces of 3x6 screw (6), and then remove Corona Housing (7) and Plate
Electrode (8).
5-289 K124sm5eJ
5. Remove the Flush Head Screw (9), and remove each Cover (10) and Cover 2 (11).
9 9
10
11
6. Loosen the screws (12) to lower the Height Adjuster.

(It becomes easy to remove the Corona Wire as it is unfastened by this treatment.)
12 12
5-290 K124sm5eJ
7. Remove Spring 2 (13) and Corona Wire 1 Assy (14).
Replace Spring 2 (13) and Corona Wire 1 Assy (14) with new ones.
14
13
NOTE
(1) Please keep 11mm between Corona
Wire (14) and bottom plate of the Corona Unit
after the replacement.
11mm
(2) Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of Height 15 16

Adjuster (15).
Also fit the beads (16) into the correct
positions.
5-291 K124sm5eJ
5. 8 Transfer / Separation Corona
5. 8. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona

2. Holding both Corona Blocks (2: white plastic), remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (3)
from the machine.
2 2
NOTE
There is the Drum above the Transfer / Separation Corona.
Do not touch it.
5-292 K124sm5eK
5. 8. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires
NOTE
A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended.
Item Number Remarks
of article
Corona Wire 2 All of these parts are contained in
Wire Spring 4 “Corona Wire Kit” (Z160980200)
1. Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) 1

Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-292.
2. There are 5 pieces of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) on the housing.
Remove them pressing the stoppers (4) with such tool as a screwdriver.
4 2 3
NOTE
Do not replace the position of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) at the time of
reassembly.
5-293 K124sm5eK
3. Remove both Covers 3 (5) (6) pulling their sides outward.
5 6
5-294 K124sm5eK
4. Remove 4 pieces of Wire Springs (7) and Corona Wires (8).
Replace Wire Springs (7) and Corona Wires (8) with new ones.
8 8
NOTE
(1) Do not touch the wire part. Pinch the hook part of both ends to handle Corona Wire.
(2) Keep 11mm distance (height) between each Corona Wire and bottom plate of the
housing.
To adjust the distance, rotate the screws (9)

with a flathead screwdriver.
(3) Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of Height

Adjuster (10).
Also fit the beads (11) into the correct
positions.
10
11
5-295 K124sm5eK
5. 9 Engine Frame
5. 9. 1 Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and

Developer Press Sensor (PH4)
2. Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free.
2
2
3
3
5-296 K124sm5eK
3. There are Pins (4) at both sides.
Slide them inside to remove the Cover 4 (1).
4
4
6 6
5-297 K124sm5eK
6. Close the Bypass Feeder, and then open the Developer Press Unit (7).
7. Disconnect the connector (8) and remove 3 pieces of screw (9), and remove the DC Motor (10).
Replace DC Motor (10) with the new one.
10
5-298 K124sm5eK
8. Remove the 4x6 screw (11), release the harness from the Edge Saddle (12), and disconnect
the connector (13).
12
11
13
9. Pressing the stoppers (14) with such tool as a screwdriver, remove Developer Press Sensor (15).
Replace Developer Press Sensor (15) with the new one.
15
14
5-299 K124sm5eK
5. 9. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) &
Registration Sensor (PH1)
1. Remove the Developer Unit from the machine making reference to [5. 2. 1 Removal of the
2. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (1), and then turn over the Bracket 11 (2).
2
1
5-300 K124sm5eK
3. Remove the screw (3) and disconnect the connector (4) to remove each Sensor (5 : Manual
Set Sensor or Registration Sensor).
Replace Sensor (5) with the new one.
3
5
4 5
5-301 K124sm5eK
5. 9. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5, BL6)
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 3. 1 Removal of the
2. Disconnect the connector (2), remove 2 screws (3), and remove each Fan (4) with the bracket.
Remove 2 screws from the bracket and replace Fan(BL5 / BL6) with the new one.
5-302 K124sm5eK
5. 9. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3, BL4)
2. Open the Cover Assembly (3).
3. Moving the stopper levers (4) to the inside, remove each Duct 5 (5) with Filter 4.
5-303 K124sm5eK
4. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (6), and then slide the Duct 6 (7) to the left.
7
6 7

8
6. Remove the Blower (9 : BL3 & BL4) moving as the following photos.
5-304 K124sm5eK
5. 10 Inner Transport Unit
5. 10. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 3. 1 Removal of the
3. Disconnect the connector on the left (3), and then remove Inner Transport Unit (4).
5-305 K124sm5eK
5. 10. 2 Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt
1. Remove the Inner Transport Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.10. 1 Removal
of the Inner Transport Unit] on the page 5-305.
1 1
2. Tuck the rim of Belts (2) under the tab of Guide Plate (3)
3. Remove 7 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) to remove Guide Plate (5).

4
5
5-306 K124sm5eK
4. Remove 1 screw (6) and the harness (7) to release the sensor bracket (8).
Remove Sensor (9) from the bracket (8) and replace Sensor with a new one.
7
6 8
5. Remove Retaining Ring-E (10) to remove Gear (11) and Parallel Pin (12).
11 12
10
6. Remove Retaining Ring-E in the middle (13) to release Bearing (14).
14
13
5-307 K124sm5eK
7. Release Shaft 3 (15: shorter) to remove Shaft 2 (16: longer) from the unit.
Remove and replace Belt (17) with new ones.
15
16 16
17
NOTE
Be careful of the outside/inside of the Belt (17).
The smooth and shiny side of it should be inside.
Outside Inside
5-308 K124sm5eK
5. 11 Main Frame
5. 11. 1 Replacement of DC Motors (M1, M2),

Belt 8, Belt 9, Belt 7
2
2
5-309 K124sm5eL
3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (4), loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (5), and then remove the
Cover 15 (6).
4. Remove 5 screws (7) to remove Case 5 (8).
5-310 K124sm5eL
6. Loosen the 4x6 screw (10). Move the Pulley 3 (11) toward the arrow mark and secure it to
slacken Belt 8 (12).
11
10 12
NOTE
To adjust the tension of the Belt 8, do as follows.
If you do not make the following works, Belt 8 may slip because the tension is not
correct.
a) Replace Bracket (13) before tensioning.
b) Giving the spring tension to the Belt 8, 13

tighten the screw (10) of Pulley 3 (11).
10
c) Turn on the machine, and then turn it off some seconds later.
The Belt 8 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this
time.
d) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3.

The slack of Belt 8 generated by the above c) is removed because the Tension
Spring pulls the Pulley 3.
Then tighten the screw again.
5-311 K124sm5eL
7. Remove 2 screws (14), Grip Ring and Bearing (15) to remove Bracket (13).
Replace Belt 8 (12: 90S3M756) with the new one.
14
13 15
14
12
5-312 K124sm5eL
8. Loosen 2 screws (16). Move the Pulley (17) (18) toward the arrow mark and secure them to
slacken Belt 9 (19) and Belt 7 (20).
17 18
19
20
16 16
NOTE
To adjust the tension of the Belt 9 and Belt 7, do as follows.
If you do not make the following works, the belts may slip because the tension is not
correct.
b) Giving the spring tension to the belt, tighten 21

the screw (16) of each Pulley.
16 16
The belts are driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley at this
time.
d) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley.

The slack of the belts generated by the above c) is removed because the Tension
Spring pulls the Pulley.
5-313 K124sm5eL
Remove and replace Belt 9 (19: 90S3M576) and Belt 7 (20: 90S3M699) with new ones.
22 22
23
22
23
21
19 20
5-314 K124sm5eL
10. Remove 7 pieces of 4x10 screw (24) to remove the Plate 6 Assembly (25).
24
24
25
NOTE
When reassembling, do not bump DC Motor (26) and its PCB on the frame rim.
Do not hit here

26
26
5-315 K124sm5eL
11. Remove Set Screws (27) on the side surface to remove each Pulley 4 (28).
27
28
NOTE
The tip of the motor shaft should be aligned with the outside surface of Pulley 4.
not sticked out
12. Remove 4 pieces of 4x10 screws (29) to remove DC Motor (30: Main) (31: Fuser).
Replace DC Motor (30) (31) with a new one.
29 31 29 30
30 31
29 29
5-316 K124sm5eL
5. 11. 2 Replacement of Clutch (CL1)
2
2
5-317 K124sm5eL
3. Loosen the 4x6 screw (4), move the Pulley 3 (5) toward the arrow mark and secure it to
slacken Belt 8 (6).
4 6
NOTE
To adjust the tension of the Belt 8, do as follows.
If you do not make the following works, Belt 8 may slip because the tension is not
correct.
b) Giving the spring tension to the Belt 8, 7

tighten the screw (4) of Pulley 3 (5).
The Belt 8 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this
time.
d) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3.

The slack of Belt 8 generated by the above c) is removed because the Tension
Spring pulls the Pulley 3.
5-318 K124sm5eL
Remove Belt 8 (6).
7 9
5-319 K124sm5eL
5. Remove the Hex. Cap Screw (10) to remove
the Pulley 13 (11).
10
11
6. Disconnect the connector (12), and remove the 4x6 screw (13) to remove Bracket Clutch (14),
Clutch (15).
Replace Clutch (15) with the new one.
13
12
14
15
5-320 K124sm5eL
5. 11. 3 Replacement of Blower (BL7)
Cover 15 (3).
2. Remove 5 screws (4) to remove Case 5 (5).
3. Disconnect the connector (6), remove 1 screw (7), and then remove the Bracket Blower (8).
Remove 3 screws (9) to replace Blower (10) with the new one.
6
9
10
5-321 K124sm5eL
5. 11. 4 Replacement of Fan (BL8)
Cover 15 (3).
2. Disconnect the connector (4), remove 1 screw (5), and then remove the Fan Bracket (6).
Remove 4 screws (7) and 1 connector (8) to replace Fan (9) with a new one.
7
4 8
5-322 K124sm5eL
5. 12 Scanner Unit (Old Scanner)
5. 12. 1 Removal of Scanner Unit
1. Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1).

1
2. Remove 8 pieces of screws (2).
2 2
5-323 K124sm5eM
5. Remove Shield Cover N (5).
6. Remove 2 tooth washer screws (6) to remove Cover 10 (7)

7
6
6
5-324 K124sm5eM
7. Pull up Lever 2 (8) to open the Engine Unit.
8
8
9
9
10
5-325 K124sm5eM
11
11
12
13
13
13
12 12
12. Remove 4 screws (14) to remove Cover (15).
15
14
15
14
14
13. Loosen 4 screws (16) and remove 4 screws (17) to remove Cover 15 (18).
17 17 17
17
18
16
16 16
16
5-326 K124sm5eM
14. Disconnect the Scanner USB Cable (19: with the label “SC”) from the upper right USB port of IPS.
19
15. Open 3 wire saddles (21) to release the Scanner USB Cable (19).
19
21
16. On the right side, open 3 wire saddles (22) to release the Scanner USB Cable (19).
19
22
22
19
5-327 K124sm5eM
17. Disconnect the connector (23). Open the wire saddles (24) to release the Scanner USB Cable (19).
24
23
19
19
24
NOTE
Wind excessive length of the Scanner USB Cable
(19) with the wire saddles (24) when
reassembling.
19
NOTE
Be sure to close the Engine Unit before removing the screws which fix the Scanner Unit.
Otherwise the Scanner Unit may fall down and damage.
5-328 K124sm5eM
19. Remove 4 screws (25) which fix the Scanner Unit.
(Right side) (Left side)
25
25
19. Remove the Scanner Unit (26) from the machine.

26
26
CAUTION
Please carry the Scanner Unit by 2 persons as it is heavy.
5-329 K124sm5eM
5. 12. 2 Replacement of Belt
1. Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine

making reference to [5.12. 1 Removal of the
Scanner Unit] on the page 5-323.
2. Pull up the Levers (2) and open Upper Unit.
3. Loosen 1 screw (3) to slide the stopper (4) and remove Spring (5) to remove Belt (6).
Replace Belt with a new one.
4
4
5
6
6
4
5-329 K124sm5eN
NOTE
Belt (5) requires its tensioning when reassembling.
(1) Be sure to close Upper Unit prior to tensioning.

Not doing so may prevent a proper tensioning.
Press down Upper Unit on both sides to close

it. Pressing only on one side may result in
twisting the frame.
(2) Place Belt (6) in the original routing position.

(No tension is applied to Belt at this time.)
(3) Replace Spring (5) in the original position.

(A proper tension is applied to Belt.)
(4) Move the stopper (4) to the arrow direction

until it stops against Spring Hook (7).
Tighten the screw (3) to secure the stopper (4).
3
7 4
5-330 K124sm5eN
5. 12. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy

5
6
6
4
5-331 K124sm5eN
NOTE


twisting the frame.



3
7 4
5-332 K124sm5eN
4. Remove 2 screws (8: M3x6) and 4 screws (9: M3x6 w/ FW) to remove Sheet Guide (10).
10
5. Disconnect the harness (11) from Motor Assy (12).

12
11
6. Remove 2 screws (13) to remove Motor Assembly (12).

Replace Motor Assembly with a new one.
13
12
5-333 K124sm5eN
5. 12. 4 Replacement of Feed Roller

5
6
6
4
5-334 K124sm5eN
NOTE


twisting the frame.



3
7 4
5-335 K124sm5eN
4. Remove 2 screws (8: M3x6) and 4 screws (9: M3x6 w/ FW) to remove Sheet Guide (10).
10
5. Remove 1 screw (11) to remove Stay (12). Open Upper Unit fully.
12
11
5-336 K124sm5eN
6. Remove 7 screws (13). Release the black plastic sheets (14) from the frame to remove Press
Roller Assy (15).
13 13
14 14
15
15
NOTE
When reassembling, make sure that the 3 black plastic sheets on the rear of Press Roller
Assy (16) are in position. Do not flip them up.
16
16
16
Correct: black sheet in position Wrong: flipping up
5-337 K124sm5eN
7. On the left side, remove Retaining Ring-E (17), Set Screw (18) to remove Pulley (19) (20),
Spacer (21), Bearing (22) from each roller shaft.
18
17
22
21
20
19
5-338 K124sm5eN
8. On the right side, remove Retaining Ring-E (23) to remove Washer (24), Bearing (25) from each
roller shaft.
23
25
24
5-339 K124sm5eN
9. Pressing Press Assys (26) down, slide Feed Roller F (27: front) and Feed Roller R (28: rear) to
the motor side and remove it.
Replace Feed Roller F / Feed Roller R with a new one.
27
26
28
26
28
27
5-340 K124sm5eN
NOTE
(1) The longer thin end of Feed Rollers should be placed at the left.
28 28
27 27
Left Right
(2) Feed Roller F (27) and Feed Roller R (28) are

not interchangeable. 28: 2 bands
The 2 rollers have different rubber belt
pattern. 40
27: 4 bands
(3) Use alcohol. Do not use water for cleaning Feed Rollers.
10. Replace all the parts in position.
11. Install Scanner Unit to the machine. Connect the USB cable of Scanner Unit to your PC.
12. Perform Feed Distance adjustment.
NOTE
Replacement of Feed Rollers requires Feed Distance adjustment.
Refer to [8. 13 Scanner Utility] for adjustment.
5-341 K124sm5eN
5. 12. 5 Replacement of Pinch Roller Assy

2. Remove Retaining Ring-E (2) from the shaft of Pinch Roller.
5-342 K124sm5eO
NOTE
For replacement of Pinch Rollers beneath (or near) SVC Main BD K, remove Retaining Ring-
E for the concerning Pinch Roller (shown below) after removing SVC Main BD K.
(1) Remove all the connectors (3) from SVC Main BD K (4).
3 3 3 3
4
3
(2) Remove 6 screws (5) to remove SVC Main BD K (4).
5
4
55
5-343 K124sm5eO
3. Pull up the Levers (6) and open Upper Unit slightly.
Put your hand in between Upper and Lower Unit and hold the Pinch Roller Assy (7) not to fall its
Spring (8) inside Upper Unit.
Remove Pinch Roller Assy (7) and Spring (8).
Replace Pinch Roller Assy with a new one.
8
8
7
7
5-344 K124sm5eO
5. 12. 6 Replacement of CIS
NOTE
A CIS is divided into several classes according to wavelength variations of their LED.
All the 5 pieces of CIS on a certain scanner should be the same class to assure even image
quality (brightness, color quality and etc) among image blocks.
Be sure to check which CIS class is used to the scanner before replacing to avoid class
mixing. Otherwise even image quality can not be expected.
Equipped CIS class can be identified on the label on the CIS unit, and can be checked with
the label on the rear of the scanner.
Label

5-345 K124sm5eO
2. Open the Scanner Upper Unit.
On a CIS to be replaced, remove 2 small screws (2) with a sharp screwdriver.
3. Remove all the connectors (3) from SVC Main BD K (3).
4
3
3 3 3 3
3 3
3
5-346 K124sm5eO
4. Remove 6 screws (5) to Remove SVC Main BD K (4).
5 5 5
4
4
5 5 5
5. On all CIS Boards (6), remove 2 harnesses (7)

6
6 7
6. Remove 4 screws (8) and the harness to remove Switch Bracket R / L (9).
8 8
9 9
9
9
5-347 K124sm5eO
7. Remove 9 screws (10, M3x6) and 2 screws (11, M4x6).
10
10
11 10 10 11
10 10
8. Open 4 wire saddles (12) to release the harnesses. 12
12
5-348 K124sm5eO
9. Remove the Base Plate (13).
13 13
10. Remove 4 screws (14, M3x4 w/ TW) to remove the concerning CIS Bracket (15).
14 front
15
14 15
front
NOTE
Place CIS Bracket on a soft cloth or anything to 17
avoid damage on the Scan Glass Assy (16).
If you remove the Scan Glass Assy just in case,

still you should prepare such to avoid damage
on the sensor array of the CIS (17).
16
5-349 K124sm5eO
11. Remove 2 screws (18) to release CIS Board (19).
Carefully remove the flat cable (20) from CIS.
front
18
19 20
front
19
20
NOTE
When reassembling, gently insert Flat Cable (20) all the way in the terminal on the CIS.
Inserting incorrectly would lead abnormal scan image.
FRAGILE. Handle Flat Cable with great care.
5-350 K124sm5eO
12. Remove 6 screws (21: M3x4 w/ SW) and 2 screws (22: M3x4) disassemble the CIS Unit.
- upper bracket (23)
- small spacer (24)
- CIS (17)
- lower bracket with Scan Glass Assy (16)
front
21
21
front
22 21
21 21
23
24
17
16
13. Replace CIS with a new one.
14. Return all the parts in position.
15. Perform the scanner calibration. See [8.13.4 Scanner Utility].

This is a must!
Shading Sheet Stitch Adjustment Chart
5-351 K124sm5eO
5. 12. 7 Replacement of Scan Glass Assy
Reference
Dismounting Scanner Unit is not mandatory to remove Scan Glass Assy.
1. Open the Scanner Upper Unit.

Remove 4 screws (1) to remove Scan Glass Assy.
1
1
5-352 K124sm5eO
5. 13 Scanner Unit (New Scanner)
5. 13. 1 Removal of Scanner Unit

1. Remove 2 pieces of Exit Tray (1) and
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
3. Remove the Top Cover (3).
NOTE
It is necessary to install under the condition to
Closing “Upper Unit” when installing “Top Cover”.
5-353 K124sm5eO
4
4
6
6
5-354 K124sm5eO
7. Remove the Cover 2 (8).
9. Loosen 1 screw (10).

Remove 2 screws (11) to remove the Cover 8 (12).
12
10 11

Remove 2 screws (14) to remove the Cover (15).
15
13 14
5-355 K124sm5eO
11. Loosen 4 screws (16) and remove 4 screws (17) to remove the Cover 15 (18).
17 17 17
17
18
16
16 16
16
12. Disconnect the Scanner USB Cable (19: with the label “SC”) from the upper right USB port of IPS.
19
13. Open 3 wire saddles (21) to release the Scanner USB Cable (19).
19
21
14. On the right side, open 3 wire saddles (22) to release the Scanner USB Cable (19).
19
22
22
19
5-356 K124sm5eO
15. Disconnect the connector (23). Open the wire saddles (24) to release the Scanner USB Cable (19).
24
23
19
NOTE
Be sure to close the Engine Unit before removing the screws which fix the Scanner Unit.
Otherwise the Scanner Unit may fall down and damage.
5-357 K124sm5eO
17. Remove 4 screws (25) which fix the Scanner Unit.
(Front side)
25 25
(Rear side)
25 25
18. Remove the Scanner Unit (26) from the machine.
26
CAUTION
Please carry the Scanner Unit by 2 persons as it is heavy.
5-358 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 2 Replacement of Belt
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
NOTE
5-359 K124sm5eO
4. Remove 2 tooth washer screws (4) to remove the Cover 10 (5)
4
4
6
6

9

Remove 2 screws (11) to remove the Cover (12).
12
10 11
5-360 K124sm5eO
8. Remove the Spring (13).
13
9. Remove Screw (14) to remove the Tension Bracket (15).
15 14
10. Remove 3 screws to remove the Bracket (17).
16
17
11. Remove the Belt (18).

Replace the Belt with a new one.
18
5-361 K124sm5eO
NOTE
In order to apply right tension on the “Belt”, it is necessary to execute following procedure
before proceeding.
(1) Assemble until right photo.
(2) Disconnect the Motor Connector (19) of the main board and open the Upper Unit.
19
(3) Turn Pulley (20) in several revolutions

to the direction of the arrows.
20
(4) Once loosen “Screw (14)” and then re-tightenthe “Screw”.
Loosen Tighten
14
(5) Connect the Motor Connector.
5-362 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy

2. Remove 6 screws (2) to remove the SHEET GUIDE (3).
2
2 2
2 3
3. Remove the spring (4), and then remove the screw (5) to remove the tension bracket (6).
4 6 5
5-363 K124sm5eO
5. Move “Bracket (8)” to inside by pulling up “Scanner Unit”.
8 8
6. Disconnect connector (9).
5-364 K124sm5eO
7. Remove 2 screws (10) to remove Motor Assy (11).
Replace Motor Assy with new one.
10
11
5-365 K124sm5eO
NOTE
In order to apply right tension on the “Belt”, it is necessary to execute following procedure
before proceeding.
(1) Assemble until right photo.
(2) Disconnect the Motor Connector (12) of the main board and open the Upper Unit.
12
(3) Turn Pulley (13) in several revolutions

to the direction of the arrows.
13
(4) Once loosen “Screw (5)” and then re-tighten the “Screw”.
Loosen Tighten
(5) Connect the Motor Connector.
5-366 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 4 Replacing Sheet Roller (Platen)
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
NOTE
5-367 K124sm5eO
4
4
6
6

Remove 2 screws (9) to remove Cover 8 (10).
10
8 9
5-368 K124sm5eO
Remove 2 screws (12) to remove Cover (13).
13
11 12
10. Remove 1 screw (14) to remove Stopper Plate (15).
14
15
5-369 K124sm5eO
11. Remove 6 screws (16) to remove Sheet Guide (17).
16
16
16
17
16
18
5-370 K124sm5eO
13. Remove 4 screws (19) to remove Exit Guide (20)
19 19
20
14. Remove 1 screw (21) to remove Stopper (22).
21
22 21
5-371 K124sm5eO
23
23
23
16. Return Stopper (22) in position.
22
NOTE
During this procedure, it is possible to go down “Upper Unit” to backside and may possible
make damage on “Harness” and “Damper” during this procedure. So, it is necessary to
surely install “Stopper (22) and then proceed.
17. Open the Upper Unit
5-372 K124sm5eO
18. Lift up the front side of the Lower Unit Guide Plate (24) to escape from the rollers.
Pull and remove the Lower Unit Guide Plate (24) to the rear side.
24
front
24
24
rear
19. Open the Upper Unit.
5-373 K124sm5eO
20. Each Sheet Roller is set in a pair of the holders (25).
Remove 1 screw (26) on either side to remove the holder (25).
25 25
25
26
21. Pull and remove the Sheet Roller (27) from the other holder (25). Replace the Sheet Roller (27)
with a new one.
The white collars on both ends (28) of the Sheet Roller (27) should be reused.
27
28
27
5-374 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 5 Replacing Main Board (PW12920)
NOTE
After replacement, the Main Board requires importing a backup data.
You have to save the current backup data and shading data to utilize the spare Main
Board without any fail. Otherwise you will be requested to get the factory backup from the
manufacturer.

Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2

3
NOTE
5-375 K124sm5eO
4. Unlock all the 5 flat cable’s terminal socket (8), and
then gently remove 5 flat cables (9).
First: Unlock the socket.
Next: Remove the cable.

8
NOTE
(1) FRAGILE. Handle the flat cables with great care.
(2) For reassembling, first confirm that the terminal socket has been released. Next gently
insert the flat cable’s end to the terminal correctly.
Reassembling incorrectly would lead abnormal scan image, for example the concerning
area of the scanned image turns solid black.
5-376 K124sm5eO
5. Disconnect all the other cables (10), remove 4 screws (11) on every corner, and then replace
the Main Board (12) with a new one.
12
11 11
10 10
11 10 11
NOTE
After replacement, the Main Board requires importing backup data and Shading Adjustments.
5-377 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 6 Replacing CIS
NOTE
CIS Sensor is classified into classes according to wavelength variations of their LED.
All 5 pieces of CIS on a certain scanner should belong in the identical class to assure even
image quality (brightness, color quality and etc) among image blocks.
Be sure to check which CIS class is used to the scanner before replacing to avoid class
mixing. Otherwise even image quality cannot be expected.
Equipped CIS class can be checked with the label on CIS itself or the label at the rear of the
scanner.
CIS Class Label

Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
5-378 K124sm5eO
NOTE
3 It is necessary to install under the condition to
5
4
Reference
The Stopper Plate (5) is a safety to limit the motion range of the Upper Unit at “operation
position 40 degrees”. In this section, another safety at “service position 100 degrees” works.
5. Fully open the Upper Unit (6). The Upper Unit is now open at 100 degrees.
5-379 K124sm5eO
6. Remove 6 screws (7) to remove 3 Glass Holders (8).
As the Upper Unit is now open at 100 degrees, the Glass DCMNT (9) will stay without
supporting.
7
7
5-380 K124sm5eO
NOTE
(1) Keep in mind that there is no fixation on the Glass DCMNT at this point.
It may fall if you close the Upper Unit.
(2) For reassembling, first reinstall the Glass Holder at the center.
First return at the center.
(3) For reassembling, fit the 4 tab parts under the Upper Front Guide Plate (10).
10
tab tab tab tab
Fit in.
(4) For reassembling, first tighten the screw (7) on the right side.
right side first
5-381 K124sm5eO
7. Remove the Glass DCMNT (9).
NOTE
(1) The wider face with 5 stickers should be the inner face. (CIS side)
The narrower face should be the outer face. (document side)
Inner face (CIS side)
Outer face (document side)
(2) For reassembling, fit the glass’s

edge in the groove. 9
groove
(3) There are 5 portions of the white sticker (11) on the Glass DCMNT’s inner face.
This is for self calibration (white level).
For reassembling, 2-sticker row should correspond to the front CIS row as follows.
Document Path: Front / Glass Upright: Top
11: white sticker 11: white sticker
11: white sticker 11: white sticker 11: white sticker
Document Path: Rear / Glass Upright: Bottom
(4) For reassembling, press the Glass DCMNT against the left side.
5-382 K124sm5eO
8. Press the flat areas on both sides to pivot the CIS (12).
12 12
NOTE
(1) At this point, just release the CIS (12) from the CIS Holder. The CIS is still connected with
the flat cable (13). Never pull the CIS by force.
12
13
5-383 K124sm5eO
NOTE
(2) For reassembling, follow the instruction below.
1. Insert the flat cable (13) to the

CIS (12).
13 12
2. Return the CIS’s bottom to the

CIS Holder first.
Fit in bottom first.
3. Return the CIS’s top to the CIS

Holder until the Holder’s latch
surely catches the CIS. Next, top
5-384 K124sm5eO
NOTE
(3) For the flat cables, avoid skewing or half-insertion.
correct: fully inserted
incorrect: skewing incorrect: half-insertion
(4) For the flat cables, tuck the excess stretch under the CIS Holder.
incorrect correct
12. Carefully disconnect the flat cable (16).
13
NOTE
After replacement, the CIS requires Shading /
Stitch Adjustments.
5-385 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 7 Replacing Size Sensor & Jam Sensor
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
NOTE
5-386 K124sm5eO
5
4
Reference
The Stopper Plate (5) is a safety to limit the motion range of the Upper Unit at “operation
position 40 degrees”. In this section, another safety at “service position 100 degrees” works.
5. Fully open the Upper Unit (6). The Upper Unit is now open at 100 degrees.
5-387 K124sm5eO
6. Remove 6 screws (7) to remove 3 Glass Holders (8).
As the Upper Unit is now open at 100 degrees, the Glass DCMNT (9) will stay without
supporting.
7
7
5-388 K124sm5eO
NOTE
(1) Keep in mind that there is no fixation on the Glass DCMNT at this point.
It may fall if you close the Upper Unit.
(2) For reassembling, first reinstall the Glass Holder at the center.
First return at the center.
(3) For reassembling, fit the 4 tab parts under the Upper Front Guide Plate (10).
10
tab tab tab tab
Fit in.
(4) For reassembling, first tighten the screw (7) on the right side.
right side first
5-389 K124sm5eO
7. Remove the Glass DCMNT (9).
NOTE
(1) The wider face with 5 stickers should be the inner face. (CIS side)
The narrower face should be the outer face. (document side)
Inner face (CIS side)
Outer face (document side)
(2) For reassembling, fit the glass’s

edge in the groove. 9
groove
(3) There are 5 portions of the white sticker (11) on the Glass DCMNT’s inner face.
This is for self calibration (white level).
For reassembling, 2-sticker row should correspond to the front CIS row as follows.
Document Path: Front / Glass Upright: Top
11: white sticker 11: white sticker
11: white sticker 11: white sticker 11: white sticker
Document Path: Rear / Glass Upright: Bottom
(4) For reassembling, press the Glass DCMNT against the left side.
5-390 K124sm5eO
(For the front sensors: size detection)
8. Remove 5 screws (12) on the front (Upper Unit upright: top) to remove the Upper Front Guide
Plate (13).
12
13
9. Remove 2 screws (14) to release the sensor bracket (15).
14
15
NOTE
For reassembling, fit the boss (Upper Unit) boss
to the hole (sensor bracket).
hole
10. Disconnect the harness (16) and release the

sensor from the bracket.
16
5-391 K124sm5eO
(For the rear sensor: jam detection)
17
17
17
17
12. Remove 5 screws (18) on the rear.
18 18 18 18 18
13. Remove the Upper Rear Guide Plate (19).
19
14. Remove 1 screw (20) to release the sensor

bracket. Disconnect the harness (21). 21
Release the sensor from the bracket.
20
5-392 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 8 Replacing Home Position Sensor
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
NOTE
5-393 K124sm5eO
4
4
6
6

Remove 2 screws (9) to remove Cover 8 (10).
10
8 9
5-394 K124sm5eO
Remove 2 screws (12) to remove Cover (13).
13
11 12
14
15
5-395 K124sm5eO
11. Remove 6 screws (16) to remove Sheet Guide (17).
16
16
16
17
16
18
5-396 K124sm5eO
13. Remove 4 screws (19) to remove Exit Guide (20)
19 19
20
14. Remove 1 screw (21) to remove Stopper (22).
21
22 21
5-397 K124sm5eO
23
23
23
16. Return Stopper (22) in position.
22
NOTE
During this procedure, it is possible to go down “Upper Unit” to backside and may possible
make damage on “Harness” and “Damper” during this procedure. So, it is necessary to
surely install “Stopper (22) and then proceed.
5-398 K124sm5eO
18. Lift up the front side of the Lower Unit Guide Plate (24) to escape from the rollers.
Pull and remove the Lower Unit Guide Plate (24) to the rear side.
24
front
24
24
rear
5-399 K124sm5eO
20. Remove 1 screw (25) to remove Sensor Bracket (26).
25
26

Replace Home Position Sensor (28) with a new one.
28
27
5-400 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 9 Replacing Open Switch
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
NOTE
5-401 K124sm5eO
4. Disconnect the harness (4), and then remove 1 screw (5) to release the sensor bracket. Release
the sensor form the bracket.
5
NOTE
(1) For reassembling, adjust the location of the sensor bracket so as to touch with the dent of
the opening.
incorrect
correct
(2) For reassembling, the tab part should come the front of its stopper.
tab
stopper
5-402 K124sm5eO
5. 13. 10 Replacing Emergent Stop Switch
Exit Tray 2 (2). 1
2 2
NOTE
5-403 K124sm5eO
4. Remove 1 screw (4) to remove Switch Bracket (5).

Replace Emergent Stop Switch (7) with a new one.
5-404 K124sm5eO
Chapter 6
Maintenance
Page
6. 1 Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts 6- 2
6. 2 Maintenance Period 6- 3
6. 2. 1 Cleaning 6- 3
6. 2. 2 Lubrication 6- 4
6. 2. 2. 1 Driving Gears on Machine Frame 6- 4
6. 2. 2. 2 Developer Unit 6- 5
6. 2. 2. 3 Terminal Plates on Machine Frame 6- 5
6. 3 Service Kit 6- 6
6. 4 Service Tool List 6- 7
6-1 K124sm6e1
KIP 7100 - PM Schedule r1
-Please keep this form with the KIP 7100 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled
-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an "X" in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.
Part / Description Qty Part Number Square Feet X 1000
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Code
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Document Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C C C
Document Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C C
Photoreceptor 1 SUP7100-101 R
Main Charge Wire 1 SUP9810-104 # C C C R C C C R C C
Transfer Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C C C R C C C R C C
Separation Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C C C R C C C R C C
Grid Screen # C C C C C
LED Head # C C C C C C C C C C
Developer Space Discs # C C C C C
Lube Gears L L L L L
Developer Roller - Kit 1 Z160980020 R R
Roll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C C C
Knife @ C C
Filters - Kit 1 Z160980220 @ C C C C C C R C C C
Fuser - Kit 1 Z160980040 R
Fuser Fingers C C C C C C C C C C
Pressure Roller C C
Thermostat C C
Thermistor C C
Exterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C C C
# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate
@ = Clean with vacuum I = Inspect A = Adjust position
Subject to change without notice

Actual intervals may vary due to customer requirements / installation location Page 1
KIP 7100 - PM Schedule r1
Part / Description Qty Part Number Square Feet X 1000
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Code
550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000
Document Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C C C
Document Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C C
Photoreceptor 1 SUP3000-101 R
Main Charge Wire 1 SUP9810-104 # C R C C C R C C C R
Transfer Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C R C C C R C C C R
Separation Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C R C C C R C C C R
Grid Screen # C C C C
LED Head # C C C C C C C C C C
Developer Space Discs # C C C C
Developer Roller - Kit 1 Z160980020 R R R
Roll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C C C
Knife @ C C C
Filter - Kit 1 Z160980220 @ C C C R C C C C C C
Fuser - Kit 1 Z160980040 R
Fuser Fingers C C C C C C C C C C
Pressure Roller C C C
Thermostat C C C
Thermistor C C C
Exterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C C C

Actual intervals may vary due to customer requirements / installation location Page 2
KIP 7100 PM Schedule
Kit Part Number Part / Description Qty
Linear Meters X 1000
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Code
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
Document Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C
Document Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C
Z160980200 Main Charge Wire 1 # C C R C C R C C
Transfer Wire 1 # C C R C C R C C
Separation Wire 1 # C C R C C R C C
Wire Springs 5 I I R I I R I I
Z054700010 Photoreceptor 1 C C C C C R C C
Grid Screen 1 # C C C C C C C C
LED Head # C C C C C C C C
Z160980150 Developer Seal Kit # C C C C C C C C
Z160980020 Developer - Kit 1 R R
Roll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C
Knife 1 @ C C C C C C C C
Z160980220 Filters - Kit (Annually or at) 1 @ C C C C C R C C
Z160980040 Fuser - Kit 1 C C C C C R C C
Bushes C C C C C C C
Fuser Fingers (Upper & Lower) C C C C C C C
Pressure Roller C C
Thermostat C C
Thermistor C C
Exterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C
Page 1
KIP 7100 PM Schedule
Kit Part Number Part / Description Qty
Linear Meters X 1000
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Code
54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
Document Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C
Document Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C
Z160980200 Main Charge Wire 1 R C C R C C R C
Transfer Wire 1 # R C C R C C R C
Separation Wire 1 # R C C R C C R C
Wire Springs 5 R I I R I I R I
Z054700010 Photoreceptor 1 # C C C R C C C C
Grid Screen # C C C C C C C C
LED Head # C C C C C C C C
Z160980150 Developer Space Discs # C C C C C C C C
Z160980020 Developer Roller - Kit 1 R R
Roll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C
Knife @ C C C C C C C C
Z160980220 Filters - Kit (Annually or at) 1 @ C C C R C C C C
Z160980040 Fuser - Kit 1 C C C R C C C C
Bushes C C C C C C C
Fuser Fingers (Upper & Lower) C C C C C C C
Pressure Roller C C C
Thermostat C C C
Thermistor C C C
Exterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C
# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry

@ = Clean with vacuum C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate
I = Inspect A = Adjust position
Page 2
6. 1 Recommended Periodic Replacement
Parts
For keeping the machine quality in a satisfactory level, a periodic replacement for the following
parts is recommended.
A damaged part (even if it looks not) may result in a critical failure.
Location Part Name Quantity Remarks

Developer Unit Scraper 1 “Developer Maintenance Kit A”
Sheet 2 (P/N: Z160980020)
Sheet 2 2
Roller Developer 1
Sheet 3 2
Sheet 4 2
Blade Roller 1
Seal R2 Assy 1
Seal L2 Assy 1
Seal 1 2
Seal 23 2
Seal 3 2
Seal 4 2
Image Corona Corona Wire (1) Assy 1 “Corona Wire Kit”
Spring 2 1 (P/N: Z160980200)
Transfer / Corona Wire 2
Separation Corona Wire Spring 4
Main Frame Filter 4 1 “Filter Kit”
Fuser Upper Area Filter 3 Assy 2 (P/N: Z160980220)
Fuser Unit Roller Fusing 1 “Fuser Maintenance Kit”
Bush 2 (P/N: Z160980040)
Nail Stripping 13
Nail Lower 6
Engine Frame Photoconductive Drum 1 P/N: Z054700010
6-2 K124sm6e1
6. 2. 2 Lubrication
Please apply an adequate amount of grease to the components shown in the following section.
Recommended lubrication term is in every 18,000m.
Use silicone grease unless otherwise noted.
6. 2. 2. 1 Driving Gears on Machine Frame

Remove Developer Unit and Fuser Unit.
Apply grease to Gear 3 (1), Gear Helical 34T (2), Gear Helical 20T (3).
Apply heat-proof grease to Gear 36T (4).
Engine Unit from top, Developer Unit removed Engine Unit open, Developer Unit removed
From rear, Fuser Unit removed
6-4 K124sm6e1
6. 2. 2. 2 Developer Unit
Remove Developer Unit.
Apply conductive grease to the contacting points for Developer/Blade/Toner Supply Rollers on the
metal plates (1).
Apply grease to Gear Helical 28T (2).
6. 2. 2. 3 Terminal Plates on Machine Frame

Open Engine Unit.
Apply conductive grease to the contacting points for Photoconductive Drum / Cleaning Roller on
the metal plates (1).
1
1
6-5 K124sm6e1
6. 3 Service Kit
The following service kits are assigned taking the serviceability into consideration.
Kit Name Contained Parts Quantity Remarks

(Part Number)
Start Up Kit Starting Toner (500g) 1 [5.2.2 Replacement of
(Z240970030) Recommended Periodic
Replacement Parts]
Developer Maintenance Scraper 1 [5.2.2 Replacement of
Kit A Sheet 2 Recommended Periodic
(Z160980020) Sheet 2 2 Replacement Parts]
Roller Developer 1
Sheet 3 2
Sheet 4 2
Blade Roller 1
Seal R2 Assy 1
Seal L2 Assy 1
Seal 1 2
Seal 23 2
Seal 3 2
Seal 4 2
Developer Seal Set Seal R2 Assy 1
(Z160980150) Seal L2 Assy 1
Seal 1 2
Seal 23 2
Seal 3 2
Seal 4 2
Corona Wire Kit Corona Wire (1) Assy 1 [5.7.2 Replacement of
(Z160980200) Spring 2 1 Corona Wire]
Corona Wire 2 [5.8.2 Replacement of
Wire Spring 4 Corona Wire]
Filter Kit Filter 4 1 right, middle
(Z160980220) Filter 3 Assy 2 rear, upper
Fuser Maintenance Kit Roller Fusing 1 [5.3.2 Replacement of
(Z160980040) Bush 2 Recommended Periodic
Nail Stripping 13 Replacement Parts]
Nail Lower 6
Nail Stripping Set Nail Stripping 13
(Z160980190)
Nail Lower Set Nail Lower 6
(Z160980130)
Toner Cartridge Kit Toner Cartridge 2
(Z240970010)
Photoconductive Drum Photoconductive Drum 1 [5.5.1 Replacement of
(Z054700010) Photoconductive Drum]
6-6 K124sm6e1
6. 4 Service Tool List
Here is the table to list special tools for field service.
It is recommended to check them through in Parts Manual and Publication Bulletin for the latest
information.
Part Name
(Part Number)
Appearance / Usage Requirement Related Section
DEV HANDLE ASSY 5.2.2 Replacement of Recommended
(Developer Handle) Replacement Parts
5.2.3 Replacement of Toner Supply
(Z050320050) Roller
5.2.8 Readjustment of the pressure
of Regulation Roller
DRUM BLOCK FIX 5.5.2 How to fix the Aluminum Blocks

TOOL 5.5.3 Cleaning of Photoconductive
Drum
(Z168580040) 5.6.2 LED focus adjustment
SPACER SET 5.6.2 LED focus adjustment

(LED focus)
t0.1mm
t0.08mm
t0.05mm
(Z160980210)
SHADING SHEET 8.13.4.1 Shading (Calibration)
(mono/color calibration) (w/ bar code)
for Old Scanner
(Z178300360)
SCANNER 8.13.4.2 Feed Distance (1:1)

ADJUSTMENT CHART
(Feed Distance) for Old Scanner
(Print this from KIP UI)
STITCH ADJUSTMENT 8.13.4.3 Position (Stitching)

CHART
(Position) for Old Scanner
(Z168300580)
Scanner Utility Windows 2000/XP 8.13.4.1 Shading (Calibration)

Version 1.23 or later 8.13.4.2 Feed Distance (1:1)
(Scanner adjustment) w/ scanner unit USB driver 8.13.4.3 Position (Stitching)
8.13.5 Scanner Firmware Update
for Old Scanner
6-7 K124sm6e1
Part Name
(Part Number)
Appearance / Usage Requirement Related Section
SHADING SHEET 8.14.6.1 Shading
(mono/color calibration) 8.14.6.2 Stitching
(Position)
for New Scanner
(Z298500082)
K129 Diag Windows 2000 and both 64/32 bit 8.14.6.1 Shading
(Scanner adjustment) editions of Windows 7,Vista, XP 8.14.6.2 Stitching
8.14.5 Update
for New Scanner
6-8 K124sm6e1
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Page
7. 1 Troubleshooting - Printer Errors 7- 3
7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors 7- 3
7. 1. 1. 1 Roll 2 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0101) 7- 3
7. 1. 1. 2 Roll 1 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0102) 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 3 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0103) & “Early” (J-0303) 7- 5
7. 1. 1. 4 Reg. Jam “Delay” (J-0104), “Stay” (J-0204)
“Early” (J-0304), “Remained” (J-1004) 7- 6
7. 1. 1. 5 Internal Jam “Delay” (J-0106), “Stay” (J-0206)
7. 1. 1. 6 Fuser Jam “Delay” (J-0107), “Stay” (J-0207)
7. 1. 1. 7 Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100) 7- 7
7. 1. 1. 8 Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200) 7- 7
7. 1. 1. 9 Deck Open 7- 7
7. 1. 1.10 Deck Jam 7- 8
7. 1. 1.11 Manual Set NG 7- 9
7. 1. 1.12 Toner Empty 7-10
7. 1. 1.13 The door opened during the print 7-10
7. 1. 1.14 Abnormal variation in cut length 7-10
7. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors 7-11
7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004) 7-13
7. 1. 2. 2 Fuser Error (E-001) 7-14
7. 1. 2. 3 Fuser Error (E-003) 7-15
7. 1. 2. 4 Main Motor Error (E-010) 7-15
7. 1. 2. 5 Fuser Motor Error (E-011) 7-16
7. 1. 2. 6 Developer Press Motor Error (E-012) 7-16
7. 1. 2. 7 Counter Error (E-020) 7-17
7. 1. 2. 8 High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033) 7-17
7. 1. 2. 9 Bias Output Error (E-034) 7-18
7. 1. 2.10 Cutter Error (E-040) 7-18
7. 1. 2.11 FPGA Error (E-050) 7-19
7. 1. 2.12 Developer Error (E-070) 7-19
7. 1. 2.13 Density Sensor Error (E-080) 7-19
7. 1. 2.14 Density Sensor Output Error (E-081) 7-19
7. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality Defects 7-20

7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment 7-20
7. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality Defects 7-21
7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light 7-21
7. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light 7-23
7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light 7-24
7. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven 7-25
7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image 7-25
7. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical) 7-26
7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical) 7-26
7. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical) 7-27
7. 2. 2. 9 Void of image 7-28
7. 2. 2.10 Dirt on the back of the print 7-29
7-1 K124sm7e1
7. 2. 2.11 Defective fusing 7-29
7. 2. 2.12 Defective image placement, No Leading Edge 7-30
7. 2. 2.13 Jitter 7-30
7. 2. 2.14 Image looks not sharp 7-31
7. 2. 2.15 Uneven image density (vertical) 7-31
7. 2. 2.16 Completely white (No image) 7-32
7. 2. 2.17 Completely black 7-32
7. 2. 2.18 Crease of paper 7-33
7. 2. 2.19 Double image 7-34
7. 2. 2.20 Dirt on the print (Offset) 7-35
7. 2. 2.21 Image Void on Long Print without Crease 7-35
7. 2. 2.22 Crease on Long Print (and image void at a time) 7-36
7. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects 7-38

7. 3. 1 Countermeasures - scanner operation 7-38
7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Old Scanner)
(Scanner does not transport) 7-38
7. 3. 1. 2 Original can not be set (New Scanner)
(Scanner does not transport) 7-38
7. 3. 1. 3 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position 7-39
7. 3. 1. 4 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop) 7-39
7. 3. 1. 5 Original is mis-fed 7-39
7. 3. 1. 6 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on 7-39
7. 3. 1. 7 Scanner is not recognized 7-40
7. 3. 2 Countermeasures - scanner image quality 7-41
7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black 7-41
7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines 7-41
7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines 7-42
7. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks 7-42
7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks 7-42
7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good 7-42
7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right 7-42
7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration 7-43
7. 5 Internal Counter Error 7-51
7-2 K124sm7e1
7. 1 Troubleshooting - Printer Errors
7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors
7. 1. 1. 1 Roll 2 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0101)
Reference
Delay : Paper arrives the sensor much later than required timing.
Stay : Paper exists on the sensor for longer time than required.
Early : Paper arrives the sensor much earlier than required timing.
Remained : Paper has already existed on the sensor when turning on the machine.
Cause Checking Checking Result Treatment

order
Installation of roll 1 Is the roll paper correctly installed to the No Install it correctly.
paper Roll Deck 2?
Roll 2 Set Sensor 2 Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in No 1. Is there any problem with
(PH9) the Signal Status Mode of the Service the Drawer Connector
Mode. which connects the
machine and the Roll
Signal Code : 106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) Deck.
Is the status “H” when the roll paper is 2. Check if there is any
set? problem with the wire
connected to the Roll 2
Set Sensor.
3. Replace the Roll 2 Set

Sensor if there is no
problem with the wire.
Roll 2 Feed Clutch 3 Check the operation of Roll 2 Feed No 1. Check if there is any
(CL6) Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of problem with the wire
the Service Mode. connected to the Roll 2
Feed Clutch.
Device Code : 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch)
2. Replace the Roll 2 Feed
Does the clutch operate when you Clutch if there is no
change the output signal from “L” to “H”? problem with the wire.
Main Motor (M1) 4 Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in No 1. Check the driving belts of
the Signal Status Mode of the Service the Roll Deck.
Mode while making the following
operation. (Signal Code : 106) 2. Check if there is any
problem with the wire
1. Set the leading edge of roll 2 between connected to the Main
feeding rollers. (Leading edge must Motor.
not pass over the Roll 2 Set Sensor.)
2. Close the Roll Deck. 3. Replace the Main Motor
if there is no problem with
Does the status change from “L” to “H” the wire.
when the machine is transporting the Yes 1. Remove the whole Roll
paper? Deck, and then re-install
it to the machine
correctly.
7-3 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 2 Roll 1 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0102)
order
paper Roll Deck 2?
Roll 1 Set Sensor 2 Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor in No 1. Is there any problem with
(PH7) the Signal Status Mode of the Service the Drawer Connector
Mode. which connects the
machine and the Roll
Is the status “H” when the roll paper is 2. Check if there is any
set? problem with the wire
connected to the Roll 1
Set Sensor.
3. Replace the Roll 1 Set

Roll 1 Feed Clutch 3 Check the operation of Roll 1 Feed No 1. Check if there is any
(CL4) Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of problem with the wire
the Service Mode. connected to the Roll 1
Feed Clutch.
Device Code : 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch)
2. Replace the Roll 1 Feed
Does the clutch operate when you Clutch if there is no
change the output signal from “L” to “H”? problem with the wire.
Main Motor (M1) 4 Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor in No 1. Check the driving belts of
the Signal Status Mode of the Service the Roll Deck.
Mode while making the following
operation. (Signal Code : 105) 2. Check if there is any
1. Set the leading edge of roll 1 between connected to the Main
feeding rollers. (Leading edge must Motor.
not pass over the Roll 1 Set Sensor.)
2. Close the Roll Deck. 3. Replace the Main Motor
Does the status change from “L” to “H” the wire.
when the machine is transporting the Yes 1. Remove the whole Roll
paper? Deck, and then re-install
it to the machine
correctly.
7-4 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 3 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0103) & “Early” (J-0303)
order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur between Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
Roll 1 Set Sensor and Feed Sensor?
Feed Sensor 2 Check the status of Feed Sensor in the No 1. Is there any problem with
(PH6) Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. the Drawer Connector
which connects the
Signal Code : 108 (Feed Sensor) machine and the Roll
Deck.
Is the status “L” when the paper is not
passing beside the sensor? 2. Check if there is any
And is it “H” when the paper is passing problem with the wire
beside the sensor? connected to the Feed
Sensor.
3. Replace the Feed Sensor

the wire.
Cutter Home 3 Check the status of Cutter Home Position No 1. Check if there is any
Position Sensor Sensors in the Signal Status Mode of the problem with the wire
(MS6 & MS7) Service Mode. connected to the Cutter
Home Position Sensor.
Signal Code :
094 (Cutter Home Position Right) 2. Replace the Cutter Home
095 (Cutter Home Position Left) Position Sensors if there
is no problem with the
Is the status “H” when the Cutter is at wire.
each home position?
And is it “L” when the Cutter is not at the
home position?
Driving mechanism 4 Check the operation of Feed Clutch in No Replace the Feed Clutch or
the Device Operation Mode of the Main Motor if it is defective.
Service Mode.
Device Code : 10 (Feed Clutch)
Also open and close the Roll Deck, and

check if the Main Motor rotates correctly.
Does each Feed Clutch and Main Motor

operate correctly?
7-5 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 4 Reg. Jam “Delay” (J-0104), “Stay” (J-0204)
“Early” (J-0304), “Remained” (J-1004)
order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur around the Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
Registration Roller?
Registration 2 Check the status of Registration Sensor No 1. Check if there is any
Sensor (PH1) in the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the
Registration Sensor.
Signal Code : 100 (Registration Sensor)
2. Replace the Registration
Is the status “L” when the paper is not Sensor if there is no
passing beside the sensor? problem with the wire.
And is it “H” when the paper is passing
beside the sensor?
Engine Unit 3 Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is No 1. Close the Engine Unit
locked? firmly.
(Is the pressure around the Registration
Roller correct?) 2. Adjust the pressure
around the Registration
Roller.
Driving mechanism 4 Check the operation of Registration No Replace the Registration
Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of Clutch or Main Motor if it is
the Service Mode. defective.
Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch)
Also open and close the Roll Deck, and

check if the Main Motor rotates correctly.
Does each Registration Clutch and Main

Motor operate correctly?
7. 1. 1. 5 Internal Jam “Delay” (J-0106), “Stay” (J-0206)

order
separation area?
Separation Sensor 2 Check the status of Separation Sensor in No 1. Check if there is any
(PH2) the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the
Separation Sensor.
Signal Code : 010 (Separation Sensor)
2. Replace the Separation
passing beside the sensor? problem with the wire.
And is it “H” when the paper is passing
beside the sensor?
Transfer / 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit Yes Install the Transfer /
Separation Corona installed to the machine correctly? Separation Corona Unit
correctly.
Is the Corona Wire broken? Yes Replace the Corona Wire.
HV Power Supply 4 Is the output from the HV Power Supply No Replace the HV Power
to the Separation Corona correct? Supply.
7-6 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 1. 6 Fuser Jam “Delay” (J-0107), “Stay” (J-0207)
order
fuser area?
Exit Sensor (PH3) 2 Check the status of Exit Sensor in the No 1. Check if there is any
Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. problem with the wire
connected to the Exit
Signal Code : 011 (Exit Sensor) Sensor.
Is the status “L” when the paper is not 2. Replace the Exit Sensor
passing beside the sensor? if there is no problem with
And is it “H” when the paper is passing the wire.
beside the sensor?
7. 1. 1. 7 Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100)

order
Opening the Roll 1 Did you open the Roll Deck before the Yes Wait until the roll paper is
Deck completion of printing? completely rewound.
(Roll paper will be rewound after printing.
J-1100 will be indicated if you open the
deck at that time.)
Lock of Roll Deck 2 Is the Roll Deck firmly locked? No Close it firmly.
7. 1. 1. 8 Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200)

order
Opening the Exit 1 Did you open the Exit Cover during Yes Do not open it during
Cover printing? printing.
7. 1. 1. 9 Deck Open
order
Roll Deck 1 Is the Roll Deck opened? Yes Close it firmly.
Switch (MS5) 2 Check the status of the following signal in No 1. Check if there is any
the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the Switch
(MS5).
Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open)
2. Replace the Switch
Is the status “L” when the Roll Deck is (MS5) if there is no
closed? problem with the wire.
And is it “H” when the Roll Deck is
opened?
7-7 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 1.10 Deck Jam
order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur in the Roll Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
Deck?
paper Roll Deck 2?
Roll 1 Set Sensor 3 Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor No 1. Is there any problem with
(PH7) and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal the Drawer Connector
Roll 2 Set Sensor Status Mode of the Service Mode. which connects the
(PH9) machine and the Roll
106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor)
2. Check if there is any
Is the status of each sensor “H” when problem with the wire
you set the roll paper? connected to each
sensor.
3. Replace the concerning

sensor if there is no
Roll 1 Feed Clutch 4 Check the operation of the following No 1. Check if there is any
(CL4) clutches in the Device Operation Mode of problem with the wire
Roll 2 Feed Clutch the Service Mode. connected to each clutch.
(CL6)
Roll 1 Back Clutch Device Code : 2. Replace the concerning
(CL5) 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch) clutch if there is no
Roll 2 Back Clutch 07 (Roll 1 Back Clutch) problem with the wire.
(CL7) 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch)
09 (Roll 2 Back Clutch)
Does each clutch operate correctly?

Main Motor (M1) 5 Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor No 1. Check the driving belts of
and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal the Roll Deck.
Status Mode of the Service Mode while
making the following operation. 2. Check if there is any
Signal Code : 105 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) connected to the Main
106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) Motor.
1. Set the leading edge of each roll 3. Replace the Main Motor
paper between the concerning if there is no problem with
feeding rollers. (Leading edge must the wire.
not pass over each Roll 1 (2) Set Yes 1. Remove the whole Roll
Sensor.) Deck, and then re-install
2. Close the Roll Deck. it to the machine
correctly.
Does the status change from “L” to “H”
when the machine is transporting the
paper?
7-8 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 1.11 Manual Set NG
order
Mis-feed 1 Have you already set the cut sheet paper Yes Remove the paper.
to the Bypass Feeder before you turned
on the machine?
Manual Set Sensor 2 Check the status of Manual Feed Sensor No 1. Check if there is any
in the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the Manual
Set Sensor.
Signal Code : 008 (Manual Set Sensor)
2. Replace the Manual Set
passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” problem with the wire.
when the paper is passing beside the
sensor?
Registration 3 Check the status of Registration Sensor No 1. Check if there is any
Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to Registration
Sensor.
Signal Code : 100 (Registration
Sensor) 2. Replace the Registration
Is the status “L” when the paper is not problem with the wire.
passing beside the sensor? And is it “H”
when the paper is passing beside the
sensor?
Engine Unit 4 Is Engine Unit closed firmly? No 1. Close Engine Unit firmly.
(Is the pressure around Registration 2. Adjust the pressure
Roller correct?) around Registration Roller.
Driving mechanism 5 Check the operation of Registration No Replace the Registration
Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of Clutch or Main Motor if it is
the Service Mode. defective.
Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch)
Open and close Roll Deck and check if

Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each
Registration Clutch and Main Motor
operate correctly?
7. 1. 1.12 Toner Empty

order
Toner Cartridge 1 Is there enough toner in the Toner No Replace the Toner
Cartridge? Cartridge.
Toner Supply 2 Check the operation of Toner Supply No 1. Check if there is any
Motor (M3) Motor by the following 2 ways. problem with the wires
among Toner Supply
1. Turn on the machine and check the Motor, Driver PCB B and
action of Toner Supply Motor at that PW12420 PCB.
time.
2. Replace the Toner
2. Enter Factory Adjustment Mode and Supply Motor if there is
carry out Sub Mode No.05. no problem with the wire.
Press [ * ] Key when the machine is
operating. (Toner Supply Motor rotates
during [ * ] Key pressed.)
Does Toner Supply Motor operate

correctly in both cases?
7-9 K124sm7e1
order
Toner Sensor 3 Confirm that the Toner Sensor is not No Replace the Toner Sensor.
(TLS1) buried in the toner. Yes Replace the PW12420 PCB.
Then check the status of Toner Sensor in
the Input/Output Mode of the Service
Mode.
I/O Signal Code : 107 (Toner Sensor)
Is the status “H” when the Toner Sensor

is covered with the toner?
And is it “L” when the sensor is not
covered?
7. 1. 1.13 The door opened during the print

order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Is there a paper anywhere in the Yes Open the Exit Cover and the
machine? Engine Unit, and then
remove the paper.
(Cut the paper manually if it
has not been cut yet.)
Switch (MS5) 2 Check the status of the following signal in No 1. Check if there is any
the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the Switch
(MS5).
Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open)
2. Replace the Switch
Is the status “L” when the Roll Deck is (MS5) if there is no
closed? problem with the wire.
And is it “H” when the Roll Deck is
opened?
Fuse 3 Does the fuse (F2) have a proper No Replace the fuse (F2).
conductivity?
7. 1. 1.14 Abnormal variation in cut length

order
Sensor (PH12) 1 Check the status of the following signal in No 1. Check if there is any
with encoder the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the Sensor
(PH12).
Signal Code : 109 (Feed Encoder)
2. Replace the Sensor
Is the status changed “H” and “L” (PH12) if there is no
alternately when rotating the encoder by problem with the wire.
hand?
2 Does the encoder rotate smoothly when No Replace the shaft or bracket
feeding media by Feed Knob? that supports the encoder.
7-10 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors
The followings are the names of Service Call Errors and the conditions that those errors occur.
Error Code Error Indication Conditions

E-000 Fuser Temperature Rising Error Fuser Temperature does not reach 50 oC
within 120 seconds after turning on.
E-001 Fuser Over Temperature Error Fuser Temperature reaches over 230 oC.
E-002 Fuser Low Temperature Error 1. Fuser Temperature at the time of
turning on was 50 to 100 oC, but it
does not rise up to 120 oC within 150
seconds after that.
2. Fuser Temperature at the time of
turning on was higher than 100 oC, but
it does not rise up to the setting
temperature within 330 seconds after
that.
E-003 Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall The difference of temperature between
Error center and side of fuser becomes 50 oC or
more.
E-004 Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall The Lamp of fuser lights (Signal HEAT1
Error is “H”) to heat up the Fuser Roller in the
ready condition, but even 1 oC of
temperature rise can not be
accomplished within 30 seconds.
E-010 Main Motor Error The Main Motor Output Detection Signal
(MAINM_LD) continues to be “H” for 3
seconds or longer when the Main Motor is
rotating.
E-011 Fuser Motor Error The Fuser Motor Output Detection Signal
(HEATM_LD) continues to be “H” for 3
seconds or longer when the Fuser Motor
is rotating.
E-012 Developer Press Motor Error The Developer Press Sensor Signal
(PRESS_S) does not change to “L” within
30 seconds after turning on.
E-020 Counter Error The Counter Connection Detection Signal
(COUNT_OPN) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer after turning on.
E-031 Image Corona Output Error The Image Corona Output Detection
Signal (IM_LD) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer when the Image Corona
is ON.
E-032 Separation Corona Output Error The Separation Corona Output Detection
Signal (AC_LD) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer when the Separation
Corona is ON.
E-033 Transfer Corona Output Error The Transfer Corona Output Detection
Signal (TR_LD) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer when the Transfer
Corona is ON.
7-11 K124sm7e1
Error Code Error Indication Conditions
E-034 Bias Output Error Bias Output Detection Signal (BIAS_LD)
continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer
when a specified bias is supplied to the
corresponding Developer Unit
components.
E-040 Cutter Error 1. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal
(MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not
change to “H” within 100 millisecond
since the Cutter has started the
operation.
2. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal
(MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not
change to “L” within 1 second since
the Cutter has started the operation.
E-050 FPGA Error Initialization of FPGA is failed after
turning on.
E-070 Developer Unit Set Error 1. The Connector J-253 is not
connected.
2. The Switch (MS4) is “open” condition,
which detects open/close of Engine
Unit or Toner Hatch.
E-080 Density Sensor Error The default output of Density Sensor
reaches less than 0.1V or more than
1.3V.
E-081 Density Sensor Output Error The gap between the default output and
the standard output of Density Sensor
reaches less than 2V.
7-12 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004)
E-000 : Fuser Temperature Rising Error
E-002 : Fuser Low Temperature Error
E-004 : Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error

order
Error clearance 1 Have you cleared the fuser error in the Yes Wait until the Fuser Unit is
Error Clear Mode? enough cooled down.
Then select the Error Clear
Mode and clear the
concerning error.
Wires 2 Are wires among Lamp (H1, H2), Solid No Connect them properly.
State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors
(TH1 & TH2) connected properly?
Lamp (H1, H2) 3 Unplug the machine, and then check the No Replace the Lamp.
resistance of Lamp (H1, H2) with the
multi-meter.
Is it 15k ohm or lower?

Thermistors 4 Select the Information Mode, and then No Replace the concerning
(TH1 & TH2) check the temperature of fuser detected Thermistor.
by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2).
Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1)

01 (Fuser temperature 2)
Is each temperature normal?

DC Power Supply 5 Confirm that the machine is turned on, No Replace the DC Power
(DCP1) and then check the voltage of the orange Supply if there is no problem
or Fuse line (J220-4). with the wires.
Is it 24V?
Confirm that the machine is turned off, Yes Replace the Fuse.
and then check whether or not each
Fuse is broken.
Is any Fuse broken?

Relay (RY1) 6 Select the Device Operation Mode, and No Replace the Relay.
then change the signal of the following
signal to “H”.
Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay)
And check the resistance between the

following points.
Between RY1-2 and RY1-4
Between RY1-6 and RY1-8
Is the each resistance almost 0 ohm?
7-13 K124sm7e1
order
Solid State Relay 7 Select the Device Operation Mode, and Yes Replace the Solid State
(SSR1) then change the signal of the following Relay
signals to “H”.
No Replace the PW12420 PCB.
Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay)
21 (Fuser Lamp 1)
Then check the voltage between J105-1

and J105-2.
Is it 0V?
CAUTION
Change the signal of “21” (Fuser
Lamp 1) to “L” after checking!
7. 1. 2. 2 Fuser Error (E-001)

order
(Refer to the page 8-154 as for the Error Mode and clear the
Clear Mode.) concerning error.
Solid State Relay 3 Does the error occur again even if you Yes Replace the Solid State
(SSR1) have cleared it in the Error Clear Mode? Relay.

7-14 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 3 Fuser Error (E-003)
order
Mode and clear the
concerning error.

7. 1. 2. 4 Main Motor Error (E-010)

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Main Motor and No Connect it properly.
PW12420 PCB connected properly?
Is it 24V?
Fuse is broken.
Is any Fuse broken?

Main Motor (M1) 3 Check the operation of Main Motor in the No Replace the Main Motor.
Device Operation Mode of the Service
Mode.
Device Code : 00 (Main Motor)
Does the Main Motor operate correctly?
7-15 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 5 Fuser Motor Error (E-011)
order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Fuser Motor and No Connect it properly.
Is it 24V?
Fuse is broken.
Is any Fuse broken?

Fuser Motor (M2) 3 Check the operation of Fuser Motor in No Replace the Fuser Motor.
the Device Operation Mode of the
Service Mode.
Device Code : 01 (Fuser Motor)
Does the Fuser Motor operate correctly?
7. 1. 2. 6 Developer Press Motor Error (E-012)

order
Wires 1 Are the wires among Developer Press No Connect them properly.
Sensor (PH4), PW12420 PCB, Driver
PCB B (PW6654) and Developer Press
Motor (M4) connected properly?
Developer Press 2 Turn off the machine, and then turn it on No Replace the Developer
Motor (M4) again. Press Motor or Driver PCB
Driver PCB B Is the Developer Unit moved to the Drum B.
(PW6654) side?
Developer Press 3 Select the Signal Code “104” (Developer No Replace the Developer
Sensor (PH4) Press Sensor) in the Signal Status Mode, Press Sensor.
and then turn on the machine again.
Does the status change from “H” to “L”

after turning on?
Fuse 4 Does the fuse (F3) have a proper No Replace the fuse (F3).
conductivity?
7-16 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 7 Counter Error (E-020)
order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Counter and No Connect it properly.
Is it 24V?
Turn off the machine. Does the fuse (F1) No Replace the fuse (F1).
have a proper conductivity?
Counter 3 Check the operation of Counter in the No Replace the Counter.

Device Operation Mode of the Service
Mode.
Device Code : 26 (Counter)
Does the Counter operate correctly?
7. 1. 2. 8 High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033)

E-031 : Image Corona Output Error
E-032 : Separation Corona Output Error
E-033 : Transfer Corona Output Error

order
Wires 1 Are wires among Image Corona, HV No Connect them properly.
Power Supply PCB and PW12420 PCB
connected properly?
Image Corona 2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire,
Grid Plate and housing.
Cleaning Roller 3 Does the bias terminal plate touch to No Remove and reapply
Cleaning Roller shaft properly? conductive grease to
Cleaning Roller shaft.
Relocate the bias terminal
plates properly.
Is grease applied enough? No Remove and reapply
conductive grease to
Cleaning Roller shaft.
Transfer Corona 4 Is the Transfer Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire
and housing.
Separation Corona 5 Is the Separation Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire
and housing.
HV Power Supply 6 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the HV Power Supply?
7-17 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 9 Bias Output Error (E-034)
order
Wires 1 Are wires among Developer Unit, HV No Connect them properly.
Power Supply PCB and PW12420 PCB
connected properly?
Developer Unit 2 Is the toner spill out from the Developer Yes Clean each Corona Wire,
Unit? Grid Plate and housing.
(Or is there any similar problem?)
Is the high voltage of Regulation Roller Yes Replace the Regulation
leaking? Roller.
(The resistance between the central part
of Regulation Roller and the Ground is
5 mega ohm or smaller if leaking.)
GND
Multi-meter
7. 1. 2. 10 Cutter Error (E-040)

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Cutter Unit and No Connect it properly.
Cutter Home 2 Check the status of the following signals No Replace the Cutter Unit.
Position Sensors in the Signal Status Mode of the Service
(MS6 & MS7) Mode.
Signal Code :
094 (Cutter Home Position Right)
095 (Cutter Home Position Left)
Is the status “L” when the Cutter is at

each home position?
Developer Press 3 Check the operation of Cutter in the No Replace the Cutter Unit.
Sensor (PH4) Device Operation Mode of the Service
Mode.
Device Code : 27 (Cutter Motor 1)

28 (Cutter Motor 2)
Does the Cutter operate?
7-18 K124sm7e1
7. 1. 2. 11 FPGA Error (E-050)
order
PW12420 PCB 1 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the PW12420 PCB?
7. 1. 2. 12 Developer Error (E-070)

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Developer Unit and No Connect it properly.
Switch (MS4) 2 Is the actuator of Switch correctly No Adjust the positions of
pressed down when you close the Switch (or Toner Hatch and
Engine Unit or Toner Hatch? Engine Unit).
7. 1. 2. 13 Density Sensor Error (E-080)

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Toner Density No Connect it properly.
Sensor and PW12420 PCB connected
properly?
Density Sensor 2 Can you fix the problem if you replace No Replace PW12420 with a
(PH11) Density Sensor? new one.
7. 1. 2. 14 Density Sensor Output Error (E-081)

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Toner Density No Connect it properly.
Sensor and PW12420 PCB connected
properly?
Density Sensor 2 Can you fix the problem if you replace No Replace PW12420 with a
(PH11) Density Sensor? new one.
7-19 K124sm7e1
7. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality
7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment
The followings are the settings specified to the image creation components.
When a defective image is printed out, please check whether or not these settings are satisfied for
the beginning.
Component Check Point Designated voltage Way of adjustment Corona Wire Height
(PW12420)
Image Corona CP11 (+) 1.3 +/-0.05VDC VR101
CPCOM (-)
11mm
Transfer Corona CP21 (+) Plain paper: Adjustment Mode
CP22 (-) 1.2 +/-0.05VDC No.029 (Plain)
other media: No.030 (Tracing)
1.0 +/-0.05VDC No.031 (Film)
11 mm
Separation Corona CP31 (+) 5.0 +/-0.05V VR302

(AC) CPCOM (-)
11mm
Separation Corona CP33 (+) -250 +/-5VDC VR303
(DC) Ground (-)
Negative Developer OUTPUT2 (+) -180 +/-5VDC Adjustment Mode
Roller Bias Ground (-) No.022 (Plain)
No.023 (Tracing)
No.024 (Film)
Positive Developer CP41 (+) 0.350 +/-0.005V VR401
Roller Bias CP42 (-)
Toner Supply Roller OUTPUT1 (+) the same voltage as -
Bias OUTPUT2 (-) Developer Bias
Regulation Roller OUTPUT2 (+) -80 +/-5VDC Adjustment Mode
Bias OUTPUT3 (-) No.622
Positive Cleaning OUTPUT5 (+) +450 +/-5VDC VR001
Roller Bias Ground (-)
Negative Cleaning OUTPUT5 (+) -550 +/-5VDC VR002
Roller Bias Ground (-)
NIP Width
Test Patter No.2 S(0) with a tracing paper (36” or A0) (tilting +1 to +2)
2mm 2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
Entrance Guide Plate Height (to both adjusters)
From the frame bottom surface,

Side : 70.7 to 71.3mm
Middle : 73.7 to 74.3mm (US) US: 3
: 74.5 to 75.1mm (EU) EU: 4
7-20 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality
7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light
Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 S(0) and No.3 S(0).
If necessary use other Test Patterns.

order
1 Try to readjust each image creation Yes OK
component according to [7.2.1 Basic
Image Adjustment]. Is the problem
fixed?
LED Head 2 Is the Lens Array of LED Head dirty? Yes Clean it.
Paper 3 Can you fix the problem if you use a Yes 1. If the paper was
newly unpacked paper? humidified, instruct the
customer of the way store
the paper.
2. If the paper was not the
specified one, explain the
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Image Corona 4 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire,
Grid Plate and housing, or
replace the Corona Wire if it
is too dirty.
Is the input voltage to the Image No Readjust the input voltage
Corona correct? making reference to [4. 3. 2
Check & Adjustment of
Analog Voltage to the Image
Corona] on the page 4-31.
Or replace the HV Power
Supply PCB.
Eraser Lamp 5 Does the Eraser Lamp light properly? No 1. Check the wire
connected to the Eraser
Lamp.
2. Check or replace the
Eraser Lamp.
Separation Lamp 6 Does the Separation Lamp light No 1. Check the wire
properly? connected to the
Separation Lamp.
2. Check or replace the
Separation Lamp.
Transfer Corona 7 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire
dirty? and housing, or replace the
Corona Wire if it is too dirty.
Is the input voltage to the Transfer No Readjust the input voltage
Corona correct? making reference to
[4. 3. 3 Check &
Adjustment of Analog
Voltage to the Transfer
Supply PCB.
Contact points of 8 Is each Electrode Plate on the right of No Try to install the Developer
Developer Bias the Developer Unit surely contacted to Unit so that they are
the Electrode Plate on the machine contacted each other.
side? And supply the conductive
grease to the Electrode
Plates.
PCB the HV Power Supply PCB?
7-21 K124sm7e2
order
Installation of 10 Is the driving gear on the left of the No Check whether or not the
Developer Unit Developer Unit surely fitted to the Cam of Developer Press
driving mechanism on machine side? Unit surely presses the
Developer Unit.
Check the concerning gears.
Developer Unit 11 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check the whole Developer
with the toner? Unit to find the cause.
Yes Replace the
Photoconductive Drum.
7-22 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light

order
Image Adjustment].
Is the problem fixed?
2 Turn off the machine in the middle of Yes Go on to the step 3.
printing, and then check the toner No Go on to the step 7.
image on the Drum.
Is the toner image looks normal?

Transfer Corona 3 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona No Install it correctly.
installed to the machine correctly?
Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona Yes Clean the Transfer Corona.
leaking?
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Lead Wire 5 Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 No Replace the Lead Wire.
kilo ohm, which connects the HV Power
Supply and the Transfer Corona?
Input voltage to the 6 Is a correct voltage supplied from the No Readjust the input voltage
Transfer Corona HV Power Supply to the Transfer making reference to
Corona? [4. 3. 3 Check &
Adjustment of Analog
Voltage to the Transfer
Supply PCB.
Dirt of the LED 7 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes Clean it.
Head
Developer Unit 8 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check the whole Developer
with the toner? Unit to find the cause.
9 Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed No Remove the Developer Unit,
toward the Drum? (Do Counter Rollers and then install it to the
at both sides of the Developer Roller machine correctly.
touch the Drum Unit?) Check the Developer Press
Unit.
Installation of 10 Is the driving gear on the left of the No Check whether or not the
Developer Unit Developer Unit surely fitted to the Cam of Developer Press
driving mechanism on machine side? Unit surely presses the
Developer Unit.
Check the concerning gears.
Toner Sensor 11 Is there enough toner in the Developer No 1. Check the wire or the
Unit? connector connected to
the Toner Sensor.
2. Check the Toner Sensor.
Yes Replace the
Photoconductive Drum.
7-23 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light

order
Image Adjustment].
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Do you have the problem only when Yes Change the setting of Item
you use a film? No.067 (Transfer Assist
Setting) in the Adjustment
Mode of Service Mode, so
that the Separation Lamp
works for the film.
3 Turn off the machine in the middle of Yes Go on to the step 4.
printing, and then check the toner
No Go on to the step 8.
image on the Drum.
Is the toner image looks normal?

Transfer Corona 4 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona No Install it correctly.
installed to the machine correctly?
Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona Yes Clean the Transfer Corona.
leaking?
Lead Wire 5 Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 No Replace the Lead Wire.
kilo ohms, which connects HV Power
Input voltage to the 6 Is a correct voltage inputted from the No Readjust the input voltage
Transfer Corona HV Power Supply to the Transfer making reference to
Corona? [4. 3. 3 Check & Adjustment
of Analog Voltage to the
Transfer Corona] on the
page 4-33.
Supply PCB.
Driving mechanism 7 Is the Developer Unit driving normally? No Check the driving
of Developer Unit mechanism.
Developer Unit 8 Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed No Remove the Developer Unit,
toward the Drum? (Are Counter Rollers and then install it to the
touch the Drum Unit?)
Lead Wire 9 Is the Lead Wire to supply the No Connect the Lead Wire
Developer Bias correctly connected? correctly.
Developer Bias 10 Is the Developer Unit supplied with the No Check the contact points of
Developer Bias correctly? Developer Bias, and also
check the HV Power Supply.
7-24 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven

order
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Image Corona, or
replace the Corona Wire.
Is the height of Corona Wire different Yes Adjust the height properly.
between left and right?
Installation of 2 Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed No Remove the Developer Unit,
Developer Unit toward the Drum? (Do Counter Rollers and then install it to the
touch the Drum Unit?) Check the Developer Press
Unit.
LED Head 3 Is the Lens Array dirty Yes Clean it.
Eraser Lamp 4 Are all LED of the Eraser Lamp light No 1. Replace the Eraser
properly during the print? Lamp.
2. Replace the PW12420
PCB.
Developer Unit 5 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No 1. Clean Regulation Roller.
with the toner? 2. Reinstall Scraper.
Is the toner accumulating evenly in the No Level the machine correctly.
Developer Unit?
7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image


order
Image Adjustment].
Developer Unit 2 Is the Developer Roller insulated from No Check the Developer Roller
the ground? and connector.
Image Corona 3 Is the foggy image printed even if you Yes Check the output voltage
print a completely white pattern? from the HV Power Supply
to the Image Corona.
If it is not correct, readjust it.
Developer Bias 4 Is the Developer Unit supplied with a No Check the output voltage
correct Developer Bias during the print? from the HV Power Supply
to the Developer Unit.
If it is not correct, readjust it.
Supply PCB
Photoconductive 5 Have you used the Photoconductive Yes Replace the
Drum Drum longer than its part life? Photoconductive Drum.
7-25 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical)

order
Light from the 1 Is any light from the outside thrown onto Yes Install the outer cover
outside the Drum? correctly.
Image Corona 2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Image Corona, or
Developer Unit 3 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check if the Regulation
with the toner? Roller is fixed at the proper
position.
If not, fix it at the correct
position.
7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical)


order
Image Corona 1 Is there something like filament on the Yes Remove it.
Grid Plate, which is contacted to the
Drum?
Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Image Corona, or
Foreign substance 2 Is there some foreign substance on Yes Remove it.
each Corona Unit or LED Head, which
is contacted to the Drum?
Photoconductive 3 Is there any black line or damage on Yes Clean the Drum making
Drum the Drum, of which position reference to [5. 5. 2
corresponds with the black line on the Cleaning of Photoconductive
print? Drum].
Replace the Drum if it is
damaged.
Be sure to find the cause of
the damage.
7-26 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical)

order
Image Corona 1 Is there something like filament on the Yes Remove it.
Grid Plate, which is contacted to the
Drum?
Dirt of the LED 2 Can you fix the problem if you clean the Yes OK
Head LED Head?
Transfer/Separation 3 Is there any foreign substance or dirt on Yes Clean the Transfer /
Corona the Transfer/Separation Corona? Separation Corona.
Developer Unit 4 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check whether or not there
with the toner? is damage or foreign
substance on the Regulation
Roller.
Entrance of Fuser 5 Is there any foreign substance or dirt Yes Clean it off
Unit around the entrance area of the Fuser
Unit?
Photoconductive 6 Is there any damage on the Drum, Yes Clean the Drum making
Drum which runs to the direction of Drum reference to [5. 5. 2
rotation. Cleaning of Photoconductive
Drum].
Replace the Drum if it is
damaged.
the damage.
7-27 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2. 9 Void of image

order
1 Print out the Test Patter No.7 (halftone). Yes Go to the step 2.
Can you find void of image on the print?
Paper 2 Can you fix the problem if you use a Yes 1. If the paper was humidified,
newly unpacked paper? instruct the customer of the
way store the paper.
customer that some image
problem may occur in that
case.
Developer Unit 3 Does the void of image appear on the Yes 1. Clean the Counter Rollers
print constantly Keeping about 160mm at both sides of the
of interval? Developer Roller.
2. Wipe the Developer Roller
with a dry cloth.
3. Replace the Developer
Roller if damaged.
Is the void of image mainly runs Yes 1. Check if there is enough
vertically as follows? toner in the Developer Unit.
2. Also select the Device
Status Mode and check the
Toner Sensor Signal
(Device Code: 107).
It must be “L” when the
toner is not covering the
Toner Sensor. If not,
replace the Toner Sensor.
Photoconductive 4 Does the void of image appear on the Yes Clean Drum making reference
Drum print constantly Keeping about 251mm to [5. 5. 2 Cleaning of
of interval? Photoconductive Drum].
Replace Drum if damaged.
the damage.
7. 2. 2.10 Dirt on the back of the print


order
Image Adjustment].
Transfer 2 Are Transfer Guides or the black rubber Yes Clean them.
Guide Plates area of the guide plate near Transfer / After that, check the distance
Separation Corona dirty with the toner? between Transfer Guide and
Drum. (It should be 0.5 to
0.7mm.)
Developer Unit 3 Is too much toner accumulating under Yes Clean the Developer Unit.
the Developer Roller?
Inner Transport Unit 4 Is the Inner Transport Unit dirty with the Yes Clean it, and also find where
toner? the toner came.
Fuser Unit 5 Is the Guide Plate at the entrance of Yes Clean it.
Fuser Unit dirty with the toner?
Are Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller Yes Clean them
dirty with the toner?
7-28 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.11 Defective fusing

order
Fuser Unit 1 Is the Fuser Roller properly heated up No Refer to [7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser
after turning on the machine? Error (E-001, E-002 &
E-004)] to check the Fuser
Unit.
Paper 2 Is the type of paper selected on the UI No Select the correct paper type
same with that of actually installed on the UI.
paper?
Can you fix the problem if you use a Yes 1. If the paper was
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Fusing temperature 3 Does the fusing temperature specified Yes Is there any part which is
setting in the Service Mode suits with the burnt? Replace that part if
weight (gram/square meter) of paper? burnt.
No Set the fusing temperature
correctly.
Fusing pressure 4 Print the Test Patter No.2 S(0) with a No Adjust the fusing pressure
(Nip) tracing paper (36” or A0), and turn off correctly.
the machine in the middle of printing.
Remove the print from the machine and
check the “nip width”.
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
(Measure at 2 mm from the edge.)
2mm 2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
7-29 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.12 Defective image placement, No Leading Edge
Correct leading margin is 5mm (+/-2mm).

order
Setting of Leading 1 Is the Leading Registration or Leading No Adjust it properly.
Registration Margin properly adjusted in the Service
Mode?
Feed rollers 2 Have you used the feeding rollers for Yes Replace them.
very long term?
Registration Clutch 3 Does the Registration Clutch operate No Replace Registration Clutch.
correctly without slipping?
7. 2. 2.13 Jitter

order
Photoconductive 1 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes 1. Check if there is any
Drum and its driving constantly keeping about 251mm of damage or foreign
mechanism interval? substance on Pulley on
the drum shaft.
2. Check if there is any
foreign substance between
Drum and Counter Rollers
of Developer Unit.
Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Check the engagement of
constantly keeping about 3mm of Pulley Gear on the Drum
interval? with Belt 4.
Developer Roller 2 Does the void of image appear on the Yes Replace Developer Roller if
print constantly keeping about 160mm damaged.
of interval?
Developer Unit 3 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Check if there is any
constantly keeping about 7.5mm of damage or foreign
interval? substance on 30T Gear on
Regulation Roller shaft
(driving side).
Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Check if there is any
interval? substance on 30T Gear on
Supply Roller shaft (driving
side) or the driving gears
(30T, 25T, 22T) on the
electrode plate side.
interval? substance on the driving
gears (16/34T, 21/34T) on
the driving side.
interval? substance on 16T Gears on
the screw shafts (driving
side)
Fuser Unit 4 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Slightly slow down Fuser
constantly keeping about 155mm of Motor Speed 1 or 2 step by
interval? step in a concerning media.
First half: Speed 1
Last half: Speed 2
5 Does the jitter appear 60mm from the Yes Slightly speed up Fuser
trailing edge on the print? Motor Speed 2 step by step
in a concerning media.
7-30 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.14 Image looks not sharp
Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 S(0).

order
Dirt of the LED 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes Clean it.
Head
Installation of LED 2 Remove the LED Head, and then re- Yes OK
Head install it to the machine. No Adjust the gap between LED
Is the problem fixed? Head and Drum by adding or
removing the thin plates on
the Aluminium Block at both
sides of the Drum.
Transfer / 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean it.
Separation Corona dirty?
7. 2. 2.15 Uneven image density (vertical)


order
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean it.
Transfer/Separation 2 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Yes Clean it.
Corona dirty?
Installation of LED 3 Remove the LED Head, and then re- Yes OK
Head install it to the machine.
4 Is the density of any image block Yes Adjust the gap between LED
different from that of other blocks? Head and Drum by adding or
removing the Spacers on the
Aluminium Block.
5 Is the width of abnormal density area Yes Replace the LED Head.
about 8mm as follows?
8mm
7-31 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.16 Completely white (No image)

order
Developer Press 1 Is the Developer Unit correctly pressed No Check the Developer Press
Unit to the Drum? Unit.
Driving mechanism 2 Does the Developer Roller rotate during No Check the driving
of Developer Unit the print? mechanism of Process Unit.
Developer Bias 3 Is each Electrode Plate on the right of No Try to install the Developer
the Developer Unit surely contacted to Unit so that they are
the Electrode Plate on the machine contacted each other.
side? And supply the conductive
grease to the Electrode
Plates.
LED Head 4 Are connectors of signal cable firmly No Connect them firmly.
connected to the LED Head?
Turn off the machine in the middle of No Replace the LED Head.
printing, and then check the toner
image on the Drum.
Is there any toner image on the Drum?

Transfer/Separation 5 Is the Transfer Corona Wire broken? Yes Replace it.
Corona Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit No Install it correctly.
correctly installed to the machine?
If the high voltage leaking from the Yes Check the Transfer /
Transfer Corona? Separation Corona to find
the cause for leaking.
Lead Wire of 6 Is the connection of Lead Wire correct? No Connect it correctly.
Transfer Corona
Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 No Replace the Lead Wire.

kilo ohms, which connects HV Power
the PW12420 PCB?
7. 2. 2.17 Completely black


order
Image Corona or 1 Is the Image Corona Wire broken? Yes Replace it.
HV Power Supply Is the tension of the Corona Wire No Replace it.
PCB correct?
Is the Corona Wire correctly stretched No Check whether or not the
with the spring? spring is transformed.
Is a proper high voltage supplied to the No Adjust the high voltage, or
Image Corona? replace the HV Power
Supply PCB
Is the housing of Image Corona No Replace the Zener PCB.
insulated from the ground?
the PW12420 PCB?
7-32 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.18 Crease of paper

order
1 Make a continuous printing. Yes Go to the following “8”.
Can you find the crease on the 2nd or
later prints?
paper?
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Is the Dehumidify Heater ON although Yes Turn off the Dehumidify
the air is not humid. Heater.
Lamp (H1, H2) of 3 Does the Lamp light correctly? No Replace it.
Fuser
Blower (Separation) 4 Is the Blower working properly during a No Replace it.
print to help paper transportation?
Blower 5 Is the Blower working properly during a No Replace it.
(Fuser Cooler) wide print (30”/ 34”/ 36”/ A0) to cool
down the Fuser?
Fuser Entrance 6 Is the Fuser Entrance Guide Yes Clean or replace it.
Guide transformed?
Or Is there anything on the Fuser
Entrance Guide?
Remove Pressure Roller and measure No Turn the adjuster screw(s) to
the location height of Fuser Entrance reach the correct height.
Guide. Is the height correct?
Guide Plate Height Adjuster
From the frame bottom surface, (to both sides)
Side : 70.7 to 71.3mm
Middle : 73.7 to 74.3mm (US) US: +3
: 74.5 to 75.1mm (EU) 3rd from center
EU: +4
highest
Fusing pressure 7 Print the Test Patter No.2 S(0) with a No Adjust the fusing pressure
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
2mm 2mm
adjuster
8.5 to 9.0mm
Fuser Motor speed 8 Is the paper slackened during the Yes Make the Fuser Motor speed
transportation when you make a long faster.
print?
7-33 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.19 Double Image

order
paper?
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Lamp (H1, H2) of 2 Does the Lamp light correctly? No Replace it.
Fuser
Blower (Separation) 3 Is the Blower working properly during No Replace it.
the print to help paper transportation?
Blower 4 Is the Blower working properly during a No Replace it.
(Fuser Cooler) wide print (30”/ 34”/ 36”/ A0) to cool
down the Fuser?
Fuser Entrance 6 Is the Fuser Entrance Guide Yes Clean or replace it.
Guide transformed?
Or Is there anything on the Fuser
Entrance Guide?
Remove Pressure Roller and measure No Turn the adjuster screw(s) to
the location height of Fuser Entrance reach the correct height.
Guide. Is the height correct?
Guide Plate Height Adjuster
From the frame bottom surface, (to both sides)
Side : 70.7 to 71.3mm
Middle : 73.7 to 74.3mm (US) US: +3
: 74.5 to 75.1mm (EU) 3rd from center
EU: +4
highest
Fusing Pressure 6 Print the Test Patter No.2 S(0) with a No Adjust the fusing pressure
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
2mm 2mm
adjuster
8.5 to 9.0mm
Fusing Temperature 7 Does the fusing temperature specified Yes Is there any part which is
in the Service Mode suits with the burnt? Replace that part if
weight (gram/square meter) of paper? burnt.
No Set the fusing temperature
correctly.
7-34 K124sm7e2
7. 2. 2.20 Dirt on the print (Offset)

order
paper?
Developer Unit or 2 Does the paper have dirt before it Yes Check the Developer Unit or
Transfer/Separation enters the Fuser Unit? Transfer/Separation Corona
Corona to find the cause.
Fuser Unit 3 Clean the Fuser Roller. Yes Decrease the setting value
Do you still have the problem even after of fusing temperature (-3 to -
the cleaning? 5).
No OK
7. 2. 2. 21 Image Void on Long Print without Crease

The following procedure may address image void on a long print without creases.
Image void without creases would result from a too fast feeding speed.
If you can see image void and a crease at a time, refer to [7.2.2.22 Crease (and image void at a
time)].

order
Except feeding 1 Is everything on [7.2.2.9 Void of Image] No Refer to [7.2.2.9 Void of
clear? Image] and check all the
points.
Cause analysis with 2 Does image void appear before 2x Yes Before 2x standard;
image void location standard length? Go to step 9.
No After 2x standard;
Go to step 3.
Feed Clutch Off 3 Decrease Feed Clutch Off Timing in 30 Yes OK

Timing (for shorter clutch operation) on
Adjustment Mode.
lack of slack at
cutter region Sub Mode: 053
(Feed Clutch Off Timing for Roll 1)
: 054
(Feed Clutch Off Timing for Roll 2)
Does this fix image void problem?

4 Again decrease the Feed Clutch Off Yes OK
Timing in another 30 (for shorter clutch No Increase the Feed Clutch Off
operation). Timing in 60 to restore the
original setting.
Does this fix image void problem? Go to step 5.
Fuser Motor 4th 5 Decrease Fuser Motor 4th Speed that Yes OK
Speed corresponds to the media width/type in
1 (for slower speed) on Adjustment
print pulled too Mode.
much after 2x
standard 4th Speed Plain Tracing
A3 /12”/11” 678 ---
A2 /18”/17” 690 ---
A1 /24”/22” 702 ---
30” 726 728
A0 /36”/34” 714 716

6 Decrease the 4th Speed in another 1 Yes OK
(slower).
7-35 K124sm7e2
Fuser Motor 4th 7 Decrease the 4th Speed in another 1 No Increase the 4th Speed in 3
Speed (slower). to restore the original
(cont.) setting.
Does this fix image void problem? Go to step 8.
Fuser Motor 3rd 8 Decrease Fuser Motor 3rd Speed that Yes OK
Speed corresponds to the media width/type in No Go back to step 5.
1 (for slower speed) on Adjustment Decrease the 4th Speed
Mode. (slower) with remaining the
3rd Speed decreased.
3rd Speed Plain Tracing
A3 /12”/11” 074 080 Follow step 5 to 8 until
A2 /18”/17” 110 116 image void disappears.
A1 /24”/22” 146 152
30” 440 446
A0 /36”/34” 182 188

Fuser Motor 3rd 9 Decrease Fuser Motor 3rd Speed that No Decrease the 3rd Speed in
Speed corresponds to the media width/type in another 1 (slower) until
1 (for slower speed) on Adjustment image void disappears.
print pulled too Mode.
fast before 2x
standard 3rd Speed Plain Tracing
A3 /12”/11” 074 080
A2 /18”/17” 110 116
A1 /24”/22” 146 152
30” 440 446
A0 /36”/34” 182 188
7. 2. 2. 22 Crease on Long Print (and image void at a time)

The following procedure may address a crease on a long print.
If a crease and image void can be seen at a time, follow this section.
Creases (and image void seen at a time) would result from a slack on the feeding media, which
requires feeding speed adjustment (slightly faster).

order
Except feeding 1 Is everything on [7.2.2.18 Crease of No Refer to [7.2.2.18 Crease of
paper] clear? paper] and check all the
points.
2 If image void appears at a time, is No Refer to [7.2.2.9 Void of
everything on [7.2.2.9 Void of Image] on Image] and check all the
Service Manual clear? points.
Cause analysis with 3 Does a crease appear before 2x Yes Before 2x standard;
image void location standard length? Go to step 4.
No After 2x standard;
Go to step 7.
Fuser Motor 3rd 4 Increase Fuser Motor 3rd Speed that No Increase the 3rd Speed in
Speed corresponds to the media width/type in another 1 (faster) until
1 (for faster speed) on Adjustment creases disappear.
slack appears Mode.
before 2x standard Go to step 5.
A3 /12”/11” 074 080
A2 /18”/17” 110 116
A1 /24”/22” 146 152
30” 440 446
A0 /36”/34” 182 188
Does this fix crease problem?
7-36 K124sm7e2
Image Void Check 5 Is there any image void after 2x Yes Image void remains, or has
standard length? just come after step 4;
Go to step 6.
Note that step 4 would result in image

void there.
No OK
Fuser Motor 4th 6 Decrease Fuser Motor 4th Speed that Yes OK
Speed corresponds to the media width/type in No Decrease the 4th Speed in
1 (for slower speed) on Adjustment another 1 (slower) until
print pulled too Mode. image void disappears.
fast before 2x
standard 4th Speed Plain Tracing
A3 /12”/11” 678 ---
A2 /18”/17” 690 ---
A1 /24”/22” 702 ---
30” 726 728
A0 /36”/34” 714 716

Fuser Motor 3rd 7 Increase Fuser Motor 3rd Speed that Yes Go to step 9.
Speed corresponds to the media width/type in
1 (for faster speed) on Adjustment
Mode.

A3 /12”/11” 074 080
A2 /18”/17” 110 116
A1 /24”/22” 146 152
30” 440 446
A0 /36”/34” 182 188
Does this fix crease problem?

8 a) No image void seen up to step 7; Yes Go to step 10.
Is there any image void that has just

come after step 7?
b) Crease and image void seen at a

time up to step 7; No - no image void
- no image void shift
Is there any image void shift from after Go back to step 7.
2x standard length to before 2x
standard?
9 After crease disappears, is there any No OK
image void?
Fuser Motor 4th 10 First decrease the 3rd Speed (slower) No Increase the 4th Speed in
Speed in 1. another 1 (faster) until
crease and image void
slack appears after Increase Fuser Motor 4th Speed that disappear.
2x standard corresponds to the media width/type in
1 (for faster speed) on Adjustment
Mode.
4th Speed Plain Tracing

A3 /12”/11” 678 ---
A2 /18”/17” 690 ---
A1 /24”/22” 702 ---
30” 726 728
A0 /36”/34” 714 716
Does this fix image void / crease

problem?
7-37 K124sm7e2
7. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects
7. 3. 1 Countermeasures - Scanner operation
7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Old Scanner)
(Scanner does not transport)
order
Sensor 1 Is the original detected? No 1. Tap the UI screen to
(Insertion) cancel the sleep mode.
2. Switch the UI screen to

Copy or Scan mode.
3. Check the sensor which

detects the leading edge
of original.
If broken replace it.
Check this sensor.
USB Cable 2 Is the USB Cable connected correctly? No Connect it correctly.

Data Controller 3 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
Board the Data Controller Board?
7. 3. 1. 2 Original can not be set (New Scanner)

(Scanner does not transport)
order
Sensor 1 Is the original detected? No 1. Tap the UI screen to
(Insertion) cancel the sleep mode.
2. Switch the UI screen to

Copy or Scan mode.
3. Check the sensor which

detects the leading edge
of original.
If broken replace it.
Check this sensor.
Motor 2 Open the Upper Unit and push the NO 1. Check if the motor
Open Switch. Does this make the motor harness is firmly
rotate? connected.
2. Replace the motor.
7-38 K124sm7e2
Sensor 3 Open the Upper Unit and push the NO 1. Check if the motor
(Home position) Open Switch. Does the feeding roller harness is firmly
rotate to the opposite (rewinding) connected.
direction first then to the normal 2. Check if the position of
(feeding) direction? encoder against the
sensor is correct or not.
(If it rotates to the opposite direction 3. Replace the sensor.
then stops without rotating to the
normal direction, this behaviour is
abnormal.)
USB Cable 4 Is the USB Cable connected correctly? No Connect it correctly.
7. 3. 1. 3 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set

position
order
Foreign substance 1 Is there any foreign substance under Yes Remove it.
the Upper Unit?
Motor 2 Does the Motor rotate? No Check the Motor, and
replace it if broken.
+24VDC 3 Is +24VDC supplied to the scanner? No Check the DC Power Supply
on the printer part.
Replace it if broken.
7. 3. 1. 4 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop)

order
Sensor 1 Is any sensor broken? Yes Replace it.
7. 3. 1. 5 Original is mis-fed
order
the Upper Unit?
7. 3. 1. 6 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on

order
the Upper Unit, which blocks the light of
sensor?
7-39 K124sm7e2
7. 3. 1. 7 Scanner is not recognized
order
USB Driver 1 Does the PC recognize USB? No Check the USB Driver in
Device Manager.
USB Cable 2 Is there any problem with the USB Yes Replace the USB Cable.
cable, such as breakage, short-circuit
and damage of connector pin?
DC Power Supply 3 Is the DC Power Supply on the printer No Replace the DC Power
part normal? Supply.
Data Controller 4 Prepare another PC which can Yes Replace the Data Controller
Board recognize another type of USB PCB.
Scanner.
Is it also impossible to recognize the
K124SC with this PC?
7-40 K124sm7e2
7. 3. 2 Countermeasures – Scan Image Quality
7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black
order
Calibration 1 Can you fix the problem if you make Yes OK
Shading (Calibration)?
(Refer to [8.13.4.1 Shading].)
(Old Scanner)

(New Scanner)
Cable of CIS 2 Is the cable of each CIS connected No Connect it properly, or
properly? replace the cable if it is
broken.
LED of CIS 3 Is the LED of each CIS lighting? No 1. Check the DC Power
Supply (+24V) of the
printer part.
Replace it if broken.
2. Replace the CIS.
3. Replace the Data
Controller Board.
7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines

order
Scan Glass 1 Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Yes Clean / replace it.
Glass?
(Old Scanner)

(New Scanner)
Feeding rollers 3 Are feeding rollers dirty? Yes Clean them.
CIS 4 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the CIS?
7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines

order
Glass?
(Old Scanner)

(New Scanner)
Feeding rollers 3 Are feeding rollers dirty? Yes Clean them.
CIS 4 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the CIS?
7-41 K124sm7e2
7. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks
order
Position?
(Refer to [8.13.4.3 Position].)
(Old Scanner)
(Refer to [8.14.6.2 Stitching].)

(New Scanner)
7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks

order
Position?
(Refer to [8.13.4.3 Position].)
(Old Scanner)
(Refer to [8.14.6.2 Stitching].)

(New Scanner)
7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good

order
Glass?
Resolution 2 Is the resolution setting proper? No Adjust it properly.
7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right

order
(Old Scanner)

(New Scanner)
7-42 K124sm7e2
7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration
If the cursor position in the screen does not correctly match the tapped position on the panel, the
touch screen should be calibrated so that the cursor is located directly underneath your finger or a
stylus.
The screen shows any available options. This may vary from the actual one
2. Press [Service].
The screen shows any available options. This may vary by KIP model or your system
7-43 K124sm7e3
4. Service Configuration screen is displayed. Press [OK].
5. Make sure that a wrench symbol is indicated at the upper right of the screen.
Press [Reset] to close UI operation window.
7-44 K124sm7e3
6. Tap Diagnostics folder twice as a double-click.
Run the shortcut “TouchScreen Configure Utility” for touch screen calibration.
7-45 K124sm7e3
7. Select [Tools] tab.
8. Press [Draw Test] to check that the touch screen

correctly detects a tapped position.
NOTE
Using a stylus is recommended for easy and accurate touch screen calibration.
Do not use any sharp instrument.
9. Test screen will appear.
7-46 K124sm7e3
10. Tap a certain point and check the cursor appears directly underneath a stylus.
For example, suppose you tap the point shown

the next figure.
Tap this cross
The cursor will appear just underneath the tapped point in a correct condition (calibration is not
necessary).
Cursor matches the tap point
Cursor
Tap point
If the cursor appears an unintended position, the touch screen should be calibrated.
Cursor does not match the tap point
Cursor
Tap point
7-47 K124sm7e3
11. Tap [Quit] to close Test screen.
12. Press [4 Points Calibration].
13. On Calibration screen, a blinking X symbol on the bottom left can be seen.
Press the X until it stops blinking with a beep.
NOTE
Press the X symbol for several seconds before the progress bar at the bottom reaches the
end.
7-48 K124sm7e3
14. The X disappears and the next one will come in the following order:
bottom right, top right, top left.
Perform the same way for the other 3 points.
15. When all the 4 points are pressed successfully, Calibration screen disappears and the
following dialog appears. Press [OK].
16. Press [OK] to finish touch screen calibration.
7-49 K124sm7e3
17. Run the shortcut “Restart KIP UI” for KIP UI operation.
7-50 K124sm7e3
7. 5 Internal Counter Error
The KIP 7100 has 2 kinds of the software counter.
One is “Print Count”, this is shown in “? Help” screen as “Counter A”. The other is “Total Count”,
this can be seen NOT in the UI program screen but KIP Service Software.
The counter values are stored on PW12420 PCB Assy and the HDD of IPS at the same time.
The KIP 7100 has a backup system for the counter values. If one of them gets lost, the UI asks
“which counter value has been lost, PW12420 or HDD?”
1. “Internal Counter Error” appears. Press [Continue].
2. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
3. Answer to the question by either Yes or No and press [Confirm].
Action Selection
Replacing
PW12420 PCB
Yes
Replacing
HDD
No
Reghost or Format
HDD
No
No action
No
Yes Æ The counter values in the HDD will be written to the PW12420 PCB Assy.
No Æ The counter values in PW12420 PCB Assy will be written to the HDD.
7-51 K124sm7e3
Chapter 8
Service Mode / Utility
Page
8. 1 General Information of KIP Service Software 8- 1
8. 2 KIP Service Software Overview 8- 2

8. 2. 1 Launching KIP Service Software 8- 4
8. 2. 2 Closing KIP Service Software 8- 7
8. 2. 3 Log In screen 8- 8
8. 2. 4 Service Mode Home 8- 9
8. 3 Signal Status Mode 8-10

8. 3. 1 Monitoring Signal Status 8-11
8. 3. 2 Input / Output Signal List 8-14
8. 4 Information Mode 8-16

8. 4. 1 Monitoring Analog Data 8-20
8. 4. 2 List of Analog Data Monitor 8-22
8. 4. 3 Browsing Jam History 8-23
8. 4. 4 Browsing Error History 8-24
8. 5 Operation Check Mode 8-25

8. 5. 1 Checking Device Operation 8-26
8. 5. 2 Device List 8-28
8. 6 Adjustment Mode 8-29

8. 6. 1 Changing Setting Value 8-31
8. 6. 2 Setting Item List 8-36
8. 6. 3 Setting Item Explanation 8-52
8. 6. 3. 1 Leading Registration (No. 000 & 001) 8-52
8. 6. 3. 2 Trailing Margin (No. 002 & 003) 8-52
8. 6. 3. 3 Side Margin (Left & Right) (No. 004) 8-53
8. 6. 3. 4 Side Registration (No. 005 to 007) 8-54
8. 6. 3. 5 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block (No.008 to 010) 8-55
8. 6. 3. 6 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block
(No.011 to 013) 8-57
8. 6. 3. 7 Vertical Alignment of Pixels between Blocks (No.014 & 015) 8-59
8. 6. 3. 8 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) (No.016) 8-60
8. 6. 3. 9 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) (No.017) 8-60
8. 6. 3.10 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of a long print) (No.018) 8-61
8. 6. 3.11 Leading Margin (No.019) 8-63
8. 6. 3.12 Cut Length 4 (Compensation of a long print) (No.020) 8-64
8. 6. 3.13 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027) 8-65
8. 6. 3.14 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution (No.028) 8-65
8. 6. 3.15 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034) 8-66
8. 6. 3.16 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.035) 8-66
8. 6. 3.17 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.037) 8-67
8. 6. 3.18 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.038) 8-68
8. 6. 3.19 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044) 8-69
8. 6. 3.20 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No.045) 8-70
8. 6. 3.21 Warm Sleep – Fuser Temperature (No.046) 8-70
8. 6. 3.22 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.048 & 049) 8-71
8. 6. 3.23 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.050) 8-72
K124sm8e1
8. 6. 3.24 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No.051) 8-72
8. 6. 3.25 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052) 8-73
8. 6. 3.26 Feed Clutch (CL3) OFF time applied to long print (No.053 & 054) 8-74
8. 6. 3.27 Metric or Inch (No.055) 8-75
8. 6. 3.28 Language (No.056) 8-75
8. 6. 3.29 Interface Communication Setting (No.057) 8-75
8. 6. 3.30 Recognition of paper Tray (No.058) 8-75
8. 6. 3.31 Counter Value (No.059) 8-75
8. 6. 3.32 Maximum Length (No.060) 8-76
8. 6. 3.33 Stacking Device setting (No.061) 8-76
8. 6. 3.34 Operation of Fuser Roller (No.062) 8-76
8. 6. 3.35 Cut Length 5 & 6 (Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film)
(No. 063 & 064) 8-77
8. 6. 3.36 Drum Reverse Rotation Period (No.065) 8-78
8. 6. 3.37 Fuser Motor Reverse Setting (No.066) 8-78
8. 6. 3.38 Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067) 8-79
8. 6. 3.39 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper
(Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.070 to 075, 678, 679) 8-80
(Tracing paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.076 to 081, 680, 681) 8-83
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.082 to 087, 682, 683) 8-84
(Special plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.088 to 093, 684, 685) 8-85
(Special tracing paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.094 to 099, 686, 687) 8-86
(Special film / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.100 to 105, 688, 689) 8-87
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”) (No.118 to 123, 694, 695) 8-90
(Special plain paper / A2, 18” & 17”) (No.124 to 129, 696, 697) 8-91
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.154 to 159, 706, 707) 8-96
(Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22”) (No.160 to 165, 708, 709) 8-97
K124sm8e1
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.190 to 195, 718, 719) 8-102
(Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34”) (No.196 to 201, 720, 721) 8-103
8. 6. 3.63 Main Motor Speed (No.310 to 315) 8-106
8. 6. 3.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36”/34”/30”/24”/22”/A0/B1/A1) (No.316 to 321) 8-106
8. 6. 3.65 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.322 to 327) 8-106
8. 6. 3.66 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper
(Plain paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.328 to 333) 8-107
(Tracing paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.334 to 339) 8-108
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.340 to 345) 8-109
(Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.346 to 351) 8-110
(Special tracing paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.352 to 357) 8-111
(Special film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.358 to 363) 8-112
(Plain paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.364 to 369) 8-113
(Tracing paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.370 to 375) 8-114
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.376 to 381) 8-115
(Special plain paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.382 to 387) 8-116
(Special tracing paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.388 to 393) 8-117
(Special film / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.394 to 399) 8-118
(Plain paper / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.400 to 405) 8-119
(Tracing paper / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.406 to 411) 8-120
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.412 to 417) 8-121
(Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34”) (No.418 to 423) 8-122
(Special tracing paper / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.424 to 429) 8-123
(Special film / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.430 to 435) 8-124
(Plain paper / 30”) (No.436 to 441, 726, 727) 8-125
(Tracing paper / 30”) (No.442 to 447, 728, 729) 8-126
(Film / 30”) (No.448 to 453, 730, 731) 8-127
(Special plain paper / 30”) (No.454 to 459, 732, 733) 8-128
(Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.460 to 465, 734, 735) 8-129
(Special film / 30”) (No.466 to 471, 736, 737) 8-130
K124sm8e1
(Plain paper / 30”) (No.472 to 477) 8-131
(Tracing paper / 30”) (No.478 to 483) 8-132
(Film / 30”) (No.484 to 489) 8-133
(Special plain paper / 30”) (No.490 to 495) 8-133
(Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.496 to 501) 8-134
(Special film / 30”) (No.502 to 507) 8-134
8. 6. 3.96 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge
(Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.508 to 510) 8-135
8. 6. 3.98 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge
8. 6. 3.99 Judgment Value for Additional Cut Length
for Non-standard Size Prints (No.613 to 616) 8-136
8. 6. 3.100 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
(No.617 to 620) 8-138
8. 6. 3.101 Toner Supply Roller Bias (No.621) 8-138
8. 6. 3.102 Regulation Bias (No.622) 8-138
8. 6. 3.103 Density Sensor Standard Output (No.623) 8-139
8. 6. 3.104 Density Sensor Analog Voltage (No.624) 8-139
8. 6. 3.105 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (12”/11”/A3) (No.625 to 630) 8-140
8. 6. 3.106 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (18”/17”/15”/A2) (No.631 to 636) 8-140
8. 6. 3.107 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (24”/22”/A1) (No.637 to 642) 8-141
8. 6. 3.108 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1) (No.643 to 648) 8-141
8. 6. 3.109 Density Sensor Output Monitor (No.649) 8-142
8. 6. 3.110 Regulation Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 2 & 3 (No.650) 8-142
8. 6. 3.111 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No.651) 8-143
8. 6. 3.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652) 8-144
8. 6. 3.113 Minimum Density (No.653) 8-146
8. 6. 3.114 Regulation Bias Maximum (No.654) 8-146
8. 6. 3.115 Density Measure Interval (No.655, 656) 8-146
8. 6. 3.116 Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 (No.657) 8-147
8. 6. 3.117 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (No.660 to 665) 8-148
8. 6. 3.118 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (No.666 to 671) 8-148
8. 6. 3.119 Fuser Motor Speed (18”/17”/15”/12”/11”/A2/A3) (No.672 to 677) 8-149
8. 6. 3.120 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed 4 for Roll (No.678 to 736) 8-149
8. 6. 3.121 Standby - Fuser Temperature (No.738, 739) 8-150
8. 6. 3.122 Assist Fan Off Timing (No.740 to 742) 8-150
(36”/34”/30”/A0/B1) (No.643 to 648) 8-151
8. 6. 3.124 Roll 2 Forward Standby ON/OFF (No.746) 8-151
8. 6. 3.125 Roll 2 Forward Standby Position Adjustment (No.747) 8-151
8. 6. 3.126 Roll 2 Rewind Timer (No. 748) 8-151
8. 6. 3.127 Tracing Mode (No. 749) 8-152
8. 6. 3.128 Roll 1 Setting Mode (No. 750) 8-152
8. 6. 3.129 Disable HV Error Detection Mode (No. 751) 8-152
8. 6. 3.130 Auto Initial Cut After Long Print (No. 753, 754) 8-153
8. 6. 3.131 Length for Forced Initial Cut Before Print (No. 755) 8-153
8. 6. 3.132 Leading Registration for Paper Tray (No. 756) 8-154
8. 6. 3.133 Trailing Margin for Paper Tray (No. 757) 8-154
8. 6. 3.134 Side Registration for Paper Tray (No. 758) 8-155
8. 6. 4 Creating Backup 8-156
8. 6. 5 Restoring Configuration from Backup 8-156
K124sm8e1
8. 7 Running Mode (Factory Use Only) 8-159
8. 8 Jam/Error Mask Mode 8-159

8. 8. 1 Mask List 8-162
8. 8. 2 Masking Jam 8-163
8. 8. 3 Masking Error 8-166
8. 9 Test Print Mode 8-169

8. 9. 1 Making Test Print 8-171
8. 9. 2 Built-in Test Pattern 8-173
8. 10 Factory Adjustment Mode (Factory Use Only) 8-173
8. 11 Special Operation Mode 8-174

8.11.1 Special Operation List 8-176
8.11.2 Clearing Fuser Error, Jam/Error History 8-177
8.11.3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process 8-179
8.11.4 Toner Supply Mode 8-181
8. 12 Send Firmware Mode 8-188

8.12.1 Sending Firmware to Printer 8-189
8. 13 KIP Scanner Utility (For Old Scanner) 8-193

8.13. 1 Installation 8-193
8.13. 1. 1 Installing USB Driver 8-193
8.13. 1. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility 8-196
8.13. 2 Starting KIP Scanner Utility 8-199
8.13. 3 Displaying Scanner Information 8-200
8.13. 4 Scanner Adjustment 8-201
8.13. 4. 1 Shading (Calibration) 8-201
8.13. 4. 2 Feed Distance (1:1) 8-208
8.13. 4. 3 Position (Stitching) 8-216
8.13. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware 8-226
8. 14 K129 Diag (For New Scanner) 8-228

8.14. 1 K129 Diag Overview 8-228
8. 14. 1. 1 K129 Diag System Requirements 8-228
8. 14. 1. 2 K129 Diag Tree Diagram of Screen Hierarchy 8-229
8.14. 2 Starting K129 Diag 8-230
8.14. 3 Version 8-234
8.14. 4 Backup Data 8-235
8.14. 4. 1 Changing Backup Data 8-235
8.14. 4. 2 Saving the Current Backup Data 8-240
8.14. 4. 3 Editing Backup Data File 8-242
8.14. 4. 4 Restoring Backup Data 8-243
8.14. 4. 5 Backup Data List 8-246
0 Lead Regist 8-250
1 T Margin 8-250
5 ED Gamma Select 8-250
6 Sleep Time 8-250
9 Doc. Entry Time 8-251
11 Doc. Entry Speed 8-251
12 Correction Time 8-251
15 Stitch Setting1 8-251
8.14. 4. 6 Saving Shading Data 8-252
8.14. 4. 7 Restoring Shading Data 8-254
K124sm8e1
8.14. 5 Update 8-256
8.14. 5. 1 Sending Firmware to Scanner 8-256
8.14. 6 Motion 8-259
8.14. 6. 1 Shading 8-260
8.14. 6. 2 Stitching 8-263
8.14. 6. 3 Operation Check 8-280
8.14. 7 Input Check 8-282
8.14. 7. 1 Getting Input Signal 8-282
8.14. 7. 2 Signal List 8-284
8.14. 8 Error Check 8-285
8.14. 8. 1 Getting Error Status 8-285
8.14. 8. 2 Error List 8-286
8.14. 9 Counter 8-287
8.14.10 Reset 8-287
K124sm8e1
8. 1 General Information of Service Mode
The system is equipped with advanced functions for field service to easily achieve its best
performance.
Service Mode contains the following categories.
- Signal Status Mode

- Information Mode
- Operation Check Mode
- Adjustment Mode
- Running Mode
- Jam/Error Mask Mode
- Test Print Mode
- Factory Adjustment Mode
- Special Operation Mode
- Send Firmware Mode
Reference
“KIP Service Software” acts as an interface to efficiently utilize any functions in Service
Mode.
For further information about how to operate KIP Service Software, see the next page.
NOTE
In Chapter 8, the screenshot images of KIP Service Software / UI screen / any other may
vary by KIP Printer model / your choice of optional features.
They are shown with available options.
8-1 K124sm8e2
8. 2 KIP Service Software Overview
KIP Service Software is an integrated utility application that provides intuitive operability by using
Touch Screen.
KIP Service Software is included in the controller and operates as an interface for monitoring,
checking and setting configuration for field service.
Canceling the UI program (controlling user operation such as Copy screen) allows Touch Screen
to be free to use Desktop on the controller’s operating system.
Launch KIP Service Software and now it is ready to access the printer’s Service Mode.
KIP Service Software Login Screen
Service Mode Home
8-2 K124sm8e2
KIP Service Software Tree Diagram of screen menu hierarchy
Login screen
Service Mode Home
(Signal Status Mode) Signal Status Monitor screen
(Information Mode) Information List screen
Data Monitor
Jam History
Error History
(Operation Check Mode) Operation Check screen
(Adjustment Mode) Adjustment Menu screen
Setting Configuration
Setting Backup/Restore
(Jam/Error Mask Mode) Mask Target screen
Jam Mask
Error Mask
(Test Print Mode) Basic Setting
Sub Setting
(Special Operation Mode) Operation Target screen
Confirmation Dialog
Counter Input screen
Fuser Unit Error Clear
Jam/Error History Clear
Bias Adjustment Reset
(Send Firmware Mode) Firmware screen
Running Mode, Factory Adjustment Mode (not available)
8-3 K124sm8e2
8. 2. 1 Launching KIP Service Software
2. Press [Service].
8-4 K124sm8e2
4. Service Configuration screen will appear.
5. Use the arrow keys to open [5/6 IPS Setup]. Press [Launch] in “KIP Service Software”.
8-5 K124sm8e2
6. Press [Yes].
7. Press [Login] to log in Service Mode.
8-6 K124sm8e2
8. 2. 2 Closing KIP Service Software
1. Return to Service Mode Home. Press [Logout].
2. In Login screen, press [Close].
Reference
Closing “KIP Service Software” automatically invoke UI Home screen to be ready for user
operation.
8-7 K124sm8e2
8. 2. 3 Log In screen
2 3
1 4
Name Function
1 Login Log in Service Mode
2 Wizard not available
3 Serial Port Configures Communication Port Settings between the controller
Setting and DC Controller PCB
It is not necessary to use this button in normal condition.
4 Close Press here to close KIP Service Software.
8-8 K124sm8e2
8. 2. 4 Service Mode Home
3 2
Name Function
1 Mode Select Press one of Mode Category buttons that you want to enter.
Signal Status Input / Output signal monitor

Information Analog data status monitor
Operation Check Electric device check
Adjustment Printer settings
Running not available
Jam/Error Mask Disables jam/error detection
Test Print Test pattern plot command
Factory Adjustment not available
Clears history, error status
Special Operation
Changes counter value
Send Firmware Sends firmware program to printer
2 Wizard not available

3 Logout Press here to log out Service Mode.
Returns to Log In screen
8-9 K124sm8e2
8. 3 Signal Status Mode
It is possible to monitor the status of any device signal input to / output from DC Controller PCB
with making prints.
For information about Signal Codes, Signal Names and their contents, see [8.3.2 Input / Output
Signal List].
Signal Status Monitor screen
2
1
Name Function
1 Signal Code / Displays Signal Code / Name in drop-down menu
Name Specify one item that you want to monitor.
2 Signal Monitor Displays the current status of the selected signal
3 Enter not available
4 Back Returns to Service Mode Home
For procedures to monitor device status, follow the instruction on the next page.
8-10 K124sm8e2
8. 3. 1 Monitoring Signal Status
1. Press [Device Status] in Service Mode Home.
Signal Code Group screen appears.
8-11 K124sm8e2
2. Press one Code Group button that contains the signal code that you want to monitor.
Signal Status Monitor screen appears.
Reference
For Signal Name/Code, see [8.3.2 Input / Output Signal List].
8-12 K124sm8e2
3. Specify one signal item that you want to monitor from Signal Name menu.
4. The current status of the device you have chosen is displayed in Status Monitor.
8-13 K124sm8e2
8. 3. 2 Input / Output Signal List
Signal Symbol IC Port Connector Signal Name Input / Status

Code Output
000 SW1 IC3-P20 J205-17 Input Switch 1 Input L : ON
005 --- IC3-P25 J202-7
006 --- IC3-P26 J202-8
007 --- IC3-P27 J215-3
008 MAN_S IC3-P40 J204-20 Manual Feed Sensor Input H : Paper detected
009 DOOR_OPN IC3-P41 J204-21 Roll Deck Open Input H : Open
010 SEP_S IC3-P42 J204-22 Separation Sensor Input L : Paper detected
011 HEAT_EXIT IC3-P43 J204-23 Exit Sensor Input L : Paper detected
012 --- IC3-P44 J204-24
013 HEAT_DOOR IC3-P45 J207-16 Heater Hatch Open Input L : Open
014 --- IC3-P46 J207-15
015 SIG_IN IC3-P47 J204-27 Stacker Input Input
016 ONLINE_LED IC3-60 J205-15 Online LED Output H : ON
017 --- IC3-61 J207-14
018 --- IC3-62 J215-7
019 --- IC3-63 J215-8
020 --- IC3-64 J207-13
021 SIG_OUT IC3-65 J204-28 Stacker Output Output
022 HEAT_BL_L IC3-66 J207-12 Fuser Blower (Low) Output H : ON
023 HEAT_BL_H IC3-67 J207-12 Fuser Blower (High) Output H : ON
024 MAMTR IC3-P10 J206-7 Main Motor Output H : Rotate
025 HEAT_M IC3-P11 J206-8 Fuser Motor Output H : Rotate
026 HV_1ST IC3-P12 J206-9 Image Corona Output H : Output
027 HV_TR IC3-P13 J206-10 Transfer Corona Output H : Output
028 HV_AC IC3-P14 J206-11 Separation Corona Output H : Output
029 BIAS_TRG IC3-P15 J206-12 Developer Bias Output H : Output
030 BIAS_SW IC3-P16 J206-13 Developer Bias Polarity Switch Output L : Positive Bias
031 --- IC3-P17 J206-14
032 H1_CW_CCW IC3-P30 J206-15 Main Motor Reversal Rotation Output H : Reverse
033 PRESS_M IC3-P31 J206-16 Developer Press Motor Output H : Rotate
034 TONER_M IC3-P32 J206-17 Hopper Motor Output H : Rotate
035 CLEAN_SW IC3-P33 J206-18 Cleaning Roller Voltage Output L : Positive
Polarity Switch
036 FEED_BL IC3-P34 J206-22 Blower (BL7) Control Output H : Rotate
037 HEAT1 IC3-P35 J206-25 SSR ON/OFF Signal 1 Output H : Heater Lamp
lights
038 COOL_BL IC3-P36 J206-26 Fuser Cooling Fan Output H : Rotate
039 POWER_OFF IC3-P37 J206-27 Power Switch Output Output H : OFF
040 ER2 IC3-P50 J207-3 Separation Lamp Control Output H : Lighting
041 COUNT IC3-P51 J207-4 Counter Output H : Counting up
042 HEAT_RY IC3-P52 J207-5 Fuser Relay Output H : ON
043 SLCT_CL IC3-P53 Clutch Selection (Roll 1 or 2) Output H : Roll 1
044 FOWE_CL IC3-P54 J207-6(R1) Roll 1&2 Feed Clutch Output H : ON
J207-8(R2)
045 BACK_CL IC3-P55 J207-9(R1) Roll 1&2 Back Clutch Output H : ON
J208-9(R2)
046 FEED_CL IC3-P56 J207-10 Feed Clutch Output H : ON
047 REGIST_CL IC3-P57 J207-11 Registration Clutch Output H : ON
048 COUNT_OPEN IC3-P80 J207-4 Counter Connection Detection Input
049 M_LD IC3-P81 J203-14 Main Motor Output Detection Input
050 FUMTR_LD IC3-P82 J203-15 Fuser Motor Output Detection Input
051 DIS_CN IC3-P83 J203-16 Developer Connection Input
Detection
052 HV1_LD IC3-P84 J203-17 Image Corona Output Input
Detection
053 TR_LD IC3-P85 J203-18 Transfer Corona Output Input
Detection
8-14 K124sm8e2
Signal Symbol IC Port Connector Signal Name Input / Status
Code Output
054 AC_LD IC3-P86 J203-19 Separation Corona Output Input
Detection
055 BIAS_LD IC3-P87 J203-20 Developer Bias Output Input
Detection
056 DA CLOCK IC3-P70 DA Conversion Clock
057 DA DI1 IC3-P71 DA Enable 1
058 DA BS1 IC3-P72 DA Data 1
059 DA DI2 IC3-P73 DA Enable 2
060 DA BS2 IC3-P74 DA Data 2
061 H2_CW_CCW IC3-P75 J215-4 Fuser Motor Reverse Output H : Reverse
062 HEAT2 IC3-P76 J215-5 SSR ON/OFF 2 Output H : Heater Lamp
lights
063 --- IC3-P77
064 --- IC3-P90 J215-9
065 --- IC3-P91 J215-10
066 --- IC3-P92 J215-12
067 DENS_SNS1 IC3-P93 J215-13 Density Sensor Output 1 H: On
068 --- IC3-P94 J215-14
069 --- IC3-P95 J215-15
070 --- IC3-P96 J215-16
071 LED2 IC3-P97 PW12420 PCB LED Output H: Lights
072 IBUSY_H IC1-P10 Data Output Busy Output H : Busy
073 IPRADY_L IC1-P11 Printer Ready Output L : Ready
074 IPREQ_L IC1-P12 Print Request Output L : Requested
075 PAGEBL IC1-P13 Print Request Output L : Print ON
076 TEST_H IC1-P14 Test Print Output H : Test Printing
077 I_POW_ON_A IC1-P15
078 LED_EN IC1-P16 LED Enable
079 CLEAN BIAS IC1-P17 J206-5 Cleaning Roller Bias Output H : Output
080 LCD_CLK IC1-P20 LCD Clock
081 LCD_DATA IC1-P21 LCD Data
082 LCD_EN IC1-P23 J205-6 LCD Enable
083 LCD_RW IC1-P24 J205-5 Data Read / Write Selection Output
084 LCD_RS IC1-P22 J205-4 LCD Input Selection Output
085 IC1-P25 J206-28 Main Motor Clock
086 IC1-P26 J206-6 Fuser Motor Clock
087 RESET_SIG IC1-P27 Reset Signal Output
088 RXD0 IC1-P32 Serial 0 Input Input
091 TXD0 IC1-P30 Serial 0 Output Output
094 MSCUTR IC1-P60 J204-5 Cutter Home Position Sensor Input L : Staying at
(Right) Home Position
095 MSCUTL IC1-P61 J204-6 Cutter Home Position Sensor Input L : Staying at
(Left) Home Position
096 MCUTL IC1-P63 J207-1 Cutter Motor 1 Output H : Rotate
097 MCUTR IC1-P62 J207-2 Cutter Motor 2 Output H : Rotate
098 IPRINT_L IC1-P34 Print Request Input L : Requested
099 IPCUT_L IC1-P64 Paper Cut Request Input L : Cutting
100 REGIST_S IC1-P65 J204-7 Registration Sensor Input H : Paper detected
101 R1_ENC_S IC1-P66 J204-8 Roll 1 Encoder Input
102 R2_ENC_S IC1-P67 J204-9 Roll 2 Encoder Input
103 VLC_OFF IC1-PG0 LCD Indication ON/OFF Output H : Indicating
104 PRESS_S IC1-PA5 J204-10 Developer Press Sensor Input L : Detecting
105 R1_SET_S IC1-PA6 J204-11 Roll 1 Set Sensor Input H : Paper detected
106 R2_SET_S IC1-PA7 J204-12 Roll 2 Set Sensor Input H : Paper detected
107 TONER_S AN5 J203-6 Toner Sensor Input H : Toner detected
108 R_EDGE IC1-PF7 J204-13 Feed Sensor Input H : Paper detected
109 FEED_ENC IC1-PF1 J204-26 Feed Encoder
---
---
8-15 K124sm8e2
8. 4 Information Mode
It is possible to monitor the analog voltage input sent by devices (such as Thermistor) to DC
Controller PCB. It is also possible to monitor the current Fuser temperature which is calculated
from the input voltage.
Information Mode includes the list of the latest 100 jam / service call error records.
Information Home screen
1 2 3 4
5 6
Name Function
1 No.00 - 32 Switches to Monitor screen
2 No.33 Switches to Jam History screen
3 No.34 Switches to Error History screen
4 Item List List of Data items and codes
5 Code Data Code 00 to 32
6 Item Number Explains the contents of the item
8-16 K124sm8e3
Monitor screen
2
4
Name Function
1 Code Data Code 00 to 32
2 Item Number Explains the contents of the listed items
3 Current Displays the current Analog Voltage and its calculated value for
Information the items to be monitored
4 Introduction Returns to Information Home screen
For information about items to be monitored, see [8.4.2 List of Analog Data Monitor].
8-17 K124sm8e3
Jam History screen
4
5
2 3
Name Function
1 Jam Information Displays the latest 100 jam records
2 Code Displays Jam Code “J-****”
3 Count Displays the counter value that the concerning jam occurred
4 Export Saves the records as a file
8-18 K124sm8e3
Error History screen
4
5
2 3
Name Function
1 Error Information Displays the latest 100 service call error records
2 Code Displays Jam Code “E-****”
3 Count Displays the counter value that the concerning error occurred
4 Export Saves the records as a file
8-19 K124sm8e3
8. 4. 1 Monitoring Analog Data
1. Press [Information] in Service Mode Home.
Information Home screen appears.
8-20 K124sm8e3
2. To monitor any available Analog Data value, open [No.00 - 32] tab to display Monitor screen.
8-21 K124sm8e3
8. 4. 2 List of Analog Data Monitor
Data Item Unit Remarks Contents

Code
00 Fuser Temp 1 Centigrade Calculated Value temperature detected by the thermistor on the center of
the Fuser Unit
01 Fuser Temp 2 Centigrade Calculated Value temperature detected by the thermistor on the right of
the Fuser Unit
02 (Reserved) - - -
03 Machine Temp Centigrade Calculated Value temperature detected on PW12420
04 (Reserved) - - -
05 Total Cut number of operation times in total for media cut with
any source / situation
06 Roll 1 Cit number of operation times for media cutting from Roll 1
07 Roll 2 Cit number of operation times for media cutting from Roll 2
08 Others Cut number of operation times for media cutting for trim cut
09 Total Image number of operation times in total for printing operation
with any source
10 R1 Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Roll 1
11 R2 Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Roll 2
12 M Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Bypass Feeder
13 Cassette Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Paper Tray
14 R1F Clutch number of operation times of Roll 1 Feed Clutch
15 R2F Clutch number of operation times of Roll 2 Feed Clutch
16 R1B Clutch number of operation times of Roll 1 Back Clutch
17 R2B Clutch number of operation times of Roll 2 Back Clutch
18 Feed Clutch number of operation times of Feed Clutch
19 Reg. Clutch number of operation times of Registration Clutch
20 Pickup Solenoid number of operation times of Pickup Solenoid
21 (Reserved) - - -
22 Stack Solenoid number of operation times of Stack Solenoid
23 Motor 1 Time minute total operation time of Main Motor
24 Motor 2 Time minute total operation time of Fuser Motor
25 LED ON Time minute total lighting-up time of LED Head
26 Motor 3 Time minute total operation time of Paper Tray Motor
27 Bias 3 Time minute operation time of Main Motor from the last Density
Measure
28 Density V0 no use
29 Density V1 no use
30 Density Vr no use
31 Density W Level no use
32 Density B Level no use
8-22 K124sm8e3
8. 4. 3 Browsing Jam History
To browse the machine’s jam history, open [No.33] tab to display Jam History screen.
[Export] creates “jaminfo.dat” that contains the currently recorded Jam History.
Reference
To clear the entire jam history record, see [8.11.1 Clearing Fuser Error, Jam/Error History].
8-23 K124sm8e3
8. 4. 4 Browsing Error History
To browse the machine’s service call error history, open [No.34] tab to display Error History screen.
[Export] creates “errinfo.dat” that contains the currently recorded Error History.
Reference
To clear the entire service call error history record, see [8.11.1 Clearing Fuser Error,
Jam/Error History].
8-24 K124sm8e3
8. 5 Operation Check Mode
It is possible to operate several electrical components independently, such as motor, clutch, and
fans.
Operation Check screen
1 2
4 3
Name Function
1 Signal Code / Displays Signal Code/Name in drop-down menu
Name Specify one item that you want to check.
2 Signal Status Displays the current status of the selected signal
3 Start Operates the electric device you have chosen
not available for sensors
8-25 K124sm8e3
8. 5. 1 Checking Device Operation
1. Press [Operation Check] in Service Mode Home.
Operation Check screen appears.
8-26 K124sm8e3
2. Specify one signal item that you want to monitor from Signal Code/Name menu.
3. The current status of the device you have chosen is displayed in Signal Status field.
Press [Enter] to operate / stop the device alone alternately.
8-27 K124sm8e3
8. 5. 2 Device List
Signal Signal Name Target item

Code
00 MAIN-TRG Main Motor
01 FMTR-TRG Fuser Motor
02 FMTR-REV Fuser Motor (reversal rotation)
03 PRESS-M Developer Press Motor
04 TONER-M Toner Supply Motor
05 --- Reserved
06 R1FD-CL Roll 1 Feed Clutch
07 R1BK-CL Roll 1 Back Clutch
08 R2FD-CL Roll 2 Feed Clutch
09 R2BK-CL Roll 2 Back Clutch
10 FEED-CL Feed Clutch
11 REG.-CL Registration Clutch
12 HV-IM Image Corona
13 HV-TR Transfer Corona
14 HV-AC Separation Corona
15 BIAS-TRG Developer Bias
16 BIAS-SW Positive/Negative selection of Developer Bias
17 CLEANTRG Cleaning Roller Bias
18 CLEAN-SW Positive/Negative selection of Cleaning Roller
Voltage
19 --- Reserved
20 TR LED Transfer Assist LED
21 HEAT1 Fuser Lamp 1
22 HEAT-RY Fuser Relay
23 H BLW(L) Fuser Blower (Low speed)
24 H BLW(H) Fuser Blower (High speed)
25 FEED-BLW Paper Feed Blower
26 COUNT Counter
27 M5_CUTL Cutter Motor (blade moves to left)
28 M5_CUTR Cutter Motor (blade moves to right)
29 POWER-SW Main Switch
30 --- Reserved
31 COOLERBL Cooling Fan
32 HEAT2 Fuser Lamp 2
33 DENS_S Density Sensor
34 --- Reserved
35 CMTR-TRG Paper Tray Motor
36 PICK-SL Pickup Solenoid
37 --- Reserved
38 STACK_SL Stacker Solenoid
8-28 K124sm8e3
8. 6 Adjustment Mode
It is possible to configure fundamental settings on the printer.

Every setting item has the corresponding Sub Mode Number.
Adjustment Menu screen
3 2
4 5
Name Function
1 Sub Mode Number Press one Code Group button that contains the signal code that
Group Button you want to configure.
2 Export Stores the current parameters in a RAM file for backup measure
3 Import Reads parameters stored in RAM file
4 Save Applies the parameters read by [Import]
5 Load Reads the current parameters on the printer
8-29 K124sm8e4
Setting Configuration screen
5
7 6
Name Function
1 Signal Name Displays Signal Code/Name in drop-down menu
Specify one item that you want to configure.
2 Preset Displays the current value of the selected item
3 Modify Displays an input value by using On-screen Keypad
4 Range Value An input value must be set within this range.
5 Numeric Key Use On-screen Keypad to input a value to be configured.
6 Apply Applies a value in “Modify” to the selected item
8-30 K124sm8e4
8. 6. 1 Changing Setting Value
1. Press [Adjustment] in Service Mode Home.
Adjustment Menu screen appears.
8-31 K124sm8e4
2. Press one Code Group button that contains the signal code that you want to configure.
Setting Configuration screen appears.
Reference
For correspondence between Signal Name/Code and Code Group button,

see [8.6.2 Setting Item List].
8-32 K124sm8e4
3. Specify one signal item that you want to configure from Signal Name menu.
4. The current value and available setting range of the item you have chosen are displayed.
8-33 K124sm8e4
5. To change a setting value, input a desired value with On-screen Keypad.
The value will be displayed in “Modify” area.
The setting item you have chosen is in hexadecimal, press [Fn] to input alphabetic characters A to F.
8-34 K124sm8e4
6. Press [Enter] to apply the new value to the printer.
The value in “preset” area will be changed to the new value.
8-35 K124sm8e4
8. 6. 2 Setting Item List
NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item Setting Item Unit Default Setting
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
000 Leading Registration (Roll paper) 1mm 19 19 1 to 40
001 Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper) 1mm 19 19 1 to 40
002 Trailing Margin (Roll paper) 1mm 9 9 1 to 40
003 Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper) 1mm 10 10 1 to 40
004 Side Margin (Left and right) 1mm 3 3 0 to 20
005 Side Registration (Cutsheet) 0.1mm 50 50 0 to 100
006 Side Registration (Roll 1) 0.1mm 50 50 0 to 100
007 Side Registration (Roll 2) 0.1mm 50 50 0 to 100
008 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block A) 1 microsecond 6 6 0 to 9
009 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block B) 1 microsecond 6 6 0 to 9
010 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block C) 1 microsecond 6 6 0 to 9
011 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block A) 1 microsecond 0 0 0 to 9
012 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block B) 1 microsecond 0 0 0 to 9
013 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block C) 1 microsecond 0 0 0 to 9
014 Vertical Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks A & B - 8 8 2 to 14
015 Vertical Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks B & C - 8 8 2 to 14
016 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) 1mm 50 50 0 to 100
017 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) 1mm 50 50 0 to 100
018 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print) 0.1mm 475 475 0 to 999
019 Leading Margin 0.1mm 30 30 0 to 50
020 Cut Length 4 (Individual Compensation for Roll 2) 0.16mm 50 50 0 to 100
021 Reserved
022 Developer Bias (Plain Paper) - 161 161 0 to 4FF
023 Developer Bias (Tracing Paper) - 161 161 0 to 4FF
024 Developer Bias (Film) - 161 161 0 to 4FF
025 Developer Bias (Special Media/Plain Paper) - 161 161 0 to 4FF
026 Developer Bias (Special Media/Tracing Paper) - 161 161 0 to 4FF
027 Developer Bias (Special Media/Film) - 161 161 0 to 4FF
028 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution - 0 0 0 to 255
029 Transfer Voltage (Plain Paper) - 366 366 0 to 4FF
030 Transfer Voltage (Tracing Paper) - 28A 28A 0 to 4FF
031 Transfer Voltage (Film) - 28A 28A 0 to 4FF
032 Transfer Voltage - 292 292 0 to 4FF
(Special Media/Plain Paper)
(Special Media/Tracing Paper)
(Special Media/Film)
035 Separation Corona ON Timing 1mm 50 50 0 to 100
036 Reserved
037 Transfer Corona ON Timing 1mm 48 48 0 to 100
038 Transfer Corona OFF Timing 1mm 20 20 0 to 100
o
039 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain) 1C 160 165 120 to 180
o
040 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing) 1C 160 170 120 to 180
o
041 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Film) 1C 177 170 120 to 180
o
042 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain) 1C 160 160 120 to 180
o
043 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing) 1C 160 160 120 to 180
o
044 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film) 1C 177 177 120 to 180
o
045 Fuser temperature to Start Idling 1C 120 120 100 to 140
o
046 Warm Sleep - Fuser Temperature 1C 100 100 100 to 160
047 Reserved
o
048 Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle) 1C 1 1 1 to 6
o
049 Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by) 1C 2 2 1 to 6
050 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor 1 Second 15 15 1 to 30
051 Toner Supply Motor Time 1 Second 10 10 1 to 15
052 Dot Enhancement Level ( Dither ) - 1 1 1 to 3
053 Feed Clutch OFF Time for Roll 1 Long Print 1msec. 230 230 80 to 360
054 Feed Clutch OFF Time for Roll 2 Long Print 1msec. 230 230 80 to 360
055 Metric or Inch - 1 0 0 to 1
056 Language - 1 1 0 to 1
057 Interface Communication Setting - 2 2 0 to 2
8-36 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
058 Recognition of Paper Tray - 0 0 0 to 1
059 Counter Value - 5 0 0 to 5
060 Maximum Length - 1 1 0 to 1
061 Stacking Device Setting - 0 0 0 to 1
062 Operation of Fuser Roller - 0 0 0 to 1
063 Cut length 5 (Compensation for Tracing Paper) - 100 100 0 to 200
064 Cut length 6 (Compensation for Film) - 100 86 0 to 200
065 Drum Reverse Time 1 millisecond 30 30 10 to 70
066 Fuser Motor Reverse Setting - 0 0 0 to 1
067 Operation of Separation Lamp - 5 5 1 to 7
068 Reserved
069 Reserved
070 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) 0.04mm/s 34 39 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
071 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) 0.5 seconds 1 1 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
072 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) 0.04mm/s 35 42 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
073 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) 0.5 seconds 1 1 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
074 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) 0.04mm/s 50 48 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
075 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) 0.5 seconds 5 5 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
090 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting (Roll) 0.04mm/s 40 40 0 to 80
8-37 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
8-38 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
8-39 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
8-40 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
214 Reserved -
to
309
8-41 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
310 Main Motor Speed (Plain paper) - 36 36 0 to 80
311 Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper) - 40 40 0 to 80
312 Main Motor Speed (Film) - 40 40 0 to 80
313 Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper) - 40 40 0 to 80
314 Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper) - 40 40 0 to 80
315 Main Motor Speed (Special film) - 40 40 0 to 80
316 Fuser Motor Speed - 31 35 0 to 80
(36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Plain)
(36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Tracing)
(36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Film)
(36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Plain)
(36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Tracing)
(36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Film)
322 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper) 1mm 25 25 0 to 100
323 Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper) 1mm 25 25 0 to 100
324 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) 1mm 22 25 0 to 100
325 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper) 1mm 18 18 0 to 100
326 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper) 1mm 18 18 0 to 100
327 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film) 1mm 23 23 0 to 100
328 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) 0.04mm/s 30 31 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
329 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) 0.5 seconds 3 3 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
330 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) 0.04mm/s 32 36 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
331 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) 0.5 seconds 4 4 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
332 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) 0.04mm/s 31 38 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
333 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) 0.5 seconds 6 6 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
8-42 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
8-43 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
8-44 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Plain Paper / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
8-45 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”)
(Special Media / Tracing / 30”)
(Special Media / Film / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Roll) (Film / 30”)
8-46 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
486 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Cut sheet) 0.04mm/s 40 40 0 to 80
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
508 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge - 4ff 4ff 9fe
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
511 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge - 62f 62f 9fe
(Plain paper)
512 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge - 69f 69f 9fe
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
514 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge - 13 17 0 to 80
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
517 Reserved
to
612
8-47 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
613 Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard 1mm 1 1 1 to 20
Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
Size Prints (24”/ 20”/ A1)
Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
617 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints 1mm 0 0 0 to 35
(36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
(24”/ 22”/ A2)
(18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
(12”/ 11”/ A3)
621 Toner Supply Roller Bias 286 286 0 to 800
622 Regulation Bias 270 270 0 to 800
623 Density Sensor Standard Output 0 0 0 to 614
624 Density Sensor Analog Voltage 0 0 0 to 614
o
625 Print - Fuser Temperature Side 1C 160 145 120 to 180
(Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Special / Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Special / Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Special media / Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Special / Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Special / Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Special / Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Special / Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
o
(Specia / Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Special / Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Special / Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Special / Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
649 Density Sensor Output Monitor 1 1 0 to 4
8-48 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
650 Regulation Bias Increment forAuto Adjustment Level 2 and 3 0.5V 80 80 0 to 200
651 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment 0.5V 0 0 0 to 800
652 Density Compensation On/Off - 1 1 0 to 1
653 Minimum Density 135 135 110 to 150
654 Regulation Bias Maximum 500 500 160 to 800
655 Density Measure Interval at power on 1 hour 18 18 1 to 100
656 Density Measure Interval at Print Completion 1 hour 18 18 1 to 100
657 Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 and after 158 158 0 to 400
658 Reserved
659 Reserved
o
660 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain) 1C 160 160 120 to 180
o
661 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing) 1C 160 170 120 to 180
o
662 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Film) 1C 177 177 120 to 180
o
663 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain) 1C 160 160 120 to 180
o
664 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing) 1C 160 160 120 to 180
o
665 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film) 1C 177 170 120 to 180
o
666 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) 1C 159 159 120 to 180
o
667 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) 1C 159 180 120 to 180
o
668 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Film) 1C 177 170 120 to 180
o
669 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) 1C 159 159 120 to 180
o
670 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) 1C 159 159 120 to 180
o
671 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) 1C 177 170 120 to 180
672 Fuser Motor Speed 50 50 0 to 80
(18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Plain)
(18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Tracing)
(18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Film)
(18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special / Plain)
(18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special / Tracing)
(18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special / Film)
678 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) 0.04mm/s 34 37 0 to 80
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
679 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) 0.5 seconds 6 8 0 to 300
(Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
8-49 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Tracing / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
(Film / 30”)
8-50 K124sm8e4
No. Value range
USA EUR
/ AS
o
738 Standby - Fuser Temperature Center 1C 167 167 120 to 180
o
739 Standby - Fuser Temperature Side 1C 155 155 120 to 180
740 Assist Fan Off Timing (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 8 4 0 to 8
741 Assist Fan Off Timing (24” / 22” / A1) 8 4 0 to 8
742 Assist Fan Off Timing (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) 8 6 0 to 8
743 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge 0 0 0 to 80
(36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) (Plain)
(36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) (Tracing)
(36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) (Film)
746 Roll 2 Forward Standby 0 0 0 to 1
747 Roll 2 Forward Standby Position Adjustment mm 0 0 0 to 50
748 Roll 2 Rewind Timer minute 15 15 1 to 15
749 Tracing Mode 0 0 0 to 1
750 Roll 1 Setting Mode 0 0 0 to 1
751 Disable HV Error Detection Mode 0 0 0 to 1
752 (Reserved)
753 Auto Initial Cut After Long Print (Length) 100mm 10 10 10 to 60
754 Auto Initial Cut After Long Print (Number of sheet) 0 0 0 to 3
755 Length for Forced Initial Cut Before Print mm 594 594 210 to 600
756 Leading Registration for Paper Tray mm
757 Trailing Margin for Paper Tray mm
758 Side Registration for Paper Tray mm
8-51 K124sm8e4
8. 6. 3 Setting Item Explanation
Item No. starts with “4”. For example, KIP Service Software shows 4000, this section shows
“No.000”.
8. 6. 3. 1 Leading Registration (No. 000 & 001)

It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of the media.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the
trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger.
Item No. Setting Item Default value Setting Step of

USA EUR/ASIA range increment
000 Leading Registration (Roll paper) 19 19 1 to 40 1mm
001 Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper) 19 19 1 to 40 1mm
Leading Registration
value is increased. value is decreased.
8. 6. 3. 2 Trailing Margin (No. 002 & 003)

It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin.
The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.

002 Trailing Margin (Roll paper) 9 9 1 to 40 1mm
003 Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper) 10 10 1 to 40 1mm
Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased.
Trailing Margin
NOTE
Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much.
8-52 K124sm8e5
8. 6. 3. 3 Side Margin (Left & Right) (No. 004)
It is possible to adjust the amount of side margin. (Both left and right)
Each side margin becomes 1mm wider if you increase the setting value.
(As a result the width of print image becomes 2mm narrower.)
Default value Setting range Step of increment

USA EUR/ASIA
3 3 0 to 20 1mm
Setting value is increased.
Side Margin
Setting value is decreased.
NOTE
Image quality created with a reduced side margin (less than 3 in the setting value) is not
guaranteed.
8-53 K124sm8e5
8. 6. 3. 4 Side Registration (No. 005 to 007)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the side edge of the media.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, image is shifted 0.1mm to the right.

005 Side Registration (Cutsheet) 50 50 0 to 100 0.1mm
006 Side Registration (Roll 1) 50 50 0 to 100 0.1mm
007 Side Registration (Roll 2) 50 50 0 to 100 0.1mm
Side Registration
8-54 K124sm8e5
8. 6. 3. 5 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block
(No.008 to 010)
It is possible to make the whole image of each Image Block (A, B and C) darker or lighter
independently by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Main Pixels.
As a result an even image density can be accomplished among 3 Image Blocks.
The whole image of the concerning Image Block becomes darker if you increase the setting value.

008 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel 6 6 0 to 9 1 micro second
(Image Block A : Left)
(Image Block B : Center)
(Image Block C : Right)
Block A Block B Block C
Decrease the value of Increase the value of

“008” to make the image “010” to make the image
of Block A lighter. of Block C darker.
Setting value is decreased. Default Setting value is increased

.
Main pixel
Supplemental
pixel
Actual print image
For the detail information about “Main Pixel” and “Supplemental Pixel”, see the reference
column in [8.6.3.6 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel)].
8-55 K124sm8e5
NOTE
(1) The LED Strobe Times specified in these 008, 009 and 010 are directly applied to the
Test Print.
If the setting values are 7 (for 008), 8 (for 009) and 9 (for 010), for example, the
actual LED Strobe Times are also 7 (for block A), 8 (for block B) and 9 (for block C).
In case of Test Print

008: 7 microseconds
009: 8 microseconds
010: 9 microseconds
(7) (8) (9)
But in case of a copy or a plot, the density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the
output device (image scanner or controller) is applied to the Image Block A.
And only the difference of setting values among 008, 009 and 010 are applied to the
actual LED Strobe Time.
If the density command from the output device is 5 microsecond and the setting values
are 7 (for 008), 8 (for 009) and 9 (for 010), for example, the actual LED Strobe Times
are 5 (for block A), 6 (for block B) and 7 (for block C).
In case of copy or plot

Density command from output device: 5 microseconds
008: 7 microseconds
009: 8 microseconds
010: 9 microseconds
(5) (6) (7)
(2) If the value of density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the output device is larger
than “9 microsecond” (Max.), it is automatically corrected to “9 microsecond”.
If it is smaller than “0 microsecond” (Min.), it is corrected to “0 microsecond” similarly.
8-56 K124sm8e5
8. 6. 3. 6 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block
(No.011 to 013)
If such image as a diagonal line looks too weak, you can make it clearer by changing the LED
Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels.
The adjustment is available for each Image Block independently.
A diagonal line comes to look clearer if you increase the setting value, as the LED Strobe Time for
the Supplemental Pixels becomes longer.

011 LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel 0 0 0 to 9 1 micro second
(Image Block A : Left)
(Image Block B : Center)
(Image Block C : Right)
Increase the setting values of “011” and “013”

to make the images of these blocks clearer.
Setting value is decreased. Default Setting value is increased.
Main pixel
Supplemental
pixel
Actual print image
For the detail information about “Main Pixel” and “Supplemental Pixel”, see the reference
column on the next page.
8-57 K124sm8e5
Reference
Normally the KIP 7100 takes 600 times of image exposure per inch for the vertical direction
as its resolution is 600DPI. Pixels created by this normal timing are called [Main Pixel].
When a specific image pattern (like a diagonal line) is printed, however, the KIP 7100 will
make additional image exposure between vertically neighboring 2 Main Pixels. This
additional image exposure is completed within a very short time. The pixel created by this
additional process is called [Supplemental Pixel].
Normal image pattern In case of a certain

image pattern
Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels
Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels are provided so as to fill the space between Main Pixels.
When we compare a vertical / horizontal 1 dot line and a diagonal 1 dot line, for example, the
diagonal one looks vague and rough although the vertical / horizontal one looks clear and
smooth.
This is because the diagonal line has a wider space between Main Pixels than the vertical /
horizontal one.
If this space is filled with the Supplemental Pixel, diagonal line comes to look smoother and
clearer.
No Supplemental Pixel Supplemental Pixels are provided.
Direction of
print
Print image Print image

(Diagonal line looks vague and rough.) (Diagonal Line looks clear and smooth)
8-58 K124sm8e5
8. 6. 3. 7 Vertical Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks
(No.014 & 015)
It is possible to align the pixels between Image Blocks if there is a gap of pixels.
The Image Block B is the standard, and both the Image Blocks A and C can be shifted vertically.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the whole pixels of the concerning Image Block is shifted
“1 line (pixel)” to the trailing edge side.
These can be used if a horizontal line has a step at the border of the Blocks.

014 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between 8 8 2 to 14 1 pixel
Image Blocks A & B
015 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between 8 8 2 to 14 1 pixel
Image Blocks B & C
Decrease the value of

“014” to shift the block A
to the leading edge side.
Decrease the value of

“015” to shift the block C
to the trailing edge side.
8-59 K124sm8e5
8. 6. 3. 8 Cut Length 1 (length information provided)
(No.016)
It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter.
This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is provided with the length
information. (this is command used on all standard pages printed from the IPS)
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the print length becomes 1mm longer.

USA EUR/ASIA
50 50 0 to 100 1mm
Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased

.
Cut length
8. 6. 3. 9 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided)

(No.017)
It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter.
This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is not provided with the length
information. (This is may only be used on LONG prints over 6 meters on the IPS)
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the print length becomes 1mm longer.

USA EUR/ASIA
50 50 0 to 100 1mm
Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased

.
Cut length
8-60 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.10 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print)
(No.018)
When you make a long print, the actual print length may become shorter than expected because
the paper is likely to shrink. It is possible in this mode to compensate the print length manually.
The length of long print is not compensated directly, but it is indirectly compensated by correcting
the length of A1 print.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the length of A1 print becomes 0.1mm longer per 10mm.

USA EUR/ASIA
475 475 0 to 999 0.1mm
NOTE
It is necessary to finish the adjustment of Cut Length 1 (No.016) before starting the
adjustment in this Cut Length 3 (No.018).
[Example of adjustment]
1. Supposing the actual length of a long print is shorter than expected.

100
100
Expected length Actual length
50
50
0
0
C
Actual length is shorter than expected.
8-61 K124sm8e6
2. Make an A1 (841mm long) or 34” long print.
Measure the actual length of this A1 or 34” print to know how long millimeter it is shorter than
expected.
(Example: Print out is 838mm, so it is 3mm shorter than expected.)
A1 or 34”
3mm
3. Necessary value for the compensation is 10 times as long as the difference between actual
length and expected length.
It is “30” in this example. (3mm x 10 = 30)
Specify “30” as the setting value of No.018.
4. Make a long print.

The actual print out will be as long as expected.

100
100
50
50
0
0
C
8-62 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.11 Leading Margin (No. 019)
It is possible to adjust the length of the leading margin.
An image portion that corresponds to the given length of the leading margin is not printed.
The length of the leading margin becomes 0.1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.
Changing the value to “0” removes whole the margin, thus a portion image on the leading edge will
appear.
Default Value Setting Range Step of increment

30 0 to 50 0.1mm
Default: 30
A 3mm Leading Margin added to leading edge.
Hides the corresponding part of image.
Example: 0
Leading Margin disappears.
Corresponding part of image printed.
NOTE
There is no guarantee of proper operation and image quality with a reduced leading margin
(less than 30 in the setting value).
Reference
Setting to “0” may result in a jam in Fuser Unit and a ghost image at approximately 252mm
from the leading edge.
8-63 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.12 Cut Length 4 (Individual Compensation for Roll 2) (No.020)
It is possible to compensate the print length of Roll 2 individually.
This setting would be used if a different cut length is provided to Roll 1 and Roll 2.
Measure the length gap between a piece of A1 size sheet from each Roll 1 and 2.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the print length of Roll 2 becomes 0.16mm longer.

50 0 to 100 0.16mm
Example:
A1 from Roll 1 A1 from Roll 2
Sheet from Roll 2 is shorter
Increase the value
A1 from Roll 1 A1 from Roll 2 (compensated)
Same length
NOTE
It is necessary to finish the adjustment of Cut Length 1 (No.016) before starting the
adjustment in this Cut Length 3 (No.018).
8-64 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.13 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)
It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting the Developer Bias (Negative
Developer Roller Bias).
The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.

022 Developer Bias (Plain paper) 161 161 0 to 4FF 1
023 Developer Bias (Tracing paper) 161 161 0 to 4FF 1
024 Developer Bias (Film) 161 161 0 to 4FF 1
025 Developer Bias 161 161 0 to 4FF 1
(Special media / Plain paper)
026 Developer Bias 161 161 0 to 4FF 1
(Special media / Tracing paper)
027 Developer Bias (Special media / Film) 161 161 0 to 4FF 1
NOTE
Please adjust the Developer Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.
8. 6. 3.14 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution

(No.028)
It is possible to compensate the Developer Bias only for the 1st Drum revolution.
The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.
(Developer Bias is not compensated at all if the setting value is “0”)

USA EUR/ASIA
0 0 0 to 255 1
Density of leading area is darker. Setting value is increased.

(Even density)
NOTE
There may be the case that the density of leading area, which corresponds to the 1st
revolution of Drum, is darker than other area.
In this case compensate the Developer Bias to have even density on both areas.
8-65 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.15 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)
It is possible to adjust the analog voltage outputted to the Transfer Corona during the print cycle.

029 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Plain paper) 366 366 0 to 4FF 1
030 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Tracing paper) 28A 28A 0 to 4FF 1
031 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Film) 28A 28A 0 to 4FF 1
032 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage 292 292 0 to 4FF 1
(Special media / Film)
NOTE
Please adjust Transfer Corona Analog Voltage while checking the actual voltage with the
multi-meter.
8. 6. 3.16 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.035)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona starts discharging during the print
cycle.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed.

USA EUR/ASIA
50 50 0 to 100 1mm
8-66 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.17 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.037)
It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona starts discharging during the print cycle.

USA EUR/ASIA
48 48 0 to 100 1mm
NOTE
You may lose some leading image as the following example if you increase the setting value
too much, because the timing to start discharging is too much delayed.
Normal Setting value is increased too much.
Transfer Corona starts

discharging at this point.
8-67 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.18 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.038)
It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona stops discharging during the print cycle.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to stop discharging is 1mm delayed.

USA EUR/ASIA
20 20 0 to 100 1mm
NOTE
You may lose some trailing image as the following example if you decrease the setting value
too much, because the Transfer Corona stops discharging too early.
Normal Setting value is increased too much.
Transfer Corona stops

discharging at this point.
8-68 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.19 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)
It is possible to adjust the center part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.
You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately.
The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”.

039 Print - Fuser Temperature Center 160 165 120 to 180 1oC
(Plain paper )
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
(Special media / Film)
Setting value of 039 to 044

(Example: Film 170oC)
(oC)
0 (Time)
Turn on Ready Print Job
Reference
(1) The both sides part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print - Fuser Temperature
Side (No. 625 to 648) separately.
(2) Item List of Fuser Temperature Control (center / side)
Fuser Center Fuser Sides

Print No.039 to 044 No.625 to 648
(for printing period)
Ready No.660 to 665 No.666 to 671
(target temperature to get “Ready”)
Standby No.738 No.739
(during “standby”)
Warm Sleep No.046 (common to both Center / Side)
8-69 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.20 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No.045)
It is possible to decide the temperature to start idling.
When the Fuser Temperature reaches the value specified in this No.045 during the warming up,
the Fuser Motor starts rotating to drive the Fuser Roller (idling).

USA EUR/ASIA
120 120 100 to 140 1oC
Setting value of 039 to 044

(Example : 160 oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 045

(Example: 140 oC)
0 (Time)
Ready (Idling stops.)
Turn on Idling starts.
8. 6. 3.21 Warm Sleep – Fuser Temperature (No.046)

It is possible to decide the temperature which is maintained in the Warm Sleep.

USA EUR/ASIA
100 100 100 to 160 1oC
Setting value of 738, 739

(Example: 160 oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 046

(Example: 100 oC)
0
(Time)
Warm Sleep starts.
100 oC is maintained after this point.
8-70 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.22 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.048 & 049)
It is possible to specify the control range of temperature of Fuser Roller.
If you specify some setting value “X” on these No.048 and 049, for example, you can decide the
highest limit and the lowest one of the control range of temperature.
The highest limit is “Fuser Temperature (Decided in No.039 to 044)” plus the setting value “X”.
And the lowest one is “Fuser Temperature” minus “X”.
The Fuser Lamp continues to light up when the temperature of Fuser Roller is colder than the
highest limit, and it is put out when the temperature reaches the highest limit.
The Fuser Roller gradually gets colder after that, and the Fuser Lamp lights again when the
temperature reaches the lowest limit.
Control range can be decided separately to each condition “in the print cycle” and “stand by”.

048 Fuser Temperature Control Range 1 1 1 to 6 1oC
(In the print cycle)
049 Fuser Temperature Control Range 2 2 1 to 6 1oC
(Stand by)
Example: Value of No.048 (Fuser Temperature Control Range) is “10”

Value of No.739 Standby - Fuser Temperature Side) is “160”
Highest limit of control range Standby Fuser Temperature

(170 oC) (160 oC)
Fuser Lamp turns OFF.
(oC)
Lowest limit of control range Fuser Lamp turns ON.

(150 oC)
0 (Time)
8-71 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.23 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.050)
It is possible to change the reaction time of Toner Supply Motor.
“Reaction time” is the time taken until the Toner Supply Motor starts working since “Toner Low”
has been detected.
The reaction time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value by “+1”.

USA EUR/ASIA
15 15 1 to 30 1 second
Toner Low Motor starts working Motor stops
(Time)
Setting value of No.050
NOTE
The reaction time may be too long if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large
volume prints continuously.
In this case try to decrease the setting value of No.050 to shorten the reaction time.
8. 6. 3.24 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No.051)

It is possible change the time the Toner Supply Motor works (ON time).
The ON time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value.

USA EUR/ASIA
10 10 1 to 15 1 second
Toner Low Motor starts working Motor stops
(Time)
Setting value of No.051
NOTE
The ON time may be too short if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large
volume prints continuously.
In this case try to increase the setting value of No.051 to make the ON time longer.
8-72 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.25 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052)
It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer.
An isolated dot image is more emphasized if you increase the setting value.
Setting value Contents

1 Emphasized
(Default in USA, EUR & ASIA)
2 More emphasized
3 Most emphasized
Reference
(1) An isolated dot image tends to look so weak.

The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear.
(Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. It will not emphasize the
dots coming together some degree.)
Dot Enhancement function is OFF. Dot Enhancement function is ON.
(2) The Dot Enhancement function can be validated in the User Mode.
It will not work if not validated.
8-73 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.26 Feed Clutch OFF time (No.053, 054)
The Feed Clutch turns OFF for a very short period whenever the machine transports the paper 2
meters long, so as to remove the paper slack in a long printing.
It is possible to specify how long period the Feed Clutch continues to be OFF.

053 Feed Clutch Off Timing (Roll 1) 230 230 80 to 360 1msec.
054 Feed Clutch Off Timing (Roll 2) 230 230 80 to 360 1msec.
2 meters
Feed Clutch turns OFF
2 meters
Feed Clutch turns OFF
2 meters
8-74 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.27 Metric or Inch (No.055)
It is possible to decide the base format of the print.

0 Metric NOTE
(Default in EUR & ASIA)
1 Inch No.055 is effective only to the size format selection available in
(Default in USA) the UI screen. This does not effect to the count unit.
8. 6. 3.28 Language (No.056)
NOTE
This setting does not function. Keep the value unchanged.
8. 6. 3.29 Interface Communication Setting (No.057)

It is possible to specify the communication of Interface.

0 Both the A Channel and the B Channel are used alternately.
Interface Board communicates with both the image scanner (through A Channel)
and the controller (through B Channel) alternately.
1 The A Channel only is used.
Interface Board communicates with image scanner through the A Channel.
2 The B Channel only is used.
(Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Interface Board communicates with controller through the B Channel.
8. 6. 3.30 Recognition of Paper Tray (No.058)

It is possible to make the machine recognize Paper Tray (multiple cut sheet feeder, option) if it is
installed.

0 Paper Tray not installed.
1 Paper Tray installed.
8. 6. 3.31 Counter Value (No.059)

It is possible to specify the counting unit of Counter.

0 1 linear meter Reference
1 0.1 linear meter
2 1 square meter Size Count:
(Default in EUR & ASIA) A4/A3: 1 count
3 0.1 square meter
4 1 linear foot
A2: 2 counts
5 1 square foot A1: 3 counts
(Default in USA) A0: 5 counts
6 Size Count
8-75 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.32 Maximum Length (No.060)
It is possible to specify the maximum cut length.

0 Maximum cut length is 6.0m.
1 Maximum cut length is 200m.
NOTE
We will not guarantee the print quality if the print is longer than the following sizes.
A0 / 36” plain paper 6.0m

Other sizes of plain paper 5 times as long as each standard size
Tracing paper Twice as long as each standard size
Film Standard sizes
8. 6. 3.33 Stacking Device setting (No.061)

It is possible to make the KIP 7100 recognize the optional device (stacker or folder) if connected.

0 Optional device is not connected.
1 Auto Stacker
8. 6. 3.34 Operation of Fuser Roller (No.062)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Fuser Roller should rotate periodically in the stand by
condition.

0 Fuser Roller rotates periodically in the stand by condition.
1 Fuser Roller does not rotate at all in the stand by condition.
Reference
Fuser Roller periodically rotates and stops when the machine is ready, so as to equalize the
temperature at every point of Fuser Roller. If you feel it is so noisy, select the setting value
“1”.
In this case please note that the fusing quality may not be so good because the temperature
of Fuser Roller is not equalized.
8-76 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.35 Cut Length 5 & 6
(Length Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film)(No.063, 064)
It is possible to compensate the print length for the tracing paper and film.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the length of the print becomes longer.

063 Cut Length 5 (Tracing Paper) 100 100 0 to 200 depends on
paper length
064 Cut Length 6 (Film) 100 86 0 to 200 depends on
paper length
An amount of the length to be added / removed against “1” increment of the setting value will vary
depending on the length of the media length to be printed.
“1” increment will correspond to the length listed below to be compensated.
length to be added /
paper length
removed (Approx.)
A0 (1189mm) 0.16mm
A1 (841mm) 0.11mm
A2 (594mm) 0.08mm
A3 (420mm) 0.05mm
A4 (297mm) 0.04mm

100
100
50
50
0
0
C
Increasing the value

100
100
50
50
0
0
C
8-77 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.36 Drum Reverse Time (No.065)
It is possible to change the period for the Drum reverse rotation.
Developer Roller is strongly pressed to the Drum and that may cause an indentation on Developer
Roller’s surface. The indentation may result in defective imaging.
The Drum makes a reverse rotation in a given period twice after finishing a job.
Setting a bigger value for No.065 makes the reverse rotation period longer.

USA EUR/ASIA
30 30 10 to 70 1 millisecond
Print process end

Drum reverse rotation starts stops / starts again stops
Value for No.065 (ms) Value for No.065 (ms)
Reference
(1) Drum reverse rotations may produce a slight amount of toner sticking on Drum’s surface.
This causes a black line about 50mm below the leading edge on a print.
Setting a smaller value will reduce such a line.
(2) Setting an extremely small value may cause an indentation on Developer Roller.
8. 6. 3. 37 Fuser Motor Reverse Setting (No.066)

It is possible to make a decision to allow reverse operation of Fuser Motor at the time of Drum
Reverse.

0 Fuser Motor does not make a reverse operation at all
(default)
1 Fuser Motor makes a reverse operation in conjunction
with Drum Reverse.
8-78 K124sm8e6
8. 6. 3.38 Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067)
There may be the case that some type of printing paper has a difficulty in paper separation.
In this case it is possible to assist paper separation by lighting the Separation Lamp.
It is possible in this No.067 to decide to which type of paper the Separation Lamp should light.
Selectable values are from 1 to 7

1 Separation Lamp lights for plain paper.
2 Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper.
3 Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and tracing paper.
4 Separation Lamp lights for film.
5 Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and film.
6 Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper and film.
7 Separation Lamp lights for all kinds of paper.
Reference
Sometimes you can avoid “defect of transfer (light image)” by making the Separation Lamp
work.
So if you feel the print image is too light, try to make it work.
You may be able to fix the problem.
8-79 K124sm8e6
(Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.070 to 075, 678, 679)
It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th
Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing)
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A3, 12” and 11” sizes by roll
paper feeding.
Item Setting Item Default value Setting Step of

No. USA EUR/ASIA range increment
070 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) 34 39 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
071 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed 1 1 0 to 300 0.5 sec
(Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
072 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) 35 42 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
073 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed 1 1 0 to 300 0.5 sec
074 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) 50 48 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
075 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed 5 5 0 to 300 0.5 sec
678 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) 34 37 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
679 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed 6 8 0 to 300 0.5 sec
Please refer to the next page for further information.
NOTE
(1) Fuser Motor Speed is factory-adjusted based on an individual machine, and the result is
written in the service sheet. Be sure to confirm the service sheet in case of a setting
change on Fuser Motor Speed.
(2) Fuser Motor Speed should be changed with visual check. Remove the right cover and
see inside of the machine to check the feeding balance (media not to be pulled too much
/ without slack, etc).
8-80 K124sm8e7
Reference
“Paper creasing” or “image void” on a long print may be removed by Fuser Motor Speed
compensation.
Long Print without Fuser Motor Speed compensation
100
Leading edge A
50
B
C
0
Image Void Paper Creasing
Fuser Motor Speed, Fuser Motor 1/2/3/4 Speed correspond to the area shown as follows.
To remove “paper creasing” or “image void”, adjust Fuser Motor 3rd/4th Speed according to the
situation.
1st Speed 2nd Speed 3rd Speed 4th Speed
Switch Timing Switch Timing Switch Timing Switch Timing
100
A
50
B
C
0
Fuser Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Motor
Speed 1st Speed 2nd Speed 3rd Speed 4th Speed
Standard Length
NOTE
(1) When “Switching Timing” is set to 0, the subsequent Fuser Motor Speed settings are not
applied.
4th Speed is not used when Fuser Motor 4th Speed Switch Timing is set to “0”.
3rd/4th Speed is not used when Fuser Motor 3rd Speed Switch Timing is set to “0”.
(2) Fuser Motor 3rd/4th Speed are factory-adjusted for the following media width as follows.
3rd Speed 4th Speed
plain all width all width
A0/36”/34”/30”
tracing/vellum all width
less than above: not used
film not used not used
cutsheet
factory-adjusted not used
(except film)
“not used” means that the previous Switch Timing is set to “0” because the corresponding
print area exceeds the guaranteed length.
8-81 K124sm8e7
This page explains Fuser Motor Speed Compensation on A3/12”/11” width for example.
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd and 4th in each Item No.070, 072, 074, 678.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/second faster.
(The default setting value “40” corresponds to 80mm/second.)
(Example)
Setting value of 070 is “41” Fuser Motor 1st Speed is 80.04mm/sec.
Setting value of 072 is “42” Fuser Motor 2nd Speed is 80.08mm/sec.
Setting value of 074 is “43” Fuser Motor 3rd Speed is 80.12mm/sec.
Setting value of 678 is “44” Fuser Motor 4th Speed is 80.16mm/sec.
Fuser Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Motor

1st Speed 2nd Speed 3rd Speed 4th Speed
(80.04mm/s) (80.08mm/s) (80.12mm/s) (80.16mm/s)
100
A
50
B
C
0
You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item
No.071, 073, 075, 679.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 second delayed.
(If you specify “0”, the Fuser Motor Speed does not change.)
(Example)
Setting value of 071 is “8” Fuser Motor 1st Speed starts 4 seconds after the Registration
Sensor detects the leading edge.
Setting value of 073 is “16” Fuser Motor 2nd Speed starts 8 seconds after the start of
Fuser Motor 1st Speed.
Setting value of 075 is “24” Fuser Motor 3rd Speed starts 12 seconds after the start of
Fuser Motor 2nd Speed.
Setting value of 678 is “32” Fuser Motor 4th Speed starts 16 seconds after the start of
Fuser Motor 3rd Speed.
4 seconds 8 seconds 12seconds 16 seconds

(Fuser motor Speed) (1st Speed) (2nd Speed) (3rd Speed) (4th Speed)
100
A
50
B
C
0
8-82 K124sm8e7
(Tracing paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.076 to 081, 680, 681)
It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd, 3rd and
4th Speed.
It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing)
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A3, 12” and 11” sizes by
roll paper feeding.

076 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) 33 36 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
078 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) 39 44 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
080 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) 44 44 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
680 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.076, 078, 080, 680.
No.077, 079, 081, 681.
For the detail information above, see [8.6.5.39 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll
paper (Plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.070 to 075, 678, 679)].
8-83 K124sm8e7
(Film / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.082 to 087, 682, 683)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of A3, 12” and 11” sizes by roll paper
feeding.

082 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) 50 50 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
084 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) 50 50 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
086 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
682 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Film / A3, 12” & 11”)
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.082, 084, 086, 682.
No.083, 085, 087, 683.
8-84 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.088 to 093, 684, 685)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A3, 12” and
11” sizes by roll paper feeding.

088 Fuser Motor 1st Speed 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12” & 11”)
090 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
092 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
684 Fuser Motor 4th Speed 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.088, 090, 092, 684.
No.089, 091, 093, 685.
8-85 K124sm8e7
(Special tracing paper / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.094 to 099)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A3, 12”
and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding.

(Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”)
096 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.095, 097, 099, 687.
8-86 K124sm8e7
(Special film / A3, 12” & 11”) (No.100 to 105, 688, 689)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A3, 12” and 11”
sizes by roll paper feeding.

100 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / Special film / A3, 12” & 11”)
102 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
104 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
688 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12” & 11”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.101, 103, 105, 689.
8-87 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.
paper feeding.

No.107, 109, 111, 691.
8-88 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.
roll paper feeding.

(Roll / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Roll / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Roll / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Roll / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
No.113, 115, 117, 693.
8-89 K124sm8e7
(Film / A2, 18” & 17”) (No.118 to 123, 694, 695)
4th Speed.
feeding.

(Roll / Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Roll / Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Roll / Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
(Roll / Film / A2, 18” & 17”)
No.119, 121, 123, 695.
8-90 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A2, 18” & 17”) (No.124 to 129, 696, 697)
4th Speed.

No.125, 127, 129, 697.
8-91 K124sm8e7
(Special tracing paper / A2, 18” & 17”) (No.130 to 135, 698, 699)
4th Speed.
and 17” size by roll paper feeding.

(Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18” & 17”)
No.131, 133, 135, 699.
8-92 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.

You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd, 4th in each Item No.136, 138,140, 700.
No.137, 139, 141, 701.
8-93 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.
paper feeding.

No.143, 145, 147, 703.
8-94 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.
roll paper feeding.

(Roll / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Roll / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Roll / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Roll / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
No.149, 151, 153, 705.
8-95 K124sm8e7
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.154 to 159, 706, 707)
4th Speed.
feeding.

(Roll / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Roll / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Roll / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
(Roll / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
No.155, 157, 159, 707.
8-96 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22”) (No.160 to 165, 708, 709)
4th Speed.

No.161, 163, 165, 709.
8-97 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.

No.167, 169, 171, 711.
8-98 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.

No.173, 175, 177, 713.
8-99 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.
paper feeding.

No.179, 181, 183, 715.
8-100 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.
roll paper feeding.

(Roll / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Roll / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Roll / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Roll / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”)
No.185, 187, 189, 717.
8-101 K124sm8e7
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.190 to 195, 718, 719)
4th Speed.
feeding.

(Roll / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Roll / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Roll / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
(Roll / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
No.191, 193, 195, 719.
8-102 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34”) (No.196 to 201, 720, 721)
4th Speed.

No.197, 199, 201, 721.
8-103 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.

202 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
204 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
206 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
722 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
No.203, 205, 207, 723.
8-104 K124sm8e7
4th Speed.

No.209, 211, 213, 725.
8-105 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3.63 Main Motor Speed (No.310 to 315)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Main Motor for each type of paper separately.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the motor speed becomes 0.04mm/second faster.

310 Main Motor Speed (Plain paper) 36 36 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
311 Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
312 Main Motor Speed (Film) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
313 Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
314 Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
315 Main Motor Speed (Special film) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
CAUTION
The Main Motor Speed is the basis for many other print settings.
So you have to re-adjust all of these print settings if you change the Main Motor Speed.
8. 6. 3.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1)
(No.316 to 321)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately.

316 Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) 31 35 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film paper)
(Special plain paper)
(Special tracing paper)
(Special film)
Refer to [8. 6. 3.119 Fuser Motor Speed] on page 8-134 for narrower originals than the above.
8. 6. 3.65 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.322 to 327)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona stops discharging during the print
cycle.
You can specify the timing for each type of paper separately.

322 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper) 25 25 0 to 100 1mm
323 Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper) 25 25 0 to 100 1mm
324 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) 22 25 0 to 100 1mm
325 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper) 18 18 0 to 100 1mm
326 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper) 18 18 0 to 100 1mm
327 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film) 23 23 0 to 100 1mm
8-106 K124sm8e7
(Plain paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.328 to 333)
It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A2, 18” and 17” sizes by cut
sheet bypass feeding.

(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.328, 330 and 332.
You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.329,
331 and 333.
8-107 K124sm8e7
(Tracing paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.334 to 339)
Speed.
cut sheet bypass feeding.

(Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
337 and 339.
8-108 K124sm8e7
(Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.340 to 345)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of A2, 18” and 17” sizes by cut sheet
bypass feeding.

(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
343 and 345.
8-109 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(No.346 to 351)
Speed.
17” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.

(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
349 and 351.
8-110 K124sm8e7
(Special tracing paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
(No.352 to 357)
Speed.
and 17” size by cut sheet bypass feeding.

(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
355 and 357.
8-111 K124sm8e7
(Special film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) (No.358 to 363)
Speed.
sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.

(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)
361 and 363.
8-112 K124sm8e7
(Plain paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.364 to 369)
Speed.

364 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24” & 37 35 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
22”)
(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
366 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24” & 30 33 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
22”)
368 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24” & 40 41 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
22”)
367 and 369.
8-113 K124sm8e7
(Tracing paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.370 to 375)
Speed.

370 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) 36 42 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
372 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) 41 43 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
374 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) 39 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
373 and 375.
8-114 K124sm8e7
(Film / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.376 to 381)
Speed.
bypass feeding.

376 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) 42 42 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
378 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) 42 42 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
380 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24” & 22”)
379 and 381.
8-115 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.382 to 387)
Speed.

(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24” & 22”)
385 and 387.
8-116 K124sm8e7
Speed.

(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)
391 and 393.
8-117 K124sm8e7
(Special film / A1, 24” & 22”) (No.394 to 399)
Speed.

394 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
22”)
(Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24” & 22”)
396 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
22”)
398 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
22”)
397 and 399.
8-118 K124sm8e7
(Plain paper / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.400 to 405)
Speed.

400 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36” & 26 26 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
402 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36” & 27 27 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
404 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36” & 33 37 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
403 and 405.
8-119 K124sm8e7
(Tracing paper / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.406 to 411)
Speed.

406 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) 29 42 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
408 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) 35 38 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
410 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) 36 39 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
409 and 411.
8-120 K124sm8e7
(Film / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.412 to 417)
Speed.
bypass feeding.

412 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) 35 38 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
414 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) 42 43 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
416 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36” & 34”)
415 and 417.
8-121 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34”) (No.418 to 423)
Speed.

421 and 423.
8-122 K124sm8e7
Speed.

427 and 429.
8-123 K124sm8e7
(Special film / A0, 36” & 34”) (No.430 to 435)
Speed.

430 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
432 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
434 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36” & 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
34”)
433 and 435.
8-124 K124sm8e7
(Plain paper / 30”) (No.436 to 441, 726, 727)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30” size by roll paper
feeding.

436 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) 28 28 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / plain paper / 30”)
438 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) 30 33 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
440 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) 34 36 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
726 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) 36 30 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.437, 439, 441, 727.
8-125 K124sm8e7
(Tracing paper / 30”) (No.442 to 447, 728, 729)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30” size by roll paper
feeding.

442 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) 34 33 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / tracing / 30”)
444 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) 38 44 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
446 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) 40 41 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
728 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) 34 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.443, 445, 447, 729.
8-126 K124sm8e7
(Film / 30”) (No.448 to 453, 730, 731)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of 30” size by roll paper feeding.

448 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
449 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 0 0 0 to 300 0.5 sec
450 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
451 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 0 0 0 to 300 0.5 sec
452 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
453 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 0 0 0 to 300 0.5 sec
730 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
731 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / film / 30”) 0 0 0 to 300 0.5 sec
No.449, 451, 453, 731.
8-127 K124sm8e7
(Special plain paper / 30”) (No.454 to 459, 732, 733)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30” size by
roll paper feeding.

454 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / special plain paper / 30”)
456 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
458 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
732 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.455, 457, 459, 733.
8-128 K124sm8e7
(Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.460 to 465, 734, 735)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30” size
by roll paper feeding.

460 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / special tracing / 30”)
462 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
464 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
734 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.461, 463, 465, 735.
8-129 K124sm8e7
(Special film / 30”) (No.466 to 471, 736, 737)
4th Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30” size by roll
paper feeding.

466 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Roll / special film / 30”)
468 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
470 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
736 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
No.467, 469, 471, 737.
8-130 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3.90 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet
paper (Plain paper / 30”) (No.472 to 477)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30” size by cut sheet
bypass feeding.

472 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) 28 28 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”)
474 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) 30 33 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
476 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) 34 36 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
475 and 477.
8-131 K124sm8e7
paper (Tracing paper / 30”) (No.478 to 483)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30” size by cut sheet
bypass feeding.

478 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) 34 33 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / tracing / 30”)
480 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) 38 44 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
482 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) 40 41 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
481 and 483.
8-132 K124sm8e7
paper (Film / 30”) (No.484 to 489)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film of 30” size by cut sheet bypass
feeding.

484 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / film / 30”)
486 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
488 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.48. 6.
387 and 489.

paper (Special plain paper / 30”) (No.490 to 495)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30” size by

490 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cutsheet / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cutsheet / special plain paper / 30”)
492 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cutsheet / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
494 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cutsheet / special plain paper / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
493 and 495.
8-133 K124sm8e7
paper (Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.496 to 501)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30” size
by cut sheet bypass feeding.

496 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”)
498 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
500 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.496, 498 and 500.
499 and 501.

paper (Special film / 30”) (No.502 to 507)
Speed.
These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30” size by cut

502 Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Cut sheet / special film / 30”)
504 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
506 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) 40 40 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd, 3rd in each Item No.502, 504 and 506.
505 and 507.
8-134 K124sm8e7
(Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.508 to 510)
It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 100mm end of a print.
This section does not function and is reserved for future update.

No. US EUR/ range increment
A ASIA
508 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain) 4FF 4FF 0 to 9FE -
509 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing) 4FF 4FF 0 to 9FE -
510 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film) 4FF 4FF 0 to 9FE -

It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 70mm end of a print.
A setting combination among No.511 to No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a
print in some cases.

No. US EUR/ range increment
A ASIA
511 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain) 62F 62F 0 to 9FE -
512 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing) 69F 69F 0 to 9FE -
513 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film) 4FF 4FF 0 to 9FE -

It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 30mm end of a print.
A setting combination among No.511 to No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a
print in some cases.

No. USA EUR/ range increment
ASIA
514 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain) 13 17 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
515 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Tracing) 19 19 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
516 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Film) 0 0 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
8-135 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3.99 Judgment value for Additional Cut Length
for Non-standard Size Prints (No.613 to 616)
It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print, by providing
additional paper length by service modes 4-617 to 4-620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard
size print).
Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 4-617 to 4-620 is not always provided.
Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 4-613 to 4-616 (Judgment value for
“Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print”.)

613 Judgment value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard 1 1 1 to 20 1mm
Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
Reference
(1) Which Judgement Value / Additional Cut Length setting is applied to a non-standard size
print depends on the corresponding roll width.
Judgement Additional
Roll Width Standard Size Standard Cut Length
Value Length
36" 36"x48" 1219mm
841mm A0 1189mm
34" 34"x44" 1118mm No.613 No.617
30" 30"x42" 1067mm
728mm B1 1030mm
24" 24"x36" 914mm
22" 22"x34" 864mm No.614 No.618
594mm A1 841mm
18" 18"x24" 610mm
420mm A2 594mm
No.615 No.619
17" 17"x22" 559mm
15" 15"x21" 533mm
12" 12"x18" 457mm
11" 11"x17" 432mm No.616 No.620
297mm A3 420mm
(next page)
8-136 K124sm8e7
Reference
(2) If the actual image length is longer than (or equal to) “A+B”, “C” is provided to the trailing
edge of non-standard size print.
A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width)

B: Value of “Judgement Value for “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
C: Value of “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
<Example> Actual Image Length: 860mm

A: 841mm (A1 roll width)
B: 10
C: 20
A (841mm) B (10)
Actual Image Length (860mm)
Print Length (880mm)
Actual Image Length (860mm) C (20)
(3) If the actual image length is shorter than “A+B”, the print is cut as long as the actual
image length. (“C” is not provided to the trailing edge of the print.)
A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width)

B: Value of “Judgement Value for “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
C: Value of “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
<Example> Actual Image Length: 845mm

A: 841mm (A1 roll width)
B: 10
C: 20
A (841mm) B (10)
Actual Image Length (845mm)
Print Length (845mm)
8-137 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3.100 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
(No.617 to 620)
It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print, by providing
additional paper length by service modes 4-617 to 4-620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard
size print).
Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 4-617 to 4-620 is not always provided.
Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 4-613 to 4-616 (Judgment value for
“Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print”.)

617 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints 0 0 0 to 35 1mm
(36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
(24”/ 22”/ A2)
(18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
(12”/ 11”/ A3)
Refer to page 8-121 and 122 for Additional Cut Length and its Judgment Value.
8. 6. 3. 101 Toner Supply Roller Bias (No.621)

It is possible to make bias adjustment for Toner Supply Roller.

286 0 to 800 1
NOTE
This setting does not function. Change of this setting has no effect on the machine operation.
8. 6. 3. 102 Regulation Bias (No.622)

It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting Regulation Bias (Center).
The print density becomes darker if you increase the setting value.

270 0 to 800 1
NOTE
Please adjust Regulation Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.
8-138 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 103 Density Sensor Standard Output (No.623)
NOTE
This setting has been factory-adjusted. Keep the value unchanged.
It is possible to change the default analog output of Density Sensor.

“Density Sensor Standard Output” (No.623) and “Density Sensor Analog Voltage” (No.624) are
used for Density Measure.

0 0 to 614 1
8. 6. 3. 104 Density Sensor Analog Voltage (No.624)
NOTE
It is possible to change the default analog output of Density Sensor.

“Density Sensor Standard Output” (No.623) and “Density Sensor Analog Voltage” (No.624) are
used for Density Measure.

0 0 to 614 1
8-139 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 105 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (12”/11”/A3) (No.625 to 630)
It is possible to adjust the side part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.
You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately.

625 Print - Fuser Temperature Side 160 145 120 to 180 1oC
(Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Special / Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Special media / Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
Reference
The center part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print - Fuser Temperature Center
(No. 039 to 044) separately.
Refer to [8. 6. 3.19 Print - Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)] on page 8-53 for
further information.
8. 6. 3. 106 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (18”/17”/15”/A2)

(No.631 to 636)

(Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Special / Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Special / Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Special / Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
Reference
8-140 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 107 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (24”/22”/A1) (No.637 to 642)

(Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Special / Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Special / Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
Reference
8. 6. 3. 108 Print - Fuser Temperature Side (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1)

(No.643 to 648)

(Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Special / Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Special / Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Special / Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
Reference
8-141 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 109 Density Sensor Output Monitor (No.649)
NOTE
This setting is factory-use only. Keep the value unchanged.
It is possible to change the mode to monitor the default analog output of Density Sensor.
Default Value Setting Range

1 0 to 4
8. 6. 3. 110 Regulation Bias Increment

for Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3 (No.650)
NOTE
It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Regulation Bias on Auto Adjustment.

A specified increment of Regulation Bias will be applied at switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2
and Level 3.
The default voltage value of the increment is about 40V (corresponding to “80” in the setting value)
for switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment becomes
about 0.5V higher.

80 0 to 200 0.5V
8-142 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 111 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No.651)
NOTE
This setting can be used for checking purpose only.
Setting change is allowed to factory-use only. Keep the value unchanged.
It is possible to check the total amount (increment) of currently applied Regulation Bias Adjustment
by Density Compensation.
It is possible to add a 0.5V to the total amount of Regulation Roller Bias Adjustment directly.

0 0 to 800 0.5V
8-143 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.652)
It is possible to decide whether Density Compensation is enabled.

0 Density Compensation Process is disabled
1 Density Compensation Process is enabled
(default)
Reference
Density Compensation Process is performed as follows.
1. Several solid patches are created on Drum and are measured by Density Sensor at a
regular interval of Main Motor operating time (No.655).
This is called Density Measure.
2. If the current density value (calculated based on Density Measure) does not meet Target
Density (No.653), one of the Adjustment Level listed below will be applied.
3. Developer Bias and Regulation Bias (No.650) will be adjusted based on the current
Adjustment Level.

Level 0 (Default) Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Developer Bias -180V -230V -230V -230V
(Negative)
Regulation Bias -80V -80V -120V -160V
against Developer Bias

Level 0 (Default) Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
0V
Developer Bias
-100V -180V
-230V -230V -230V
-200V 50V
80
80
-300V Regulation Bias 40V 120
against 160
Developer Bias 40V
-400V
-500V
NOTE
Even if Developer Unit is replaced, still the current Auto Adjustment will continue to be
applied.
An applied Auto Adjustment Level should be manually set to “0000000” after replacing
Developer Unit / Developer overhaul.
8-144 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 113 Target Density (No.653)
NOTE
It is possible to change Target Density that should be achieved and maintained for consistent print
density.
If the current density does not meet Target Density, Regulation (Developer) Bias will be
automatically adjusted based on the current Adjustment Level.
• If the current Density Value is judged “not enough” (lighter than required), the next level will be
applied.
• If the current Density Value is judged “adequate”, the current level remains.
• There is possibility for the Density Value to be judged “too much enough” (darker than
required), then the previous level will be applied.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, Target Density will rise and thus Auto Adjustment Level
would be switched to the next level earlier.
8. 6. 3. 114 Regulation Bias Maximum (No.654)
NOTE
It is possible to change the maximum of Regulation Bias.

When the total value amount of Regulation Bias (No.622) and Total Increment of Regulation Bias
Adjustment (No.641) reaches to the value of this setting, Regulation Bias cannot raise any more.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the maximum of Regulation Bias increases.

500 160 to 800 1
8. 6. 3. 115 Density Measure Interval (No.655, 656)
NOTE
It is possible to change an interval of Density Measure.

When Bias 3 Time in Information Mode reaches a specified period in this setting, Density Measure
will run.
There are 2 kind of the trigger to check Bias 3 Time whether the period passes.
(1) At the time of turning on the machine
(2) After completion of the current print queue
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the interval of Density Measure becomes 1 hour longer.
Item Setting Item Default Setting Step of

No. Value range increment
655 Density Measure Interval at Power on 18 1 to 100 1 hour
656 Density Measure Interval at Print Completion 18 1 to 100 1 hour
8-145 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 116 Developer Bias Increment
for Auto Adjustment Level 1 and after (No.657)
NOTE
It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Developer Bias Adjustment.

A specified increment of Developer Bias will be applied at switching to and as of Auto Adjustment
Level 1.
The default voltage value of the increment is approximately 50V (corresponding to “80” in the
setting value) for switching to Auto Adjustment Level 1. The increased Developer Bias will be
applied to the subsequent Auto Adjustment Level.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the increment of Developer Bias Adjustment becomes
higher.

158 0 to 400 1
8-146 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 117 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (No.660 to 665)
It is possible to specify “Ready” temperature.
This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below 50oC at turning on the machine.

USA EUR/AS range increment
660 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain) 160 160 120 to 180 1oC
661 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing) 160 170 120 to 180 1oC
662 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center (Film) 177 177 120 to 180 1oC
663 Ready - Fuser Temperature Center 160 160 120 to 180 1oC
(Special / Plain)
(Special / Tracing)
(Special / Film)
After reaching “Ready”, fuser temperature will rise 10 oC higher than “Ready” (Overshoot) in 10
minutes. Then it will be maintained within “Standby” temperature.
Fuser Temperature Overshoot

in 10 minutes after Ready
(oC) Standby
Overshoot
Setting value of
“Ready - Temperature”
50 oC
0 (Time)
Turn on Ready
8. 6. 3. 118 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (No.666 to 671)

It is possible to specify “Ready” temperature.
This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below 50oC at turning on the machine.

USA EUR/AS range increment
666 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) 159 159 120 to 180 1oC
667 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) 159 180 120 to 180 1oC
668 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side (Film) 177 170 120 to 180 1o C
669 Ready - Fuser Temperature Side 159 159 120 to 180 1oC
(Special / Plain)
(Special / Tracing)
(Special / Film)
8-147 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 119 Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3)
(No. 672 to 677)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately.

672 Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) 50 50 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film paper)
(Special plain paper)
(Special tracing paper)
(Special film)
For Fuser Motor Speed in larger size, refer to [8. 6. 3.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” /
22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (No.316 to 321) on page 8-90.
8. 6. 3. 120 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed 4 (No.678 to 737)

Fuser Motor Speed 4 and its switch timing are explained on Fuser Motor Speed 1, 2, 3 together.
Please refer to [8. 6. 3.39 Compensation of Fuser Speed 1 (No.070 to 075)] on page 8-64 to 66
and the concerning pages for media type / size.
8-148 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 121 Standby - Fuser Temperature (No.738, 739)
It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature to be maintained while waiting for a print job. You
can specify the temperature for the center and the sides separately.
This setting is applied after the period of Fuser Temperature Overshoot (+10oC against “Ready -
Temperature” in 10 minutes).

738 Standby - Fuser Temperature Center 167 167 120 to 180 1oC
739 Standby - Fuser Temperature Side 155 155 120 to 180 1oC
Fuser Temperature Overshoot

in 10 minutes after Ready
(oC)
Setting value of
“Standby - Temperature”
(Example 160oC)
0 (Time)
Turn on Ready Standby
8. 6. 3. 122 Assist Fan Off Timing (No.740 to 742)

Assist Fan stops at a regular period after the trailing edge of a print of in 15” or wider reaches
Registration Sensor. It is possible to change the timing of Assist Fan off.
This setting may be a solution for image void on the trailing center.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing of Assist Fan off becomes 0.125 seconds later.

No. USA EUR/AS range increment
740 Assist Fan Off Timing (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 8 4 0 to 8 0.125 sec
741 Assist Fan Off Timing (24” / 22” / A1) 8 4 0 to 8 0.125 sec
742 Assist Fan Off Timing (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) 8 6 0 to 8 0.125 sec
8-149 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 123 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge
(36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (No.743 to 745)
It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 100mm end of a print in 36” / 34” / 30” /
A0 / B1 width.
This setting may be a solution for image void on the trailing center.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, speed of Fuser Motor driving becomes 0.04mm/s slower
than the applied speed at that point.

743 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing 0 0 0 to 80 0.04mm/s
edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (Plain)
edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (Tracing)
edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (Film)
8. 6. 3. 124 Roll 2 Forward Standby ON/OFF (No.746)

The default Standby Position for the leading edge of Roll 2 is located directly below the set sensor
(PH9). This setting will feed the leading edge to Forward Standby Position (approximately 252mm
forward from the default Standby Position).

0 Roll 2 Leading Edge stays at the set sensor
(default)
1 Roll 2 Leading Edge goes Forward Standby Position
8. 6. 3. 125 Roll 2 Forward Standby Position Adjustment (No.747)

This setting can adjust Roll 2 Forward Standby Position (approximately 202 to 252mm forward
from the default Roll 2 Standby Position) with Roll 2 Forward Standby on. When the setting value
increases by 1, Roll 2 Forward Standby Position will shift backward to the default Standby Position
in 1mm. (“0” for 252mm forward, “50” for 202mm forward)

0 0 to 50 1mm
8. 6. 3. 126 Roll 2 Rewind Timer (No. 748)

This setting can work as a timer to rewind Roll 2 media from Forward Standby Position to the
default Standby Position with Roll 2 Forward Standby on. When the setting value decreases by 1,
the interval of rewinding Roll 2 media to the default Standby Position becomes 1 minute shorter.

15 1 to 15 1 min
8-150 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 127 Tracing Mode (No. 749)
Even in “ready” condition, the fuser temperature is controlled slightly lower than “Print” temperature
in order to reduce inside temperature.
It quickly rises up to “Print” temperature at the same time as the printer starts printing an output job.
This setting will keep media feeding wait for the completion of the fuser temperature recovery.
Note that Tracing Mode is effective only for an extremely thin tracing paper (off-specification).

0 Fuser temperature starts recovery as soon as a
(default) print job is sent.
1 A print on tracing paper will start after recovery of
fuser temperature.
8. 6. 3. 128 Roll 1 Setting Mode (No. 750)

The default Standby Position for the leading edge of Roll 1 is located directly below the set sensor
(PH7). This setting will allow the leading edge of a roll media that has kept waiting a long period in
a special circumstance to move about 20mm forward from the default Standby Position.
This will keep the edge from waving.
Note that Roll 1 Setting Mode is effective only for an extremely thin roll media (off-specification).

0 Roll 1 Leading Edge stays at the set sensor
(default)
1 Roll 1 Leading Edge goes 20mm forward from the
set sensor.
8. 6. 3. 129 Disable HV Error Detection Mode (No. 751)

“Disable HV Error Detection Mode” functions just as Error Mask Mode for high voltage errors.
This allows the system to ignore service call errors regarding high voltage power supply (E-31, E-
32, E-33, E-34) and prevents the concerning error code from being displayed both on the sub UI
and the touch screen.
“Disable HV Error Detection Mode” ON is not canceled by turning off the machine, but remains
until set to OFF manually.

0 HV error detection works normally.
(default)
1 The system ignores any HV Error.
NOTE
TAKE GREAT CARE. The system ignores high voltage errors caused by ANY REASON
while “Disable HV Error Detection Mode” is ON.
It is recommended that “Disable HV Error Detection Mode” remains OFF in the usual usage.
8-151 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 130 Auto Initial Cut After Long Print (No. 753, 754)
Trimming the leading edge maintains feeding stability for the subsequent print right after a long
print longer than the guarantee length.
“Auto Initial Cut After Long Print” ejects a 210mm sheet for initial cut right after completion of a
long print that exceeds a specified length and number of sheets.
(The cut length is fixed in 210mm)

753 Auto Initial Cut After Long Print (Length) 10 10 10 to 60 100mm
754 Auto Initial Cut After Long Print (Number of sheet) 0 0 0 to 3 *number of
sheets
* “Auto Initial Cut After Long Print” counts long prints (longer than No.753) beyond print jobs.
It makes Initial Cut while the printer is proceeding only long prints (longer than No.753). If a print
job contains a “Non long print” (shorter than No.753), the count will be reset.
Such short print obtains the accurate cut length and just works as a “trim cut” for the next long print.
8. 6. 3. 131 Length for Forced Initial Cut Before Print (No. 755)
Under a certain usage environment, the first print of a job sometimes would have a wrinkle or an
image void if the prints are made with a roll media left in the deck for a long period.
“Forced Initial Cut Before Print” makes an automatic initial cut (almost 1 revolution of a roll media)
at the leading edge before processing a job to obtain image quality and feed balance in such
conditions.
Which media type to have “Forced Initial Cut Before Print” can be specified on the UI screen.
(For further information of Configuration on the UI, see KIP IPS Touchscreen Operator’s Guide)
No.755 can specify the length to be cut and ejected prior to start printing.

594 210 to 600 1mm
8-152 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 132 Leading Registration for Paper Tray (No. 756)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of a sheet from the
Paper Tray.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the
trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger.

not decided 1 to 40 1mm
Leading Registration
value is increased. value is decreased.
8. 6. 3. 133 Trailing Margin for Paper Tray (No. 757)

It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin of a sheet from the Paper Tray.
The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.

not decided 1 to 40 1mm
Trailing Margin
NOTE
Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much.
8-153 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 3. 134 Side Registration for Paper Tray (No. 758)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the side edge of a sheet from the Paper
Tray.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, image is shifted 0.1mm to the right.

not decided 0 to 100 0.1mm
Side Registration
8-154 K124sm8e7
8. 6. 4 Creating Backup
It is possible to save the current parameters in Adjustment Mode as RAM file.
RAM file can be used for backup measure.
NOTE
Prior to any attempts at significant changes on Adjustment Mode, export the current
parameters to .RAM file.
1. Press [Export] in Adjustment Menu screen.
2. Specify a place to save the current parameter.

It will be saved as both *.txt and *.ram in a folder that is automatically created there at this time.
The printer’s serial number will be automatically added to the folder.
*.ram is used for backup of the current parameter. You can use it to import the parameter to
machines.
*.txt” is only used for simplified confirmation with an appropriate application such as Notepad.
8-156 K124sm8e8
8. 6. 5 Restoring Configuration from Backup
It is possible to restore the parameters by using a RAM file that has been saved before.
This can be used for the following possible cases.
- If the current parameters have loss or damage of data.

- To apply parameters of a certain printer to another.
1. Press [Import] in Adjustment Menu screen.
2. Locate and open a RAM file that you want to apply.
3. The system reads all the parameters in the RAM file.

Then the parameters will be applied to “New Value” field.
NOTE
At this point, KIP Service Software just reads and displays the parameters in the RAM
file, but the parameters do not take effect on the printer yet.
Follow the later step to apply the read parameters to the printer.
8-157 K124sm8e8
4. Press [Save]. After confirmation, the read parameters will be sent to the printer.
8-158 K124sm8e8
8. 7 Running Mode
In Running Mode, the printer takes usual printing operation with no print media loaded.
If you install any roll media, it is transported and ejected from the printer as usual as normal print.
Note that the printer will continue printing till the media empty.
NOTE
Running Mode is not available in Service Mode. Factory Use Only.
8. 8 Jam/Error Mask Mode

If the printer indicates any error (J-****/E-****), it is possible to mask (ignore, not to detect) it in
Jam/Error Mask Mode. The error (J-****/E-****) you have chosen to mask will not be detected by
masking. You can temporarily operate the printer as usual as normal condition even if a cause of
the error is not removed yet.
NOTE
Masking condition will be automatically canceled once you quit KIP Service Software or turn
off the printer.
Mask Target screen
1 2
Name Function
1 Paper Jam Switches to Jam Mask screen
2 Error Switches to Error Mask screen
8-159 K124sm8e8
Jam Mask screen
2 3
Name Function
1 Mask List Displays Mask items in drop-down menu
Choose one item that you want to mask.
2 Check All Starts jam masking against all the items
3 Uncheck All Cancels jam masking against checked items
4 media situation Specifies which situation to be masked.
to be masked
8-160 K124sm8e8
Error Mask screen
2 3
Name Function
1 Mask List Displays Mask items in the list
Select mask target(s) that you want to mask.
Starts error masking while item(s) is checked
2 Check All Starts error masking against all the items
3 Uncheck All Cancels error masking against checked items
8-161 K124sm8e8
8. 8. 1 Mask List
Jam Mask
0000 Roll 2 Set Roll 2 Deck Jam PH9
0001 Roll 1 Set Roll 1 Deck Jam PH7
0002 Feed Feeding Jam PH6
0003 Regist Registration Jam PH1
0004 Manual Manual Jam PH5
0005 Sep Internal Jam PH2
0006 Exit Fuser / Exit Cover Jam PH3
0007 Pickup Pickup Jam (Paper Tray) PH13
Error Mask
Main Motor Main Motor Error E-0010
Fuser Motor Fuser Motor Error E-0011
Press Motor Developer Press Motor Error E-0012
Dev. Set Developer Unit Set Error E-0070
Counter Counter Error E-0020
Im Corona Image Corona Output Error E-0031
Tr Corona Transfer Corona Output Error E-0033
Sp Corona Separation Corona Output Error E-0032
Dev. Bias Developer Bias Error E-0034
FPGA FPGA Error E-0050
Density Sensor Density Sensor Error E-0080
E-0081
8-162 K124sm8e8
8. 8. 2 Masking Jam
1. Press [Jam Error Mask] in Service Mode Home.
Mask Target screen appears.
8-163 K124sm8e8
2. Press [Paper Jam].
8-164 K124sm8e8
3. Select the desired target from the pull-down menu.
Check any of “Remain” / “Delay” / “Early” then the concerning sensor starts to ignore the
checked jam.
NOTE
Available mask situation selection (Remain, Delay, Early) may vary by KIP printer model.
8-165 K124sm8e8
8. 8. 3 Masking Error
1. Press [Jam Error Mask] in Service Mode Home.
Mask Target screen appears.
8-166 K124sm8e8
2. Press [Error].
8-167 K124sm8e8
3. Check items that you want to mask. Then the concerning sensor starts to ignore the checked
Error.
NOTE
No “Door Open” mask is available.
8-168 K124sm8e8
8. 9 Test Print Mode
It is possible to output some built-in test patterns as a stand alone plotter.
No external device (controller / scanner / network connection) is required for test pattern plotting.
Basic Setting screen
10 5
6
1
2 7
11 9
Name Function
1 Deck Displays media source in drop-down menu
Choose one item that you want to use for test print.
2 Width Displays media width of the selected media source in drop-down
menu
You can set a different width from the actual media.
3 Length Displays print length of the test print in drop-down menu
Specify one item for test print.
4 Magnification The print length will extend n times specified in “Magnifying”.
5 Media Type Displays media type in drop-down menu
Specify one media type of the selected media source.
6 Image Pattern Displays built-in image pattern number in drop-down menu
Specify one pattern that you want to plot.
7 Pattern Switch Specify a size code for the size of “repeated patterns” in a test
print image. (ex. band pattern width, grid square size, etc)
8 Number of Sheet Displays the number of sheets to be plotted
You can change the number by using On-screen Keypad.
9 Start Starts the configured test print
10 Option Switches to Option screen
8-169 K124sm8e8
Option screen
2
5
Name Function
1 Positive / Choose “Negative” for B/W inverting.
Negative
2 Image Displays Image Enhancement Level
Enhancement
3 Mirror Enables horizontal reverse image
4 Add Scale Adds scales on the test print
5 Basic Setting Switches to Basic Setting screen
8-170 K124sm8e8
8. 9. 1 Making Test Print
1. Press [Test Print] in Service Mode home.
8-171 K124sm8e8
2. Configure a test print job.
In Basic Setting tab, you can configure media source, type, length, image pattern selection,
number of sheets.
3. If necessary, open Sub Setting tab to configure some other settings.
4. Press [Enter] to start printing the configured test print.
8-172 K124sm8e8
8. 9. 2 Built-in Test Pattern
Pattern No.1 Pattern No.4 Pattern No.7
Pattern No.2 Pattern No.5 Pattern No.8
Pattern No.3 Pattern No.6
8. 10 Factory Adjustment Mode

This mode is mainly used at factory for adjustment and product operation test.
NOTE
Factory Adjustment Mode is not available in Service Mode. Factory Use Only.
8-173 K124sm8e8
8. 11 Special Operation Mode
Special Operation Mode has several kinds of special important functions to the machine.
(1) Clears the following recorded error

- E-0000 Fuser Temperature Rising Error
- E-0001 Fuser Over Temperature Error
- E-0002 Fuser Low Temperature Error
- E-0003 / 0004 Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error
(2) Clears the following history
- Jam History
- Error History
(3) Resets bias adjustment by Density Compensation Process
(4) Starts Toner Supply for initial toner
(5) Resets any counting parameters in Information Mode
NOTE
E-0000 / 0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004 (regarding Fuser Error) do not disappear automatically
even if you remove any cause of these errors.
You should clear the error in Special Operation Mode to allow the printer to be ready for
printing.
Operation Target screen
Name Function
1 Name of Mode Displays items in drop-down menu
Choose one item that you want to use.
2 Enter Switches to Confirmation screen
Clearing is not executed immediately once you press [Enter].
8-174 K124sm8e9
Counter Input screen
2 4
Name Function
1 Counter Name Displays the counter name you have chosen
2 Reading Displays the current counter value stored in the memory
3 Count Displays an input counter value by using On-screen Keypad
4 Rewrite Applies a new counter value in “Count” to the selected counter
5 Return Returns to Clear Target screen
8-175 K124sm8e9
8. 11. 1 List of Special Operation
Item No. Name Contents
0000 RAM Clear Clears any stored data in the memory
0001 Error Clear Clears E-0000 / 0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004
from the memory
0002 Jam History Clears Jam records J-**** in Jam History list
0003 Error History Clears Error records E-**** in Error History list
0004 Print Count Changes the counter value for Print Count (unit selectable)
0005 Total Count Changes the counter value for Total Count (linear meter)
0007 Toner Supply1 Starts toner supply / agitation in Developer Unit
0008 (Reserved)
0009 (Reserved)
0010 (Reserved)
0011 Info Data Clear Clears the Items 0012 to 0033 at a time
0012 Total Cut Clears each Item used in Information Mode
0013 Roll1 Cut See [8.4 Information Mode]
0014 Roll2 Cut
0015 Others Cut
0016 Total Image
0017 Manual1 Image
0018 Roll1 Image
0019 Roll2 Image
0020 Cassette Image
0021 Roll1F CL
0022 Roll2F CL
0023 Roll1B CL
0024 Roll2B CL
0025 Feed CL
0026 Reg. CL
0027 Pickup SL
0028 Sep. SL
0029 Stack SL
0030 Motor1 Time
0031 Motor2 Time
0032 LED Head on Time
0033 Motor3 Time
NOTE
Total Count (0005) and Print Count (0004) are stored on both PW11720 and the IPS. The
counting memory is always verified between them. If you replace one of them, the other will
automatically override the Count memory to the replaced component.
8-176 K124sm8e9
8. 11. 2 Clearing Fuser Error, Jam/Error History
8-177 K124sm8e9
2. Specify one item that you want to use from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
Item No. Clear Item Contents

0001 Error Clear Clears E-0000 / 0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004
from the memory
0002 Jam History Clears Jam records J-**** in Jam History list
0003 Error History Clears Error records E-**** in Error History list

Press [Agree] to clear the concerning record(s).
4. Once you press [Agree], it will turn deactivated. Press [RETURN].
8-178 K124sm8e9
8. 11. 3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process
NOTE
After replacing Developer Roller / toner refreshment, you must reset bias adjustment by
Density Compensation Process.
Otherwise a darker image appears because the adjusted values are too high voltage for the
refreshed Developer Unit.

8-179 K124sm8e9
2. Select [0006 Bias3 Count] from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].


Press [Agree] to reset Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process.
Then the system starts recalculation of the possible best Developer/Regulation Bias.
(This will take time.)
8-180 K124sm8e9
4. Input screen appears.
Input “0000000” with On-screen Keypad.
NOTE
The required value for the KIP 7100 to reset Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation
Process is “0000000”.
“0000000” to “0000003” correspond to the adjustment level in Density Compensation

Process.
For example, if you interchange the Developer Unit with your spare unit, you can manually
set a certain adjustment level that would be suitable for your spare unit.
5. The value is displayed in “Count” area.

8-181 K124sm8e9
8. 11. 4 Toner Supply Mode
8-182 K124sm8e9
2. Select [0007 Toner Supply1] from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
0007 Toner Supply1 Starts toner supply / agitation in Developer Unit
3. Confirmation screen appears. Press [Agree].

Toner supply / agitation starts. This will take minutes to complete.
8-183 K124sm8e9
4. Once you press [Agree], it will turn deactivated. Press [Return].
5. The screen goes back to Operation Target Screen. The status window shows “warm up” during
toner supply / agitation.
After the completion, it changes to “standby”.
8-184 K124sm8e9
8. 11. 5 Changing Counter Value
Reference
For any counting parameters, pressing [Enter] switches to Counter Input screen.
This does not effect to the current counter value.
NOTE
Total Count (0005) / Print Count (0004) are stored on both PW12420 and the controller. If
you replace one of them, the other will automatically copy the stored Count memory to the
replacement. For Total Count (0005) and Print Count (0004), this section would be required
only if you replace both PW12420 and the controller at a time.
8-185 K124sm8e9
2. Specify one item that you want to use from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
8-186 K124sm8e9
Reference
For any counting parameters, pressing [Enter] switches to Counter Input screen.
This does not effect to the current counter value.
8-187 K124sm8e9
4. Input a desired value with On-screen Keypad.
The value is displayed in “Count” area.
Example: 0000000 Æ 0006706
4. Press [RETURN].
8-188 K124sm8e9
8. 12 Send Firmware Mode
You can send a new version firmware program provided by the manufacturer to the printer.
Note that the firmware program is named “K124X##A.mot”.
NOTE
A firmware update does not effect to the current parameters. They remain unchanged.
But please be sure to make a backup in .RAM prior to any firmware update just in case.
Send Firmware screen
7
1
5
3 4
Name Function
1 Mode Select Use “Program Mode” only.
2 CPU Type Use “2398F” only.
3 Program Size Displays the file size of a selected firmware program (.mot fie)
4 Checksum Displays the checksum of a selected .mot file
5 Open File Locates a .mot file that you want to send to the printer
6 Update Sends a selected .mot file to the printer
7 COM Displays a COM port number on the controller to be used for
communication that has been configured in Serial Port Setting of
Log In screen
8-189 K124sm8e9
8. 12. 1 Sending Firmware to Printer
1. Press [Send Firmware] in Service Mode Home.
Send Firmware screen appears.
8-190 K124sm8e9
2. Choose “Program Mode” from Mode Select menu if not displayed.
8-191 K124sm8e9
3. Press [Select File] to locate and open a .mot file that you want to apply.
NOTE
For KIP 7100, its firmware program is always named “K124X##A.mot”
Do not open any other file.
8-192 K124sm8e9
4. Check for the program size and its checksum of the .mot file you have chosen.
Press [Update] to send it to the printer.
NOTE
(1) “Program Size” and “Checksum” vary by the firmware version.
(2) If you accidentally send an incorrect file to the printer, send a correct one when the
current transmission is completed.
8-193 K124sm8e9
8. 13 KIP Scanner Utility (for Old Scanner)
KIP Scanner Utility 1.29a or later is a program that provides several scanner adjustments.
- Shading (mono/color calibration)
- Feed Distance (1:1)
- Position (stitch)
8. 13. 1 Installation
NOTE
Below are the system requirements to operate KIP Scanner Utility.
• Windows 2000 / XP operating system
• USB 2.0 support
8. 13. 1. 1 Installing USB Driver (1.30 or later)

NOTE: Contact your KIP partner for the latest software and save it to any available storage
on your service PC.
1. Loosen 4 screws (M4x6) (1), remove 4 screws (M4x6) (2), and then remove Cover 10 (3).
2
2
1
1
2. Disconnect Scanner USB Cable (4) from IPS Assy and connect it to your PC.
NOTE
Scanner USB Cable (4) has a “SCANNER” tag near 4
the plug. Disconnect this cable and connect it to your
PC.
8-193 K124sm8eA
3. Turn on both your PC and the KIP 7100.
[Found New Hardware Wizard] starts automatically. Click [Next].
If the following message appears, choose “No, not this time” and click [Next].
4. Choose “Install the software automatically [Recommended]”. Click [Next].
NOTE
If the auto detection does not work properly, click “Install from a list of specific location
[Advanced]” to locate the driver software (.ini).
8-194 K124sm8eA
5. Click [Continue Anyway] when the following message is indicated.
6. Click [Finish] to close [Found New Hardware Wizard].
7. Open Device Manager, and confirm that “KIP K124SC” is operating properly.
8-195 K124sm8eA
8. 13. 1. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility (1.29a or later)
NOTE: Contact your KIP partner for the latest software and save it to any available storage
on your service PC.
1. Locate your SETUP.EXE for Scanner Utility and execute it.
2. The Setup program starts. Click [Next].
3. The destination of the software can be changed. Click [Next].
8-196 K124sm8eA
4. The name of the program folder can be changed. Click [Next].
5. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. Click [Finish].
8-197 K124sm8eA
6. Open the properties panel for the “Scanner Utility” shortcut on “Start” _”Program” _ “Scanner
Utility” _ “Scanner Utility”. (ex. right click on the shortcut)
7. Add the following text to the end of the target path. Click [Apply].
“(one byte space)/Maintenance”
8-198 K124sm8eA
8. 13. 2 Starting KIP Scanner Utility
Start KIP Scanner Utility by; “Start” _”Program” _ “ScannerUtility” _ “ScannerUtility”
(KIP Scanner Utility’s initial screen)
8-199 K124sm8eA
8. 13. 3 Displaying Scanner Information
It is possible to display the scanner information in the following way.
1. Select [Information] under [Scanner].
2. KIP Scanner Utility acquires the scanner information and displays it.
8-200 K124sm8eA
8. 13. 4 Scanner Adjustment Procedure
It is possible to make the following scanner adjustment with KIP Scanner Utility.
• Shading (calibration)
• Feed Distance (1:1)
• Position (stitching)
These adjustments are very important because they are greatly related with the image quality.
8. 13. 4. 1 Shading (calibration)

[Purpose of Shading (calibration)]
The pixels on the CIS are not same but they have their own characteristic.
This may be a problem because the inputs (density) from those pixels are uneven although they
read the same image (density).
But the Shading compensates the input from each pixel properly to remove the unevenness
among the pixels.
As a result the even level of input can be expected from every pixel after Shading.
Original (even density)
Dark Dark
Light Light
Before Shading After Shading
(Uneven inputs) (Even inputs)
On Shading adjustment, the pixels on the CIS will be calibrated in the default for R/G/B light
source by using input gaps between black and white on Shading Sheet.
Bar Code
Shading Sheet White Area
Black Area
The KIP 7100 uses R/G/B light sources not only for color reading but also for monochrome
reading. The scanner unit will be calibrated in monochrome/color at the same time.
[Necessary situation]
Shading is required when;

• Machine installation
• After replacing;
(1) CIS
(2) CIS Controller PCB (SVC CIS BD)
(3) Data Controller PCB (SVC Main BD K)
8-201 K124sm8eB
NOTE
(1) Shading adjustment should be performed with Shading Sheet (P/N: Z178300360, with a
bar code).
1 sheet of Shading Sheet is included in the product accessary. Keep it in safe custody.
(2) Shading adjustment should be performed with “KIP Scanner Utility 1.23 (or later)”.
No “K105Utility”.
(3) Please clean Scan Glasses before Shading.
[Operation]
1. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable.
2. Start KIP Scanner Utility.
3. Select [Calibration] under [Adjust].
4. At first it is required to calibrate all pixels.

Select [All] and then click [Execute].
You will be asked to set Shading Sheet.
8-202 K124sm8eB
5. Set Shading Sheet in the KIP 7100 accessory to the scanner noting the arrow direction.
NOTE
(1) Use the Shading Sheet in the KIP 7100 Accessory. The Shading
Sheet has a bar code on the top right.
A shading sheet without the bar code cannot properly calibrate the
KIP 7100 Scanner Unit. Bar code
(2) Handle Shading Sheet with great care. Keep it in safe custody for avoiding dirt, fold or
tear.
6. Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet, and the scanner reads it.
NOTE
(1) It takes about 7 minutes to complete Shading adjustment.
(2) This operation will calibrate “white balance” (monochrome) and “Color” at a time with
Shading Sheet.
8-203 K124sm8eB
7. When Shading is finished, the following message appears. Click [OK].
Open the scanner and reload Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [Confirm] to check the
result of Shading.
8. The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed. (It looks gray due to “calibrating” scan)
Scan image of Shading Sheet
8-204 K124sm8eB
9. Scroll the image right and left to find a strong black/white line that runs vertically in one pixel
wide. If there is no such line in the whole image, click [Close] to finish Shading.
The following picture is an example of the line (due to “defective pixel”).

A defective pixel needs individual pixel calibration in the later steps.
Defective pixel
NOTE
Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image.
This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks.
8-205 K124sm8eB
10. If you will calibrate an individual pixel, select [Specified part].
11. Move the pointer onto the scan image, and you will find a kind of red cursor.
red cross cursor defective pixel
8-206 K124sm8eB
12. Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it.
The defective pixel is selected by this operation.
If there are some more defective pixels, select them in the same way.
Match the vertical line to a defective pixel.
13. Click [Execute], and the selected “defective pixel” is compensated individually.
14. You will be asked to set Shading Sheet again.

Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK].
Check the result of Shading again.
When finished, click [Close].
15. Shading (“white balance” / “color” calibration) is completed.
8-207 K124sm8eB
8. 13. 4. 2 Feed Distance (1:1)
[Purpose of Feed Distance (1:1)]
The lengths between actual original image and scan image may become different each other if you
replace the Feed Roller of the Scanner Unit.
This is caused by the mechanical play that each Feed Roller has.
Actual original image Scan image
“Feed Distance” is the solution for this phenomenon.

It compares the actual original image and the scan image to know how much their lengths are
different.
Then “Feed Distance” calculates the best compensation (motor speed) automatically so that both
images should become as long as each other.
Feed Distance is required when;

(1) Feed Roller R
(2) Feed Roller F
Also you need to check whether the Feed Distance is proper after replacing the following parts.
(Please record the current setting value before the replacement and input the same value after the
replacement.)
(1) CIS
NOTE
(1) Feeding Distance adjustment should be
performed with Scanner Adjustment Chart
(P/N: Z058501590).
(2) Feeding Distance adjustment should be

performed with “KIP Scanner Utility 1.23 (or
later)”.
8-208 K124sm8eC
[Operation]
1. Measure the actual distance between “a point” and “c point” on the far left area of Scanner
Adjustment Chart, and between “b point” and “d point” on the far right area.
Let’s suppose that each distance is as follows.

Between “a point” and “c point (800)” is “799.7mm”
Between “b point” and “d point (800)” is 799.8mm
Scanner Adjustment Chart
a a b b
c 800 d 800
c 1000 d 1000
c 1100 d 1100
c 800 c 1150 d 1150 d 800
Measure between these 2 points. Measure between these 2 points.
NOTE
There are some number of “c point X” and “d point X” on the chart.
You can select any one, but better adjustment can be expected if you measure a longer
distance.
8-209 K124sm8eC
4. Select [Adjust Feed Distance] from [Adjust]. Adjust Feed Distance Dialog is indicated.
NOTE
(1) If [Adjust Feed Distance] does not appear, follow the instruction below.
a) Open the properties panel for a KIP Scanner

Utility shortcut. (ex. right click on the shortcut)
b) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
c) Click [Apply].
(2) Write down the current setting value

that will be displayed with [Current
Value].
8-210 K124sm8eC
5. At first, input the actual distance between “a point” and “c point” in [Actual Distance],
which you have measured at the former step “1”.
Actual distance between “a” and “b”
6. Set Scanner Adjustment Chart to the scanner unit, and then click [Scan].
7. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.

Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. (You do not have to change any setting this time.)
8-211 K124sm8eC
8. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of KIP Scanner Utility.
Scan image of the chart
Reference
You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse.
Press the F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image.
9. Indicate the enlarged image of “a point” on the screen, which was the measuring point at the
former step “1”.
8-212 K124sm8eC
10. Click the input window of [Theoretical Distance].
A red cursor appears on the screen.
11. Click the mouse once at the measuring point.
Click on the measuring point “a”.
8-213 K124sm8eC
12. Similarly indicate the enlarged image of “c point” and click the mouse at the measuring point.
Click on the measuring point “c”.
13. Some value is indicated in [Theoretical Distance] according to 2 measuring points you
specified at both steps “9” and “10”.
This value means the distance between “a point” and “b point” of the resulting scan image.
14. Click [Calculate].

The program automatically calculates the best compensation value considering the difference
of “Actual Distance” and “Theoretical Distance”.
The calculated compensation value (motor speed) is indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value].
8-214 K124sm8eC
15. Click [Set], and the calculated Feed Adjustment Value is validated.
16. It is necessary to check the balance of original feeding between left and right after validating
the new setting.
(Left side means “a-c points” side, and right side means “b-d points” side.)
Repeat the former steps from “3” to “12” also for the right side (between “b point” and “d point”),
and compare the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left (a-c points) and right
(b-d points).
You do not have to do anymore thing if the difference between left and right is within 0.2%.
(“within 0.2%” means the difference of indicated values is within +/-20.)
Please click [Close] without clicking [Set].
17. If the difference of the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left and right is larger than
0.2%, do as follows.
a) Measure the actual distance between the center of a-b points and that of c-d points on the chart.
Center of a-b points a b
c 800 d 800
c 1000 d 1000
Center of c-d points c 1100 d 1100

c 1150 d 1150
Measure between these 2 points.
b) Repeat the former steps from “3” to “12” for the center area.
c) Click [Set] to validate the Value indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value].
8-215 K124sm8eC
8. 13. 4. 3 Position (stitching)
[Purpose of Position (stitching)]
The scanner part of KIP 7100 reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image Sensor).
As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks.
Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. As a result there
occurs the duplication of image between neighboring Image Block (same image is commonly
included in the neighboring two Image Blocks).
Gap of CIS position
Overlaps of reading area
Vertical gap of image
Duplications of image
“Position” is the solution for these kinds of phenomenon.

It is possible remove the vertical gap of image by vertical positioning process (Y offset).
And it is also possible to remove the duplication of image by horizontal positioning process
(X overlap).
KIP 7100 has the function to adjust X/Y positioning by automatic. After X/Y positioning, adjustment
for the LE (leading edge) positioning should be performed manually.
Position is required when;

(1) CIS
NOTE
(1) Position adjustment should be performed with Stitch Adjustment Chart (P/N: Z168300580).
(2) Position adjustment should be performed with “KIP Scanner Utility 1.23 (or later)”.
8-216 K124sm8eC
[Operation]
3. Select [Automatic Adjustment] from [Adjust]. Scanner Adjustment Dialog is indicated.
NOTE
If [Automatic Adjustment] does not appear, follow the instruction below.
a) Open the properties panel for KIP Scanner

Utility shortcut. (ex. right click on the shortcut)
b) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
c) Click [Apply].
8-217 K124sm8eC
4. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner noting the set direction and press [OK].
Stitch Adjustment Chart
NOTE
An incorrect feeding of Stitch Adjustment Chart may result
in an error. Position Stitch Adjustment Chart with the center
of Original Table and avoid skewing.
5. After completing the scan, the following window will be displayed. Press [Close].
6. Automatic Adjustment for X/Y positioning is completed.

Continue to the next step for the LE positioning.
NOTE
After Automatic Adjustment for X/Y positioning, LE positioning is required. Be sure to follow
the later procedure to adjust the LE positioning.
8-218 K124sm8eC
7. Select [Adjust Position] from [Adjust]. Adjust Position subscreen is indicated.
8. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner again and press [Scan].
8-219 K124sm8eC
9. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.
Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. (You do not have to change any setting this time.)
10. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of KIP Scanner Utility.
Scan image of the chart
8-220 K124sm8eC
11. Enlarge the top center area by right dragging.
Reference
There is a gap between the leading edge of the scan image and the leading edge of the
chart at this time. This band area shows that both of the edges do not match together.
The gap will be removed after the completion of Position adjustment for the leading edge.
Leading edge
of image gap (band)
Leading edge
of original
reading start here original LE reading start here
original LE
8-221 K124sm8eC
12. Click “Origin” entry field of the subscreen. A red cross cursor appears on the scan image.
8-222 K124sm8eC
13. Click once on the top center of the chart in the scan image.
A value appears in the field.
Top center
NOTE
If you make any unintended clicks on the image, press [Close] and go back to step 8.
8-223 K124sm8eC
14. Press [Check] then [Set].
15. A dialog appears to prompt confirmation of the result. Press [OK].
8-224 K124sm8eC
16. Start Adjust Position again. Make a rescan of Stitch Adjustment Chart.
Confirm the result of the adjustment. If the gap disappears, LE positioning is completed.
No gap (band area)
NOTE
If the rescan image still has a gap, go back to step 11 to remove it completely.
Every scan image has a blank band on the leading edge by the gap.
Be sure to remove the gap completely.
gap (band)
If the image on the leading edge is missing, the reading start is too late. Go back to step 4.
reading start here reading start here
original LE original LE
Press Roller
17. The entire Position adjustment is completed.
8-225 K124sm8eC
8. 13. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware
It is possible to install a new Firmware to the KIP 7100 with KIP Scanner Utility.
1. Select [Update Firmware] under [Scanner].
2. Firmware Download Utility is displayed.

Click [Browse].
8-226 K124sm8eC
3. Select the Firmware component on the hard drive (or another drive). Click [Open].
NOTE
(1) A firmware file for KIP 7100 scanner unit should be named “k124_***.x”.
(2) Do not send any other file.

Doing so may result in malfunction of the scanner.
4. Confirm that the file name you will install is displayed.

Click [Start].
(The name of the firmware file or the CRC value may vary as the picture below is an example)
name of firmware file
5. A dialog is displayed, which request you to turn off the KIP 7100.
Turn off the machine.
6. Click [Exit] finally.
8-227 K124sm8eC
8. 14 K129 Diag (For New Scanner)
8.14. 1 K129 Diag Overview
“K129 Diag” is an integrated utility application that operates as an interface for monitoring,
checking and setting configuration for field service.
K129 Diag can run on a service PC, the customer’s PC and the “IPS (KIP Printer’s controller) with
its touchscreen” as well.
K129 Diag Home (version 1.0.0.3)
K129 Diag is required when;

- the Main Board is replaced
- one of the CIS is replaced
- you want to create a recovery point of the parameters ( = backup)
- you have to import the existing backup data to the scanner ( = restore)
- you want to confirm the detailed error status
- you want to upgrade the firmware...
NOTE
(1) The screenshot images in Chapter 8 may vary by system configuration / software
version.
Shown with available options.
(2) In this Chapter, explaining the procedure under the condition of “K129 Diag.exe” is
installed (existing) on KIP7100 embedded IPS and or Removable Storage.
In this case, the operation can be execute UI Touch Screen on “K129 Diag”.
8.14. 1. 1 K129 Diag System Requirements

- Microsoft Windows XP / Vista 32 bit, or Windows 7 64 bit / 32 bit Operating System
- USB 2.0 hardware support
* No warranty is given as to the entire functionality of K129 Diag on any system with the above operating system.
8-228 K124sm8eD
8.14. 1. 2 K129 Diag Tree Diagram of Screen Hierarchy
Home
Version: view software version of CPU / FPGA / USB firmware
Backup Data:
Save /Restore Backup Data
Edit Backup Data
Save / Restore Shading Data
Update:
Send CPU firmware
Send FPGA firmware
Send USB communication firmware
Motion:
Adjustment
Shading
Stitching
White Level Correct
LE Registration
Remove density difference between CIS blocks in B/W
Operation Check: LED, CIS, motor
Input Check: document sensor, switch
Error Check: get the internal error status
Counter: view the scanner’s operation count
Reset: re-establish the USB communication
(Gamma Data): not supported
(Scan): not supported
8-229 K124sm8eD
8.14. 2 Starting K129 Diag
1. Press [? HELP] on the Home screen.
2. Press [Service]. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
3. Service Configuration screen will appear. On “Setup Menu 1”, press [OK].
8-230 K124sm8eD
4. Press [Reset].
5. Minimize the “IPS Unattend” window.
6. Open “Diagnostics” folder (gear icon) in the lower right of the screen.
8-231 K124sm8eD
7. Run “K129 Diag”.
K129 Diag Home (version 1.0.0.3)
Reference
Other ways to run the "K129 Diag" are described on the next page.
8-232 K124sm8eD
Reference
1. Contact your KIP partner for K129Diag.exe and save it to any available storage on your
removable storage. Connect removable storage to UI monitor’s connector.
Removable storage
2. Select “Removable Disk”, and then run “K129 Diag.exe”.
8-233 K124sm8eD
8.14. 3 Version
Pressing [Version] recalls “Version” sub window that has a list of the current version information
about 3 firmware categories.
(may vary from the actual information)
version number
Type contents
convention
USB USB communication firmware 12920F**
CPU hardware control software 12920M**
FPGA image processing software 12920S**
Another information is the equipment’s serial No.
To close “Version” sub window, click the X button at the upper right corner.
8-234 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4 Backup Data
8.14. 4. 1 Changing Backup Data
1. Click [BackupData] to recall “Backup Data” sub window.
2. Click [Receive]
8-235 K124sm8eD
4. Double click on the row you want to change the setting value.
This section uses “6 Sleep Time 60” for example.
8-236 K124sm8eD
5. “Input” pad pops up. Directly type a value with your keyboard.
Clicking the field is not available. There is no caret functionality. (flashing “ | “ cursor)
The on-screen keypad is available. Press a number you want to input on the touchscreen.
To finalize the input, press [OK] on the bottom.
8-237 K124sm8eD
The other parameters can be changed in the same way in this period.
NOTE
At this time the setting change(s) is not validated yet.
8-238 K124sm8eD
8. Click [Send] on the bottom. The setting change(s) turns black.
Now it is sent to the Main Board.
NOTE
At this time the setting change(s) has just been sent to the Main Board, but is not validated
yet.
8-239 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4. 2 Saving the Current Backup Data
The current Backup Data (settings for hardware control) can be saved as a backup data file. (*.csv)
This file will be reused for restoring / replacing the Main Board.
2. Click [Receive]
8-240 K124sm8eD
4. Select [File] menu, and then click [Save As].
5. Specify a location to save the backup data file. (*.csv)

You can supply a file name for the csv.
8-241 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4. 3 Editing Backup Data File
You can edit a saved backup data file. (*.csv) Such an edited file can be used for restoring / setting
change purpose.
1. Open the backup data file (*.csv) with Notepad or Microsoft Excel for example.
2. (Notepad) You may change the numbers to the right of comma.

(Microsoft Excel) You may change values in the second column “B”.
3. Save the file.
4. You can use the file for restoring / setting change purpose.
Do not delete unchanged lines.
8-242 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4. 4 Restoring Backup Data
Importing an existing backup data file (*.csv) also requires retrieving the current parameters.
2. Click [Receive]
8-243 K124sm8eD
4. Select [File] menu, and then click [Open].
5. Specify a backup data file (*.csv) you want to import.
8-244 K124sm8eD
6. Once the backup data file is selected, setting difference(s) (between the current setting value
and one from the backup data file) turns blue.
Click [Send] on the bottom. The setting value(s) from the backup data file turns black.
NOTE
(1) At this time setting value(s) from the backup data file has just been sent to the Main
Board, but is not validated yet.
(2) If the selected backup data file

includes invalid setting value(s),
the concerning row in the list will
turn red. The scanner does not
accept the backup data currently
listed in the window.
8-245 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4. 5 Backup Data List
No. Subject Setting Range Reference Unit
0 Lead Regist 0 - 60 30 0.1mm
1 T Margin 0 - 200 100 0.1mm
2 reserved 0
3 Motor Correction 400 - 600 500 -
4 Offset Level 20 - 100 20 -
5 ED Gamma Select 0 - 4 3 (mode selector)
6 Sleep Time 0 - 60 14 1 minute
7 reserved 0
8 reserved 0
9 Doc. Entry Time 5 - 50 10 0.1 second
10 ISO/ANSI 0 - 3 3 (mode selector)
11 Doc. Entry Speed 0 - 9 3 (mode selector)
12 Correction Time 0 - 30 10 1 minute
13 Switching Step1 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x18A4 -
14 Switching Step2 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x0835 -
15 Stitch Setting1 0 - 4 4 (mode selector)
16 Stitch Setting2 0 - 1 1 (mode selector)
17 reserved 0
18 reserved 0
19 Ind. Language 1
20 Strobe 1(R) 1 255 128
21 Strobe 1(G)
22 Strobe 1(B) 1 255 128
23 Strobe 2(R) 1 255 128
24 Strobe 2(G) 1 255 128
25 Strobe 2(B) 1 255 128
26 Strobe 3(R) 1 255 128
27 Strobe 3(G) 1 255 128
28 Strobe 3(B) 1 255 128
29 Strobe 4(R) 1 255 128
30 Strobe 4(G) 1 255 128
31 Strobe 4(B) 1 255 128
32 Strobe 5(R) 1 255 128
33 Strobe 5(G) 1 255 128
34 Strobe 5(B) 1 255 128
35 Offset Block1-1 0 255 128
36 Offset Block1-2 0 255 128
37 Gain Block1-1 0 255 0
38 Gain Block1-2 0 255 0
39 Offset Block2-1 0 255 128
40 Offset Block2-2 0 255 128
41 Gain Block2-1 0 255 0
42 Gain Block2-2 0 255 0
43 Offset Block3-1 0 255 128
44 Offset Block3-2 0 255 128
45 Gain Block3-1 0 255 0
46 Gain Block3-2 0 255 0
47 Luminance 1 1 999 500
48 Luminance 2 1 999 500
49 Luminance 3 1 999 500
50 Luminance 4 1 999 500
51 Luminance 5 1 999 500
52 cis1/cis2 Main 0 200 100
53 cis2/cis3 Main 0 200 100
54 cis3/cis4 Main 0 200 100
55 cis4/cis5 Main 0 200 100
56 cis1 Sub 50 150 100
57 cis2 Sub 50 150 100
58 cis4 Sub 50 150 100
8-246 K124sm8eD
59 cis5 Sub 50 150 100
60 Digital Gain 0 2 1
61 Platen Samp Time 5 50 10
62 cis1 Detail 0 7 3
66 Overlap Image 0 1 0
67 Special Scan 0 2 0
68 Strobe Level 0 9 0
69 Reserved 0 0 0
70 Stitch Adjust1 0 200 100
118 Doc. Set pxl1(B) 0 0xFFFF 0x13A9
119 Doc. Set pxl1(W) 0 0xFFFF 0x10F4
120 Doc. Set thr(B) 0 0xFFFF 0x0032
8-247 K124sm8eD
121 Doc. Set thr(W) 0 0xFFFF 0x0032
122 Doc. Set pxl2(B) 0 0xFFFF 0x000A
123 Doc. Set pxl2(W) 0 0xFFFF 0x02BC
124 White Std pxl1 0 0xFFFF 0x0028
125 White Std pxl2 0 0xFFFF 0x1360
126 Platen Data1 0 1024 0
131 Platen Data R1 0 1024 0
136 Platen Data G1 0 1024 0
141 Platen Data B1 0 1024 0
146 Cis Offset R1 0 64 32
147 Cis Offset G1 0 64 32
148 Cis Offset B1 0 64 32
149 Cis Offset K1 0 64 32
166 Sub Strobe 1(R) 1 255 128
167 Sub Strobe 1(G) 1 255 128
168 Sub Strobe 1(B) 1 255 128
169 Sub Strobe 2(R) 1 255 128
170 Sub Strobe 2(G) 1 255 128
171 Sub Strobe 2(B) 1 255 128
172 Sub Strobe 3(R) 1 255 128
173 Sub Strobe 3(G) 1 255 128
174 Sub Strobe 3(B) 1 255 128
175 Sub Strobe 4(R) 1 255 128
176 Sub Strobe 4(G) 1 255 128
177 Sub Strobe 4(B) 1 255 128
178 Sub Strobe 5(R) 1 255 128
179 Sub Strobe 5(G) 1 255 128
180 Sub Strobe 5(B) 1 255 128
181 Cis Offset2 R1 0 1023 512
182 Cis Offset2 G1 0 1023 512
8-248 K124sm8eD
183 Cis Offset2 B1 0 1023 512
184 Cis Offset2 K1 0 1023 512
185 Cis Offset2 R2 0 1023 512
186 Cis Offset2 G2 0 1023 512
187 Cis Offset2 B2 0 1023 512
188 Cis Offset2 K2 0 1023 512
189 Cis Offset2 R3 0 1023 512
190 Cis Offset2 G3 0 1023 512
191 Cis Offset2 B3 0 1023 512
192 Cis Offset2 K3 0 1023 512
193 Cis Offset2 R4 0 1023 512
194 Cis Offset2 G4 0 1023 512
195 Cis Offset2 B4 0 1023 512
196 Cis Offset2 K4 0 1023 512
197 Cis Offset2 R5 0 1023 512
198 Cis Offset2 G5 0 1023 512
199 Cis Offset2 B5 0 1023 512
200 Cis Offset2 K5 0 1023 512
201 White Std pxl3
202 White Std pxl4
203 White Std pxl5
204 White Std pxl6
205 Reserved
206 Reserved
207 Reserved
208 Reserved
209 Sampling Width
210 Platen Data1 R1 0 0xFFFF 0x0000
215 Platen Data1 G1 0 0xFFFF 0x0000
220 Platen Data1 B1 0 0xFFFF 0x0000
8-249 K124sm8eD
255 Reading Select 0 1 0
* as of March 2012
0 Lead Regist
BUD No.0 is to shift the start timing of reading.

Increasing the value moves the start timing to the trailing edge side. (reading starts later)
Decreasing the value moves the start timing to the leading edge side. (reading starts earlier)
setting range step of increment
0 to 60 0.1mm
1 T Margin
BUD No.1 is to shift the stop timing of reading.

Increasing the value moves the stop timing to the trailing edge side. (reading stops later)
Decreasing the value moves the stop timing to the leading edge side. (reading stops earlier)
0 to 200 0.1mm
5 ED Gamma Select
BUD No.5 is a mode selector of which “Error Diffusion Gamma” mode to be used.
This is to be decided by your system configuration.
setting value Contents
0 ----
1 ----
2 ----
3 KIP7100
4 ----
NOTE
Do not change the set value [3].
6 Sleep Time
BUD No.6 is a timer setting for the scanner to run sleep mode. (Auto Power OFF)
The period of inactivity can be specified. The setting value “0” means Auto Power OFF disabled.
0 to 60 1 minute
8-250 K124sm8eD
9 Doc. Entry Time
BUD No.9 is a timer setting for the scanner to catch an inserted original.
Decreasing the value takes longer time to catch the original’s leading edge.
5 to 50 0.1 second
11 Doc. Entry Speed
BUD No.11 is a speed selector to catch an inserted original.

Increasing the value moves the original to the standby position slower.
setting range
0 to 9 0: fastest
9: slowest
12 Correction Time
BUD No.12 is a timer setting to run self calibration of white level.

The period of inactivity can be specified. The setting value “0” means self calibration disabled.
0 to 30 1 minute
15 Stitch Setting1
BUD No.15 is a mode selector for “fade transition stitch” at CIS borders. This is to diminish visual
density gap between CIS. This is effective for scanning with filters for Color, Grayscale, mono
“Photo”.
Contents
setting value
color gray mono
0* OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF OFF ON
2 ON ON OFF
3 ON ON ON
*Select “0” before starting Stitching Adjustment
8-251 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4. 6 Saving Shading Data
The current Shading Data (internal parameters for B/W level and image processing) can be saved
as a shading data file. (*.bin)
This file will be reused for restoring / replacing the Main Board.
2. Select [Shading Data] menu, and then click [Backup] to recall “Backup Shading Data” sub
window.
8-252 K124sm8eD
3. Click [select].
4. Specify a location to save the shading data file. (*.bin)

You can supply its file name.
5. The given file name appears in the upper field. Click [backup].
6. When “done” is displayed, saving the file is completed

Click the X button at the upper right corner to close “Backup Shading Data” sub window.
8-253 K124sm8eD
8.14. 4. 7 Restoring Shading Data
2. Select [Shading Data] menu, and then click [Restore] to recall “Backup Shading Data” sub
window.
8-254 K124sm8eD
3. Click [select].
4. Specify a shading data file (*.bin) you want to import.
5. The selected file name appears in the upper field. Click [restore].
6. When “done” is displayed, sending the shading data file to the scanner is completed
Click the X button at the upper right corner to close “Restore Shading Data” sub window.
NOTE
At this time the shading data has just been sent to the Main Board, but is not validated yet.
7. Turn off the scanner. Wait 3 seconds and then turn it on.
Now the selected shading data file is validated.
NOTE
If you quickly turn off and on again, “The device can run faster...” balloon would pop up.
This is because the scanner firmware may be loaded to the scanner’s memory incorrectly.
Please wait 3 seconds before turning on again.
8-255 K124sm8eD
8.14. 5 Update
“Update” is a functionality to send a firmware file of “CPU” “FPGA” “USB” to the Main Board.
NOTE
Updating “CPU” “FPGA” “USB” does not change the current parameters for “backup data”.
This is applied even if an interruption occurs while updating.
8.14. 5. 1 Sending Firmware to Scanner

1. Save a delivered firmware file to any available storage on the PC / removable storage.
Firmware
Type contents
File Extension
USB USB communication firmware 12920F**.iic
CPU hardware control software 12920M**.mot
FPGA image processing software 12920S**.bin
2. Run K129 Diag, and click [Update].
8-256 K124sm8eD
3. Click [Select].
4. Specify a firmware file you want to apply.
Type contents Firmware File Extension

USB USB communication firmware 12920F** .iic
CPU hardware control software 12920M** .mot
FPGA image processing software 12920S** .bin
5. The selected file name is displayed in the list. Put a check in the checkbox beside the file.
8-257 K124sm8eD
6. [Upload] button in the middle-right is now activated. Click it to send the firmware file to the Main
Board.
NOTE
You may add another firmware file (for example: CPU, and then FPGA) in the list, but you
can send only one file that is having a check mark at a time. The following example only
FPGA will be sent to the Main Board.
7. When “done” is displayed, sending the firmware file to the scanner is completed
Click the X button at the upper right corner to close “Update” sub window.
NOTE
At this time the firmware file has just been sent to the Main Board, but is not applied yet.
8. Turn off the scanner. Wait 3 seconds and then turn it on.
Now the selected shading data file is validated.
NOTE
If you quickly turn off and on again, “The device can run faster...” balloon would pop up.
This is because the scanner firmware may be loaded to the scanner’s memory incorrectly.
Please wait 3 seconds before turning on again.
8-258 K124sm8eD
8.14. 6 Motion
“Motion” contains 2 major categories, Adjustment and Operation Check.
Upper: Adjustment menu
Lower: Operation Check menu
Adjustment menu:
Shading Compensation creates shading data (defines B/W)
Stitching Adjustment calibrates joint coordinates at CIS borders
* White & Black Level Correct regular calibration for white level not supported
* Leading Edge Adjustment specifies the leading registration not supported
* Black Brightness Correct removes black density difference between CIS blocks not supported
* White Brightness Correct removes white density difference between CIS blocks not supported
For Operation Check menu, see [8.14. 6. 3 Operation Check].
8-259 K124sm8eD
8.14. 6. 1 Shading
Shading Compensation is to set the target black / white level based on a designated calibration
chart “Shading Sheet”.
One sheet of “Shading Sheet” is included in every scanner accessory.
NOTE
8-260 K124sm8eD
4. Select “Shading Compensation” in the upper drop-down menu.
8-261 K124sm8eD
NOTE
(1) It takes about 6 minutes to complete.
(2) If an error message occurs;

6. When Shading is finished, the system asks you whether you need confirmation.
Click No to finish Shading.
Reference
If you need confirmation, again set the Shading Sheet to the scanner, and then click [Yes].
Another window has the scanned image of Shading Sheet.
8-262 K124sm8eD
8.14. 6. 2 Stitching
Stitching Adjustment is to set the target black / white level based on a designated calibration chart
“Shading Sheet”.
One sheet of “Shading Sheet” is included in every scanner accessory.
NOTE
BUD No.15 (stitch setting 1) should be temporarily set to OFF “0” during Stitching
Adjustment.
8-263 K124sm8eD
2. Click [Receive]
8-264 K124sm8eD
5. “Input” pad pops up. Directly type “0” with your keyboard.
8-265 K124sm8eD
8-266 K124sm8eD
8. Click [Send] on the bottom. The setting change turns black.
8-267 K124sm8eD
NOTE
8-268 K124sm8eD
13. Select “Stitching Adjustment” in the upper drop-down menu.
NOTE
If an error message occurs;
8-269 K124sm8eD
15. When the scanning is finished, two sub windows “Stitch Simulate” and “Stitch Adjust” appear.
Enlarge “StitchAdjust” window.
Enlarge “Stitch Adjust” window.
8-270 K124sm8eD
16. There are 4 target signs at every border between the CIS.
In “Stitch Adjustment” window, Select [Jump] menu, and then click [CIS1 to CIS2]. The display
area will jump to the corresponding area on the scanned image.
If “Jump” does not move to the target exactly, manually scroll the image to catch the target in
the window.
8-271 K124sm8eD
17. Confirm the Stitching Adjustment results.
no misalignment horizontal misalignment vertical misalignment
18. Select [Jump] menu, and then click the other CIS borders to confirm the results.
If all of the 4 targets have no misalignment, go to step 25.
If any of the targets has misalignment, go to step 19 and after for manual correction.
8-272 K124sm8eD
19. First, correct horizontal misalignment as follows.
In “StitchSimulate” window, click the buttons (see below in blue frame) to increase /
decrease the setting value for “horizontal” (see below in red frame). This moves the image
block horizontally.
horizontal misalignment
Do the same way for all the 4 targets at the CIS borders if needed.
Setting values will turn red by setting changes. Setting value 1 step = 1 pixel to right
NOTE
(1) For horizontal correction, CIS 1 is the reference. You are asked to set the distance of shift
for CIS 2/3/4/5 against CIS 1.
1st: 2nd: 3rd: 4th:

Reference:
CIS 1
8-273 K124sm8eD
20. Second, correct vertical misalignment as follows.
In “StitchSimulate” window, click the buttons (see below in blue frame) to change the
setting value for “vertical” (see below in red frame), in order to move the image block vertically.
vertical misalignment
Do the same way for all the 4 targets at the borders.

Setting values will turn red by setting changes. Setting value 1 step = 1 pixel to trailing edge
NOTE
(1) For vertical correction, CIS 3 is the reference. You are asked to set the distance of shift
for CIS 1/2/4/5 against CIS 3.
2nd: 1st: 3rd: 4th:

Reference:
CIS 3

8-274 K124sm8eD
21. The manual correction is reflected to “StitchAdjust” window directly.
Reconfirm the manual correction result on the 4 targets.
If there is still misalignment, go back to step 10 and 11 to remove it.
NOTE
Be sure to reconfirm the manual correction result.
no misalignment
22. In “StitchSimulate” window, setting values in red are not finalized yet.
Click [Send].
23. Click [OK].
24. Once the change is sent to the Main Board, setting values turn black.
8-275 K124sm8eD
NOTE
26. In “StitchAdjust” window, select [Control] menu, and then click [Confirm-Scan] to make another
scan.
27. The rescan result can be checked in “StitchAdjust” window.
28. Click the X button at the upper right corner to close “StitchAdjust” and “StitchSimulate” sub
windows.
8-276 K124sm8eD
30. Click [Receive]
8-277 K124sm8eD
33. “Input” pad pops up. Directly type the number of the original setting value with your keyboard.
8-278 K124sm8eD
36. Click [Send] on the bottom. The setting change turns black.
8-279 K124sm8eD
8.14. 6. 3 Operation Check
Lower: Operation Check menu
Operation Check menu:

LED (Orange) lights the LED indicator (at the center of the Upper Unit) in orange
LED (Green) lights the LED indicator in green
LED (Red) lights the LED indicator in red
Motor operates Motor (document feed motor)
Motor (reverse) operates Motor reverse
CIS LED lights the R/G/B light source of the CIS
CIS LED (Red) lights the R light source of the CIS
CIS LED (Green) lights the G light source of the CIS
CIS LED (Blue) lights the B light source of the CIS
8-280 K124sm8eD
2. Select one of the component in the lower drop-down menu.

The selected component operates for some seconds, and then stops.
6. To close “Motion” sub window, click the X button at the upper-right corner.
8-281 K124sm8eD
8.14. 7 Input Check
“Input Check” is to be used for I/O check. When a given component gives a correct signal, the
name of the component will change the color.
8.14. 7. 1 Getting Input Signal

1. Click [Input Check] to recall “Input Check” sub window.
*
*
* Not available in KIP7100.
2. The names of the components are grayed at this time. Click [Start].
8-282 K124sm8eD
3. Now the names are active. When the status changes on a given component, the name will
change the color.
For example, open the Upper Unit, “Cover Open” turns read.
4. To close “Input Check” sub window, click [Stop].
5. Click the X button at the upper-right corner.
8-283 K124sm8eD
8.14. 7. 2 Signal List
Name Target Symbol default To change status,
Size Sensor 1 size detection: S_PH2 red Pass a sheet over the sensor.
A4 landscape, A3, 11”, 12”
Size Sensor 2 size detection: S_PH3 red
A2, 17”, 18”
A1, 22”, 24”
A0, 30”, 34”
36”
Document detects document insertion S_PH1 red
Sensor Front detects document jam
size detection:
A4 portrait
Document document jam S_PH7 red
Sensor Rear
Cover Open Upper Unit open S_PH8 black Open / close the Upper Unit.
Feed Feed Roller rotation S_PH9 (depends) Gently rotate the Feed Roller
Roller toward the rear.
Sensor
Power ON ---- ---- black
Signal
Scan Start ---- ---- black
Switch
Emergency Stop Emergency Stop Button S_MS1 black Press [Emergency Stop]
Switch pressed button.
Document Eject ---- ---- black
Switch
8-284 K124sm8eD
8.14. 8 Error Check
8.14. 8. 1 Getting Error Status
1. Click [Error Check] to recall “Error Check” sub window.
2. Click [Start] on the bottom.
8-285 K124sm8eD
3. Wait several seconds. If there is no error, the fields in the middle of the window indicate nothing.
4. To close “Error Check” sub window, click the X button at the upper-right corner.
8.14. 8. 2 Error List

communication error Connection lost.
- Check for the power supply and USB port.
document cover open Upper Unit is not closed.

- Firmly close the Upper Unit.
- Check PH8.
jam at document feed Document jam is detected.

- Remove the jammed document.
- Check PH7.
sequence error:
document feed roller HP Error on drive system. HP is not detected in the roller’s one
error rotation.
- Check PH9.
- Check drive system (gear, roller, motor).
shading sequence error Shading data is abnormal.
- Import the shading data.
- Perform Shading Compensation.
- Check the main Board.
document width error Size detection discrepancy.
- Check size sensors.
For the detailed troubleshooting procedure, see Chapter 7.
8-286 K124sm8eD
8.14. 9 Counter
Pressing [Counter] recalls “Scan Count” sub window.
board scan count for “slow mode” scans

normal scan count for normal speed
To close “Scan Count” sub window, click the X button at the upper right corner.
8.14.10 Reset
Pressing [Reset] recalls a dialog. If you click [Yes], the communication will be re-established as
another session.
8-287 K124sm8eD
Chapter 9
Appendix
K124sm9e1
9. 1 Schematic Wiring around Controller
IPS Assy for KIP 7100 (DC1 type)
USB USB USB

(relay at rear) (scanner) (relay at UI front)
vacant Ethernet Interface 8
VGA (UI) COM (UPS)

IPS Power
OPTION: COM USB USB
(folder) (PW12420) (UI)
Interface 8
IPS Power
Ethernet
USB to PW12420
USB Relay at rear
USB from Scanner

USB from UI
VGA from UI
USB Relay at UI front
9-1 K124sm9e2
9. 2 Overall Diagram (for Old Scanner)
9-2 K124sm9e2
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪧㫉㫆㪺㪼㫊㫊㩷㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㪬㪪㪙
,
㪱㪮㪪㪎㪌㪘㪝㪄㪈㪉㪆㪡

䌄䌃䌐䋲㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭 ,

㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㪝㪩㪦㪥㪫㪩㪜㪘㪩

0%
㪘㪚㩷㪈㪇㪇㪭䌾㪉㪋㪇㪭 )0&

&%&%
㪟㪛㪛㪬㪪㪙㪬㪪㪙㪩㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪪㪙
%QPXGTV2%$
+0)
0%

)0&
, 㪣㪘㪥㨪㨪㪩㪡㪄㪋㪌
㪞㪥㪛㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
4:& 㪚㪦㪤㩷㪈
4 4
6:& 㪚㪦㪤㩷㪉

)0& 4:&
㪤㪦㪫㪟㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
4 %65
㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥 6:&
)0&
㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㩷㩿㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪀
,
㪭㪞㪘
. 㪧㪮㪈㪉㪋㪉㪇
%1/ 01
01
, 㪬㪪㪙
0% ,
㪩㪰㪎㪇㪈 %1/ 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪋
01
0% %1/ 㪬㪠㩷㪬㪪㪙㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㪧㪚㪠
. 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪉 01 㪤㪸㫏㪅㩷㪈㪮㪬㪪㪙
0% 6:&

-ǡ9 㪤㪸㫏㪅㩷㪈㪋㪮 4:&
%1/ )0&
0 86# 㪩㪏㪫㫀㫅㫐 ,
5*76&190

4 , 㪭㪞㪘㪬㪪㪙

㪧㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㩷㪧㪚㪙㪞㪥㪛

,
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㩿㪬㪪㪙㪈㪅㪈㪀
㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪉㪋㩷㪇㪈
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
㪫㫆㫌㪺㪿㩷㪪㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㩷㪣㪚㪛

. 0 . 㪬㪪㪙
,

%+4%7+6$4'#-'4 㩿㪬㪪㪙㪉㪅㪇㪀
.+0'(+.6'4 㪚㪙㪈 219'459+6%*
59 722'4+0659 (75'4+0659
+0.'6㧸 5& # $ # $
,
㪠㪥㪣㪜㪫㪣㪝㪈䋱䋵䌁 %'
#%
. 䌄䌃䌐䋱㪣㪜㪙㪉㪉㪌㪝㪄㪇㪌㪉㪋㪄㪬
+0.'60 5& # $ # $

0%
5&
%' /5
, /5
,
,
#%
0
0%
㪉㪋㪭㪄㪐㪘㩷㩿㪧㪜㪘㪢㩷㪈㪋㪘㪀㪌㪭㪄㪌㪘
㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
4 ,
㪛㪜㪟㪬㪤㪠㪛㪠㪝㪰㩷㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥
)0&

)0&

)0&

㪪㪺㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪦㫍㪼㫉㪸㫃㫃㩷㪛㫀㪸㪾㫉㪸㫄
)0&
)0&

)0&
*'#6'4.#/2%'06'4
㪟㪈㩿㪩㪜㪡㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪪㪠㪛㪜㪀
8
8
8
8
8
*'#6'44'.#; 㪢㪈㪉㪋㪪㪚
&'*7/+&+(;126+10‫ޓ‬㧔2CRGT7PKV㧕 &'*7/+&+(;126+10‫ޓ‬㧔/CKP7PKV㧕
HTQO,% 㪠
4; , , / / ,
5& 㪈㪉㪇㪭㪆㪌㪌㪇㪮
㪈㪉㪇㪭㪄㪈㪢㱅㪆㪈㪌㪮㩷㩷㫏㩷㪋 +0659 (75'4 /#+0
㪫㪪㪌㪤㪪㪏㩿㪡㪈㪇㪎㪀 *'#6'4.#/25+&'
㪝㪬㪪㪜㩷㩿㪉㪌㪇㪭㩷㪫㪊㪅㪈㪌㪘㪟㩷㫏㩷㪊㪀
㪟㪉㩿㪛㪩㪬㪤㩷㪪㪠㪛㪜㪀 /1614 /1614
4
4
4
,
㪟㪊 ,
5& , ǰ ,
, ,
# $
5& 䌍䌍 4
5& , ,
㪟㪋 , ǰ , # $
㪟㪜㪘㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫 ':+6 㪈㪉㪇㪭㪆㪎㪌㪇㪮 , , , ,
, 5'0514
6*'4/156#6
5& 㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡 6*'4/+5614 6*'4/+5614
5& 㪫㪪㪊㪧㪟㪊
㪫㪪㪈㪫㪪㪉㪫㪟㪉㪫㪟㪈
㪘㪨㪡㪋㪉㪍㪭
ǰ ǰ
()176
$4#-'
()176
$4#-'
㪫㪪㪍 ,
)0&

)0&

, 䌾䌾䌾䌾 ǰ ǰ
4
4
4
㪟㪌 , 554 554 㪘
, 5& , ǰ ,
8
8

䋫䋭䋫䋭 VQ*82
%'06'4
4+)*6

㪝㪈
㪝㪉
㪝㪊
%'
5+&'

, ǰ , 4 4
%'06'4
㪟㪍㪪㪮㪉
, ,
VQ, ,
.'(6
5+&'
&'*7/+&+(;
4 4 5& 㪪
5& 㪫㪪㪋 *'#6'459 4
4 4 )0&

4 4 , , ,
)0&

㪚㪘㪪㪪㪜㪫㪫㪜㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩷㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥
5&
, 㪤
㪡㪢
㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡㪞㪄㪈㪇㪌㪊㪄㪢㪈㪉㪩㪙㪄㪊㪏㪞㪤㪄㪟㪚㪙㪇㪉㪄㪉㪋 HTQO5& 㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀
2+%-72 2#2'45'6 2#2'45'6 2#2'45'6 㪞 HTQO5&
㪪㪣㪈㪙㪣㪏
5'0514 5'0514 51.'01+& /1614 8
( 㪧㪟㪈㪌
8 8 㪞㪄㪈㪇㪌㪊㪄㪢㪈㪉㪘㪪㪝㪥㪐㪇㪊㪎㪉
㪧㪟㪈㪊㪧㪟㪈㪋㪪㪣㪊㪤㪎 5&
5& 5& 㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡 56#%- +25

VQ29

䌍㪝 56#%- 51.'01+& %11.+0)$.19'4

5'0514
,
㪪㪫㪘㪚㪢㪜㪩㩷㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥 %'
VQ,%
%#55'66'70+6

㪩㪜㪚㪜㪠㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㪧㪚㪙㪫㪩㪘㪥㪪㪤㪠㪪㪪㪠㪦㪥㩷㪧㪚㪙
,
)0&

, , ,
5&
㪧㪮㪌㪋㪐㪇㪧㪮㪌㪋㪐㪈 5&
/5

59+6%*
5& 㪰 )0&

5&
㪛

VQ, ,
5& 4 5& ,

VQ2#2'4 4
8
*'#6'4&114
, , 70+6

59+6%*
,
/5
, ,
, 㪯
8
( VQ, 㪣㪜㪛㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛
VQ,
5& 㪟
VQ29
%' 㪧
%0#㨪%0# %0$㨪%0$

,
, ,
, HTQO
㪜
5&
VQ*82
㪰㪧
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
㪮 HTQO5&
,
,
,
,
,
㪭㪯㪪
HTQO5&
HTQO5& HTQO,% HTQO5&
,$㨪,$ ,#㨪,# ,㨪 ,㨪 ,㨪
8
8
8
8
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
6*
6*
)0&
)0&
8
)0&
6Z&
4Z&
)0&

*'#6
*'#6
8
)0&
5+)+0
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪘㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪙㪬㪪㪙
56#%-5
%5+)+0
%5'65
5+)176
*'#64;
%2+%-5
8
56#%-5.
%2+%-5.
%5+)176
*'#6':+6
%5'6/.&
219'41((
*'#6/64)
*'#6/%.-
*'#6/&+4
/#+0/64)
/#+0/%.-
/#+0/&+4
&'%-120
%5'6/64)
*'#6/.&
/#+0/.&
/512'0
㪛㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪧㪚㪙
㪧㪮㪈㪉㪋㪉㪇
$+#5#0.1)
176#0.1)
176#0.1)
10.+0'.'&
&11412'0
4')+56%.
%.'#064)
4'5+565
%.'#059
$+#564)
$+#559
64#0.1)
.%&&#6#
4(&%.
4$-%.
24'55/
%11.$.
610'4/
4'0%5
45'65
(''&%.
4$-%.
4(&%.
4'0%5
45'65
610'45
24'555
(''&$.
*'#6$.
$+#5.&
$+#5%4
8.%1((
.%&%.-
564+25
/#0+0
&'05#0
4'&)'
4'0%5
/5%764
/5%76.
&+5%0
.%&45
.%&9'
.%&'0
&'055
/%76.
/%764
*8+/
*864
*8#%
+/.&
64.&
#%.&
'4
'4
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
59
59
59
59
59
)0&
)0&
)0&
8
8
8
8
8
HTQO5&
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
㪞
㪟 HTQO5&

,
6Q,

VQ219'459
HTQO5& 6Q, HTQO&%2
㪭 , ,
/5
㪛㪘
㪤 %0 %0 %0 %0
)0&

8
8
, 㪝 %0 㪟㪭㩷㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪪㪬㪧㪧㪣㪰
5& 㪧㪮㪍㪍㪌㪋
8
(
㪜 )0&
㪜㪬㪢㪈㪤㪞㪘㪍㪇㪟㪘

㪠 HTQO
,% 5& ,
&11459+6%*
610'4A/
24'55A/
(''&A$.
4 㪋㪈
722'470+6
%64$+#5
&'8$+#5
, 8
52$+#5
%.$+#5
㪏㪊
8
8
8
8
8
'4
VQ, 㪉㪌
*8
*8
*8
㪮
.'&
㪍㪎
59
59
59
59
59
㪧㪟㪉 , 㪐㪈㪇

㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡

4 4
564+2

275*59+6%*
176276
176276
6#$
6#$
6#$
5'0514
176276
176276
176276
/5
,
&11459+6%*
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀
㪧㪮㪍㪍㪐㪊
,

,
4
, 4 4 %0
.%&A&
0%
0%
)0&
8&&
49
45
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&

'
㪐㪉㪛㪩㪬㪤
㪣㪚㪛
㪏㪈㪣㪈㪍㪏㪉㪇㪇㪡㪇㪇㪇
,% 㪊㪈㪇
㪍㪌
4 㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪎㪇
&%8 ,%
㪐㪈㪎㪋
)0&

㪍㪎 ,%
,%
,%
㪌
㪏
㪋
㪊
)0&
4
㪪㪬㪙㪬㪠㩷㪡㪠㪞㪬
8 㪈㪇㪉 ,
㪈㪐
㪌㪎 ,
㪍㪋㪙㪣㪎
㪏㪊 4 㪛㪈㪉㪝㪄㪉㪋㪙㪣㪧㪮㪈㪇㪌㪊㪇
㪈㪇㪉㪪㪼㫇㪅㩷
(''&
$.19'4 㪣㪜㪛㩷㪧㪚㪙
, 㪚㪣㪈
㪤㪠㪚㪌㪥㪜㪄㪋㪌
, ,% 4')+56

, 8 %.76%*
VQ5%#00'4
㪡
, 㪢
,
,
, , 5& 5& 5&

, 5&
, 5&
4
, , , , , , ,
, , , ,
, 㪧㪟㪌㪧㪟㪈

4+)*6
,
.'(6
/#07#.5'6 4'5
4'5+56
䌍
䌍 5'0514 5'0514 ,
, , 㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈 , , , ,

㪤㪪㪎㪤㪪㪍㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀
/ 㪟㪦㪤㪜 /
㪚㪣㪎㪚㪣㪍㪧㪟㪈㪇
㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪉㪊㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡
㪧㪟㪐㪚㪣㪊㪚㪣㪌㪚㪣㪋㪧㪟㪏㪧㪟㪎㪧㪟㪍㪧㪟㪈㪉
%766'4 㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥䌍㪫㪣㪪㪈㪛㪬㪉㪋㪈㪈㪄㪈
㪧㪟㪋
㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪇㪐㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪤㪠㪚㪌㪥㪜㪄㪋㪌㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪇㪐㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪉㪊㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 24'55 24'55
/1614
41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. (''& (''& / 610'4 /1614 5'0514
$#%- (''& '0%1&'4 5'6 (''& $#%- (''& '0%1&'4 5'6 5'0514 '0%1&'4 㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪛㪬㪉㪋㪊㪈㪄㪉 5'0514 㪧㪟㪈㪈
%.76%* %.76%* .'(6 4+)*6 .'(6 4+)*6
5'0514 5'0514 %.76%* %.76%* %.76%* 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 610'4/1614 㪛㪜㪭㪜㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪬㪧㪧㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪙㪣㪍㪙㪣㪌㪞㪧㪉㪰㪋㪇㪇㪈㪇㪢㪇㪝㪙㪣㪋㪙㪣㪊
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㪧㪮㪈㪇㪌㪊㪇 &'05+6; 㪛㪈㪉㪝㪄㪉㪋㪙㪚
㪜㫉㪅㩷㪣㪜㪛㩷㪧㪚㪙㪘㪪㪝㪥㪍㪇㪊㪎㪉
5'0514 *'#6'4$.19'4
%11.$.19'4
KIP 7100 Overall Circuit Diagram (USA/120V)

㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪧㫉㫆㪺㪼㫊㫊㩷㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㪬㪪㪙
,
㪱㪮㪪㪎㪌㪘㪝㪄㪈㪉㪆㪡

䌄䌃䌐䋲㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭 ,

㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㪝㪩㪦㪥㪫㪩㪜㪘㪩

0%
㪘㪚㩷㪈㪇㪇㪭䌾㪉㪋㪇㪭 )0&

&%&%
㪟㪛㪛㪬㪪㪙㪬㪪㪙㪩㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪪㪙
%QPXGTV2%$
+0)
0%

)0&
, 㪣㪘㪥㨪㨪㪩㪡㪄㪋㪌
㪞㪥㪛㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
4:& 㪚㪦㪤㩷㪈
4 4
6:& 㪚㪦㪤㩷㪉

)0& 4:&
㪤㪦㪫㪟㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
4 %65
㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥 6:&
)0&
㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㩷㩿㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪀
,
㪭㪞㪘
. 㪧㪮㪈㪉㪋㪉㪇
%1/ 01
01
, 㪬㪪㪙
0% ,
㪩㪰㪎㪇㪈 %1/ 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪋
01
0% %1/ 㪬㪠㩷㪬㪪㪙㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩㪧㪚㪠
. 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪉 01 㪤㪸㫏㪅㩷㪈㪮㪬㪪㪙
0% 6:&

-ǡ9 㪤㪸㫏㪅㩷㪈㪋㪮 4:&
%1/ )0&
0 86# 㪩㪏㪫㫀㫅㫐 ,
5*76&190

4 , 㪭㪞㪘㪬㪪㪙

㪧㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㩷㪧㪚㪙㪞㪥㪛

,
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㩿㪬㪪㪙㪈㪅㪈㪀
㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪉㪋㩷㪇㪈
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
㪫㫆㫌㪺㪿㩷㪪㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㩷㪣㪚㪛

. 0 . 㪬㪪㪙
,

㪠㪥㪣㪜㪫 %+4%7+6$4'#-'4 㩿㪬㪪㪙㪉㪅㪇㪀
㪚㪙㪈㪩㪞㪄㪉㪇㪏㪝㪉 219'459+6%*
.+0'(+.6'4 59 722'4+0659 (75'4+0659
+0.'6㧸㧝 5& # $ # $
,
䋱䋰䌁㪣㪝㪈 %' 㪣㪜㪙㪉㪉㪌㪝㪄㪇㪌㪉㪋㪄㪬
5& #%
. 䌄䌃䌐䋱
+0.'60 # $ # $

0%
5&
%' /5
, /5
,
,
#%
0
0%
㪉㪋㪭㪄㪐㪘㩷㩿㪧㪜㪘㪢㩷㪈㪋㪘㪀㪌㪭㪄㪌㪘
㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
4 ,
㪛㪜㪟㪬㪤㪠㪛㪠㪝㪰㩷㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥
)0&

)0&

)0&

4
㪪㪺㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪦㫍㪼㫉㪸㫃㫃㩷㪛㫀㪸㪾㫉㪸㫄
)0&
)0&

)0&
*'#6'4.#/2%'06'4
㪟㪈㩿㪩㪜㪡㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪪㪠㪛㪜㪀
8
8
8
8
8
*'#6'44'.#; 㪢㪈㪉㪋㪪㪚
&'*7/+&+(;126+10‫ޓ‬㧔2CRGT7PKV㧕 &'*7/+&+(;126+10‫ޓ‬㧔/CKP7PKV㧕
HTQO,% 㪠
4; , , / / ,
5& 㪉㪊㪇㪭㪆㪌㪌㪇㪮
㪉㪊㪇㪭㪄㪊㪅㪌㪢㱅㪆㪈㪌㪮㩷㩷㫏㩷㪋 +0659 (75'4 /#+0
㪫㪪㪌㪤㪪㪏㩿㪡㪈㪇㪎㪀 *'#6'4.#/25+&'
㪝㪬㪪㪜㩷㩿㪉㪌㪇㪭㩷㪫㪊㪅㪈㪌㪘㪟㩷㫏㩷㪊㪀
㪟㪉㩿㪛㪩㪬㪤㩷㪪㪠㪛㪜㪀 /1614 /1614
4
4
4
,
㪟㪊 ,
5& , ǰ ,
, ,
# $
5& 䌍䌍 4
5& , ,
㪟㪋 , ǰ , # $
㪟㪜㪘㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫 ':+6 㪉㪊㪇㪭㪆㪎㪌㪇㪮 , , , ,
, 5'0514
6*'4/156#6
5& 㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡 6*'4/+5614 6*'4/+5614
5& 㪫㪪㪊㪧㪟㪊
㪫㪪㪈㪫㪪㪉㪫㪟㪉㪫㪟㪈
ǰ ǰ
()176
$4#-'
()176
$4#-'
㪫㪪㪍 ,
)0&

)0&

, 䌾䌾䌾䌾 ǰ ǰ
4
4
4
㪟㪌 , 554 554 㪘
, 5& , ǰ ,
8
8

䋫䋭䋫䋭 VQ*82
%'06'4
4+)*6

㪝㪈
㪝㪉
㪝㪊
%'
5+&'

, ǰ , 4 4
%'06'4
㪟㪍㪪㪮㪉
, ,
VQ, ,
.'(6
5+&'
&'*7/+&+(;
4 4 5& 㪪
5& 㪫㪪㪋 *'#6'459 4
4 4 )0&

4 4 , , ,
)0&

㪚㪘㪪㪪㪜㪫㪫㪜㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩷㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥
5&
, 㪤
㪡㪢
㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡㪞㪄㪈㪇㪌㪊㪄㪢㪈㪉㪩㪙㪄㪊㪏㪞㪤㪄㪟㪚㪙㪇㪉㪄㪉㪋 HTQO5& 㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀
2+%-72 2#2'45'6 2#2'45'6 2#2'45'6 㪞 HTQO5&
㪪㪣㪈㪙㪣㪏
5'0514 5'0514 51.'01+& /1614 8
( 㪧㪟㪈㪌
8 8 㪞㪄㪈㪇㪌㪊㪄㪢㪈㪉㪘㪪㪝㪥㪐㪇㪊㪎㪉
㪧㪟㪈㪊㪧㪟㪈㪋㪪㪣㪊㪤㪎 5&
5& 5& 㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡 56#%- +25

VQ29

䌍㪝 56#%- 51.'01+& %11.+0)$.19'4

5'0514
,
㪪㪫㪘㪚㪢㪜㪩㩷㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥 %'
VQ,%
%#55'66'70+6

㪩㪜㪚㪜㪠㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㪧㪚㪙㪫㪩㪘㪥㪪㪤㪠㪪㪪㪠㪦㪥㩷㪧㪚㪙
,
)0&

, , ,
5&
㪧㪮㪌㪋㪐㪇㪧㪮㪌㪋㪐㪈 5&
/5

59+6%*
5& 㪰 )0&

5&
㪛

VQ, ,
5& 4 5& ,

VQ2#2'4 4
8
*'#6'4&114
, , 70+6
59+6%*
,
/5
, ,
, 㪯
8
( VQ, 㪣㪜㪛㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛
VQ,
5& 㪟
VQ29
%' 㪧
%0#㨪%0# %0$㨪%0$

,
, ,
, HTQO
㪜
5&
VQ*82
㪰㪧
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
㪮 HTQO5&
,
,
,
,
,
㪭㪯㪪
HTQO5&
HTQO5& HTQO,% HTQO5&
,$㨪,$ ,#㨪,# ,㨪 ,㨪 ,㨪
8
8
8
8
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
6*
6*
)0&
)0&
8
)0&
6Z&
4Z&
)0&

*'#6
*'#6
8
)0&
5+)+0
㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪘㪚㪟㪘㪥㪥㪜㪣㩷㪙㪬㪪㪙
56#%-5
%5+)+0
%5'65
5+)176
*'#64;
%2+%-5
8
56#%-5.
%2+%-5.
%5+)176
*'#6':+6
%5'6/.&
219'41((
*'#6/64)
*'#6/%.-
*'#6/&+4
/#+0/64)
/#+0/%.-
/#+0/&+4
&'%-120
%5'6/64)
*'#6/.&
/#+0/.&
/512'0
㪛㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪧㪚㪙
㪧㪮㪈㪉㪋㪉㪇
$+#5#0.1)
176#0.1)
176#0.1)
10.+0'.'&
&11412'0
4')+56%.
%.'#064)
4'5+565
%.'#059
$+#564)
$+#559
64#0.1)
.%&&#6#
4(&%.
4$-%.
24'55/
%11.$.
610'4/
4'0%5
45'65
(''&%.
4$-%.
4(&%.
4'0%5
45'65
610'45
24'555
(''&$.
*'#6$.
$+#5.&
$+#5%4
8.%1((
.%&%.-
564+25
/#0+0
&'05#0
4'&)'
4'0%5
/5%764
/5%76.
&+5%0
.%&45
.%&9'
.%&'0
&'055
/%76.
/%764
*8+/
*864
*8#%
+/.&
64.&
#%.&
'4
'4
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
59
59
59
59
59
)0&
)0&
)0&
8
8
8
8
8
HTQO5&
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
㪞
㪟 HTQO5&

,
6Q,

VQ219'459
HTQO5& 6Q, HTQO&%2
㪭 , ,
/5
㪛㪘
㪤 %0 %0 %0 %0
)0&

8
8
, 㪝 %0 㪟㪭㩷㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪪㪬㪧㪧㪣㪰
5& 㪧㪮㪍㪍㪌㪋
8
(
㪜 )0&
㪜㪬㪢㪈㪤㪞㪘㪍㪇㪟㪘

㪠 HTQO
,% 5& ,
&11459+6%*
610'4A/
24'55A/
(''&A$.
4 㪋㪈
722'470+6
%64$+#5
&'8$+#5
, 8
52$+#5
%.$+#5
㪏㪊
8
8
8
8
8
'4
VQ, 㪉㪌
*8
*8
*8
㪮
.'&
㪍㪎
59
59
59
59
59
㪧㪟㪉 , 㪐㪈㪇


4 4
564+2

275*59+6%*
176276
176276
6#$
6#$
6#$
5'0514
176276
176276
176276
/5
,
&11459+6%*
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀
㪧㪮㪍㪍㪐㪊
,

,
4
, 4 4 %0
.%&A&
0%
0%
)0&
8&&
49
45
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&

'
㪐㪉㪛㪩㪬㪤
㪣㪚㪛
㪏㪈㪣㪈㪍㪏㪉㪇㪇㪡㪇㪇㪇
,% 㪊㪈㪇
㪍㪌
4 㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪎㪇
&%8 ,%
㪐㪈㪎㪋
)0&

㪍㪎 ,%
,%
,%
㪌
㪏
㪋
㪊
)0&
4
㪪㪬㪙㪬㪠㩷㪡㪠㪞㪬
8 㪈㪇㪉 ,
㪈㪐
㪌㪎 ,
㪍㪋㪙㪣㪎
㪏㪊 4 㪛㪈㪉㪝㪄㪉㪋㪙㪣㪧㪮㪈㪇㪌㪊㪇
㪈㪇㪉㪪㪼㫇㪅㩷
(''&
$.19'4 㪣㪜㪛㩷㪧㪚㪙
, 㪚㪣㪈
㪤㪠㪚㪌㪥㪜㪄㪋㪌
, ,% 4')+56

, 8 %.76%*
VQ5%#00'4
㪡
, 㪢
,
,
, , 5& 5& 5&

, 5&
, 5&
4
, , , , , , ,
, , , ,
, 㪧㪟㪌㪧㪟㪈

4+)*6
,
.'(6
/#07#.+0 4'5+56
䌍
䌍 5'0514 5'0514 ,
, , 㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈 , , , ,

㪤㪪㪎㪤㪪㪍㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀
/ 㪟㪦㪤㪜 /
㪚㪣㪎㪚㪣㪍㪧㪟㪈㪇
㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪉㪊㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡
㪧㪟㪐㪚㪣㪊㪚㪣㪌㪚㪣㪋㪧㪟㪏㪧㪟㪎㪧㪟㪍㪧㪟㪈㪉
%766'4 㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥䌍㪫㪣㪪㪈㪛㪬㪉㪋㪈㪈㪄㪈
㪧㪟㪋
㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪇㪐㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪤㪠㪚㪌㪥㪜㪄㪋㪌㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪇㪐㪤㪠㪚㪏㪥㪜㪄㪉㪊㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪞㪧㪈㪘㪎㪊㪘㪇㪇㪇㪡㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 24'55 24'55
/1614
41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. 41.. (''& (''& / 610'4 /1614 5'0514
$#%- (''& '0%1&'4 5'6 (''& $#%- (''& '0%1&'4 5'6 5'0514 '0%1&'4 㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪛㪬㪉㪋㪊㪈㪄㪉 '/26; 㪧㪟㪈㪈
%.76%* %.76%* .'(6 4+)*6 .'(6 4+)*6
5'0514 5'0514 %.76%* %.76%* %.76%* 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 610'4/1614 㪛㪜㪭㪜㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪬㪧㪧㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪙㪣㪍㪙㪣㪌㪞㪧㪉㪰㪋㪇㪇㪈㪇㪢㪇㪝㪙㪣㪋㪙㪣㪊
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㪧㪮㪈㪇㪌㪊㪇 &'05+6; 㪛㪈㪉㪝㪄㪉㪋㪙㪚
㪜㫉㪅㩷㪣㪜㪛㩷㪧㪚㪙㪘㪪㪝㪥㪍㪇㪊㪎㪉
5'0514 *'#6'4$.19'4
%11.$.19'4
KIP 7100 Overall Circuit Diagram (EUR/230V)

㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿
㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪪㫋㫆㫇
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪋㪈㪇㪎㪁
KIP 7100 SCANNER DIAGRAM

㪡㪈㪍
㪥㪅㪚㪅
㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪙㪄㪏㪧㪄㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭
㪪㪠㪞
㪈
㪊㪌㪭
㪞㪥㪛
NOTE: 1. Items shown by gray are not used.
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪌㪁
㪡㪈㪉㪋
㪋
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪪㪠㪞
㪉
㪌
㪊㪉㪈
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉
㪡㪈㪎
㪍㪞㪥㪛㪥㪅㪚㪅
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪪㪠㪞
㪈
㪎
㶎㩷㪙㪊㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙㩷㹢㩷㪡㪈㪈㪃㪡㪈㪉㪃㪡㪈㪊㪃㪡㪈㪋㪃㪡㪈㪌㪃㪡㪈㪎
㪏㪞㪥㪛㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪋㪁
means the cable.
㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏
㪡㪈㪈
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪈㪈㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪞㪥㪛

㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪪㪟㪶㪩㪉㪉㪪㪟㪶㪩㪌㪭
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪌㪁
㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪞㪥㪛㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㶎㩷㪙㪉㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙㩷㹢㩷㪡㪈㪍
㪡㪈㪉
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㶎㩷㪛㪝㪈㪊㪙㪄㪊㪧㪄㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭㩷㹢㩷㪡㪋㪍
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂㪞㪥㪛

㪡㪎
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪈㪦㪪㪉㪌㪭
㪛㪈㪂㩷㪍㪍㪛㪈㪂
㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪊㪁

㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄
㪦㪪㪈㪊㪊㪦㪪㪈
㪡㪉㩷㩷㪛㪝㪉㪇㪝㪄㪉㪇㪛㪧㪄㪈㪭
㪛㪈㪄㪏㪏㪛㪈㪄㪪㪠㪞

㪊㪉㪈
㪛㪝㪉㪇㪝㪄㪉㪇㪛㪧㪄㪈㪭
㪈㪊㪉
㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪊
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂㪞㪥㪛

㪦㪪㪇㪌㪌㪦㪪㪇
㪚㪠㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪌㪭
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪣㪚㪦㪂㪈㪇㪈㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂
㪡㪉㪋
㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪋㪁

㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄
㪚㪥㪏㪇㪊㪈㪄
㪡㪊㩷㪌㪉㪎㪐㪊㪄㪈㪌㪎㪇
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪎㪎㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪣㪚㪦㪄㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪚㪦㪄㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫
㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽
㪡㪈㪋
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪞㪥㪛

㪪㪧㪐㪐㪪㪧
㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪈㪋㪈㪋㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪌㪭
㪪㪧㪈㪇㪈㪇㪪㪧㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪋㪁
㪞㪥㪛㪈㪌㪈㪌㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢
㪞㪥㪛㪈㪍㪈㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠
㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟㪈㪎㪈㪎㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪡㪈㪌
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪞㪥㪛
㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪌㪭
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪊㪁
2. CA
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪇㪁㪊㪌㪭
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪊
㪋
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪏㪁
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪈㪈㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪎㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪊㪁
㪪㪟㪶㪩㪉㪉㪪㪟㪶㪩㪏㪞㪥㪛
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄㪪㪠㪞㪈

㪊
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉
㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛㪉

㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂
㪥㪅㪚㪅㪊
㪛㪜㪉㪇㪝㪄㪈㪇㪛㪧㪄㪈㪭
㪈㪊㪉㪈㪊㪉㪈
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪈㪦㪪㪉㪛㪈㪂㩷㪍㪍㪛㪈㪂㪪㪠㪞㪋

㪡㪎
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪇㪄㪎

㪩㪼㪸㫉
㪎㪛㪇㪄
㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪞㪥㪛㪌
㪡㪐
㪦㪪㪈㪊㪊㪦㪪㪈㪛㪈㪄㪏㪏㪛㪈㪄㪌㪭㪍

㪪
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂㪪㪠㪞㪎

㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋
㪡㪉㪊
㪞㪥㪛㪏
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜
㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄㪌㪭㪐
㪪
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪎㪎㪘㪞㪥㪛㪣㪚㪦㪄㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪚㪦㪄

㪥㪅㪚㪅㪈㪇
㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢
㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫
㪪㪧㪐㪐㪪㪧㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪈㪋㪈㪋㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘
㪪㪧㪈㪇㪈㪇㪪㪧㪞㪥㪛㪈㪌㪈㪌㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢㪞㪥㪛㪈㪍㪈㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟㪈㪎㪈㪎㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟

㪚㪠
㪬㪙㪩㪋㪋㪄㪋㪥㪌㪚㪈㪇
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪫㪦㩷㪧㪚
㪭㪙㪬㪪㪈
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐
㪬㪪㪙㪉㪅㪇
㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪈㪉㪭㪛㪄㪉
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩
㪡㪋
㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛㪉㪞㪥㪛

㪡㪍
㪛㪂㪊
㪊㪌㪭㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪐㪁
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪉
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪏㪁㪋
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏

㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄
㪩㪜㪄㪟㪇㪉㪉㪫㪛㩷
㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪞㪥㪛
㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂
㪄㪈㪈㪊㪇
㪡㪧㪈㩷
㪡㪎
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪦㪪㪉
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪈㪛㪈㪂㩷㪍㪍㪛㪈㪂
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪐㪈㪉㪈㪄㪇㪈㪁
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄

㪤㪘㪠㪙㪦㪘㪩
㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪙㪦㪘
㪛㪈㪄㪏㪏㪛㪈㪄
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪥㪐㪈㪉㪈㪄
㪋㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂
㪦㪪㪇㪌㪌㪦㪪㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂㪈㪇㪈㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂

㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪙㪄㪏㪧㪄
㪡㪉㪉
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄

㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭
㪡㪌㩷
㪤㪘㪠㪥

㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫
㪙㪍㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄
㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙

㪡㪏㩷
㪚㪠㪪㩷

㪚㪠
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪙㪌㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄
㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙
㪊㪌㪭
㪡㪉㩷
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪏㪁
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪈
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪎㪁㪋
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪉㪁
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏
㪪㪟㪶㪩㪉㪉㪪㪟㪶㪩㪏㪞㪥㪛㪤㪫㪩㪶㪧㪬㪣㪪㪜㪈㪈㪤㪫㪩㩷㪧㪬㪣㪪

㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄㪤㪫㪩㪶㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪉㪉㪤㪫㪩㩷㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫

㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪞㪥㪛
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪄㪈㪇㪧㪄㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭
㪇㪊
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪄㪈㪇㪧㪄㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭
㪊㪇
㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂㪈㪋
㪋㪈
㪡㪎
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪈㪦㪪㪉
㪘㪩㪛
㪡㪌㪌㪉
㪉㪌㪌㪉
㪡㪈㪉㪍
㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄㪊㪍㪍㪊

㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪋㪎㪎㪋
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂
㪌㪏㪏㪌
㪦㪪㪇㪌㪌㪦㪪㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂㪈㪇
㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪈㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂
㪡㪉㪈
㪍㪐
㪐㪍
㪚㪥㪎㪇㪉㪋㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄㪉㪋㪭㪦㪥㪈㪇㪈㪇㪉㪋㪭㪦㪥


㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽
㪠㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩
㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢
㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩
㪪㪧㪐㪐㪪㪧㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪈㪋㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪇㪁
㪈㪋㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪌㪭㪈㪈㪌㪭
㪪㪧㪈㪇㪈㪇㪪㪧㪞㪥㪛㪈㪌㪈㪌㪞㪥㪛㪊㪅㪊㪭㪉㪉㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢
㪙㪈㪇㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄㪪㪤㪊㪄㪫㪙
㪞㪥㪛㪈㪍㪈㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪙㪈㪇㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄㪪㪤㪊㪄㪫㪙
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪊㪊㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪏㪁
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪋㪋㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪌㪭㪌㪌㪌㪭
㪡㪌㪌㪋
㪡㪈㪉
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪉㪭㪍㪍㪈㪉㪭
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛㪎
㪎㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪊㪌㪭㪞㪥㪛㪏㪏㪞㪥㪛㪉㪋㪭㪈
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㩿㪉㪋㪭㪀
㪜㪣㪧㪄㪇㪋㪥㪭㩷
㪋㪊㪉㪈
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪎㪁
㪙㪋㪧㪄㪭㪟
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪇
㪋㪞㪥㪛㪐㪐㪞㪥㪛㪉㪋㪭㪉
㪡㪌㪇㪈
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪍㪁
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭㪞㪥㪛㪈㪇㪈㪇㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛㪊
㪍㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪪㪫㪜㪧㪧㪠㪥㪞㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏

㪞㪥㪛㪈㪈㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪎
㪡㪌㪇㪊
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪙㪊㪙㪄㪯㪟㪄㪘
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄㪬㪈
㪊㪉㪈
㪪㪠㪞㪉㪉㪪㪠㪞
㪡㪌㪌㪈
㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪞㪥㪛㪭㪉
㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂㪤㪊
㪡㪎
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪈㪦㪪㪉
㪘㪩㪛
㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪊㪁
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄
㪡㪉㩷㩷㪛㪝㪉㪇㪝㪄㪉㪇㪛㪧㪄
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂
㪡㪉㪇
㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪄㪋㪧㪄
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪎㪎㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪌㪈㪌
㪣㪚㪦㪄㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪚㪦㪄
㪯㪞㪏㪮㪄
㪈㪋㪋㪈
㪡㪉㪍
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪯㪞㪏㪮㪄
㪈㪋㪋㪈
㪡㪉㪌
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇
㪡㪍
㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪍㪁
9. 3 Overall Diagram (for New Scanner)
9-3 K124sm9e2
KIP 7100 Overall Circuit Diagram (USA/120V)
KIP 7100 Overall Circuit Diagram (EUR/230V)

KIP7100 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KIP7100 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KIP7100 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

1. 3 Specifications for Originals 1- 7

1. 5 Specifications for Scan Original 1-10

1. 6 Specifications for Printing Media 1-13

(2) KIP HDP technology generates no waste toner.

(10) User-friendly touch screen control panel with tilt / swivel

Minimum 210mm / 8.5”

Print size ISO (mm)

Warm up time Shorter than 4 minutes 30 seconds

NOTE (for Old Scanner)

NOTE (for New Scanner)

Scanning speed 65 mm per second (mono, 600dpi)

1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals

(1) Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage)

No. Name Function

No. Name Function

Thickness 0.05mm to 0.6mm *1

Sticked with paste

Folded (Leading edge)

Made of metal or fabric

1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use

1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody

1. Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight.

Humidity(%) Possible problem Necessary treatment

If the media is humidified ;

Normal Print Loss of image

If the media is humidified ;

2. 3 Leveling KIP 7100 2- 6

2. 4 Setup of the Machine 2- 8

2. 5 Installing Monitor 2-14

2. 6 Installing Accessories 2-17

2. 7 KIP Installation Wizard 2-19

2. 8 Stitching Adjustment (for New Scanner) 2-23

1. Power source should be rated as:

1. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.

Site Environmental Conditions

Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.

800mm/32” or larger for Roll Deck

UI Unit Box Accessory Box

* Europe Model only

Exit Tray Box

UI Unit Box Accessory Box

* Europe Model only

Exit Tray Box

Confirm the following parts are attached to the product.

Original 1 each Cap Assy 4

Europe Model only

Pen 1 Bind Head 4

Exit Tray Box

Exit Tray 2 Exit Tray 2 1

Shading 1 Drum Box 1

for Old Scanner

for New Scanner

2. Remove the screws (2) at both sides.

3. Remove 4 screws (3) at the bottom of both sides.

4. Remove 6 screws (4) at the back on both sides.

6. Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6).

2. Carefully remove the protection mat (2) under the Drum.

3. Open the Cover 4 (3).